Ri4530 5530 Service Manual

Ri 4530/5530
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Feb.’02
2BC70941
Revision 1
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH
THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.
REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE REC-
OMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉES
CONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. .............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may
cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is
accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention
immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain
medical attention. ..............................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly...............
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

mechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related
brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other
serious accident. ...............................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If
it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause
electric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten
connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the
instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet
immediately. ......................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than
the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................
2BC/D
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions ............................................................................................................ 1-1-5
(1) Copier .............................................................................................................................................. 1-1-5
(2) Operation panel ............................................................................................................................... 1-1-6
1-1-3 Machine cross section ........................................................................................................................... 1-1-7
1-1-4 Drive system ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1-8
(1) Drive system 1 (optical section) ....................................................................................................... 1-1-8
(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train) ................................................................................. 1-1-9
(3) Drive system 3 (Deck drive motor drive train) ............................................................................... 1-1-10
(4) Drive system 4 (image formation motor drive train) ....................................................................... 1-1-11
(5) Drive system 5 (Paper conveying motor drive train) ...................................................................... 1-1-12
(6) Drive system 6 (duplex section) .................................................................................................... 1-1-13
(7) Drive system 7 (DF) ....................................................................................................................... 1-1-14
1-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Drum ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Developer and toner .............................................................................................................................. 1-2-1
1-2-3 Installation environment ........................................................................................................................ 1-2-1
1-3 Installation
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation .................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Installation procedure ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes ................................................................................................................... 1-3-15
1-3-3 Installing the key counter (option) ....................................................................................................... 1-3-16
1-3-4 Installing the multi/simple finisher (option) .......................................................................................... 1-3-18
1-3-5 Installing the side deck (option) ........................................................................................................... 1-3-24
1-3-6 Installing the Network scanner kit (option) .......................................................................................... 1-3-28
1-3-7 Installing the Printer kit (option) ........................................................................................................... 1-3-30
1-3-8 Installing the tandem kit (option) ......................................................................................................... 1-3-33
1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-4-1 Copier management .............................................................................................................................. 1-4-1
(1) Using the copier management mode ............................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Setting department management items ........................................................................................... 1-4-2
(3) Weekly timer .................................................................................................................................... 1-4-2
(4) Copy default .................................................................................................................................... 1-4-3
(5) Machine default ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-5
(6) Bypass setting ................................................................................................................................. 1-4-6
(7) Document management default setting ........................................................................................... 1-4-6
(8) Hard disk management ................................................................................................................... 1-4-7
(9) Report .............................................................................................................................................. 1-4-7
(10) Language ......................................................................................................................................... 1-4-7
1-4-2 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................ 1-4-8
(1) Executing a maintenance item ........................................................................................................ 1-4-8
(2) Maintenance mode item list ............................................................................................................. 1-4-9
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ........................................................................................... 1-4-12
1-5 Troubleshooting 1-1-1

1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................. 1-5-3
(3) Paper misfeeds ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-9
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5-20
(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................. 1-5-20
(2) Self diagnostic codes ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-21
2BC/D-1
1-5-3 Image formation problems .................................................................................................................. 1-5-31

(1) No image appears (entirely white). ................................................................................................ 1-5-33
(2) No image appears (entirely black). ................................................................................................ 1-5-33
(3) Image is too light. .......................................................................................................................... 1-5-34
(4) Background is visible. .................................................................................................................... 1-5-34
(5) A white line appears longitudinally. ............................................................................................... 1-5-34
(6) A black line appears longitudinally. ............................................................................................... 1-5-35
(7) A black line appears laterally. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-35
(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. .................................................................... 1-5-35
(9) Black dots appear on the image. ................................................................................................... 1-5-36
(10) Image is blurred. ............................................................................................................................ 1-5-36
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................. 1-5-36
(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................. 1-5-37
(13) Paper creases. .............................................................................................................................. 1-5-37
(14) Offset occurs. ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-37
(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................. 1-5-38
(16) Fixing is poor. ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-38
(17) Image is out of focus. .................................................................................................................... 1-5-38
(18) Image center does not align with the original center. .................................................................... 1-5-38
(19) Image is not square. ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-39
(20) Image contrast is low (carrier scattering). ...................................................................................... 1-5-39
(21) There is a regular error between the centers of the original and copy image
when the DF is used. ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-39
(22) There is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and copy image
(23) There is a regular error between the trailing edges of the original and copy image
(24) When the duplex unit is used, the center of the original image and that of
the copy image do not align. .......................................................................................................... 1-5-40
(25) Toner scatters at the leading edge of the image. ....................................................................... 1-5-40-1
1-5-4 Electrical problems .............................................................................................................................. 1-5-41
• Copier .............................................................................................................................................. 1-5-41
(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is turned on. .............................................. 1-5-41
(2) The image formation motor does not operate (C2000). ................................................................ 1-5-41
(3) Paper feed motor does not operate (C2500). ................................................................................ 1-5-41
(4) The paper conveying motor does not operate (C2550). ................................................................ 1-5-42
(5) The deck drive motor does not operate (C2600). .......................................................................... 1-5-42
(6) The scanner motor does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-42
(7) The paper conveying fan motor does not operate. ........................................................................ 1-5-42
(8) The image formation fan motor does not operate. ........................................................................ 1-5-42
(9) The cooling fan motor does not operate. ....................................................................................... 1-5-43
(10) The fixing fan motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-43
(11) Eject fan motor 1 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-43
(12) Eject fan motor 2 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-43
(13) The HDD fan motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-43
(14) The power supply fan motor does not operate. ............................................................................. 1-5-43
(15) The upper lift motor does not operate (C1010). ............................................................................ 1-5-43
(16) The lower lift motor does not operate (C1020). ............................................................................. 1-5-43
(17) The deck right lift motor does not operate (C1100). ...................................................................... 1-5-44
(18) The deck left lift motor does not operate (C1110). ........................................................................ 1-5-44
(19) The toner feed motor does not operate. ........................................................................................ 1-5-44
(20) The main charger cleaning motor does not operate. ..................................................................... 1-5-44
1-1-2
(21) The toner agitation motor does not operate. ................................................................................. 1-5-44
(22) The transfer charger cleaning motor does not operate. ................................................................ 1-5-44
(23) The registration clutch does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-5-44
(24) Feed low clutch 1 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-45
(25) Feed high clutch 1 does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-5-45
(26) Feed low clutch 2 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-45
(27) Feed high clutch 2 does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-5-45
(28) Feed clutch 3 does not operate. .................................................................................................... 1-5-45
2BC/D
(29)
Feed clutch 4 does not operate. .................................................................................................... 1-5-45
(30)
Feed clutch 5 does not operate. .................................................................................................... 1-5-45
(31)
Paper feed clutch 1 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-46
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. .......................................................................... 1-5-46
(36)
The duplex forwarding clutch does not operate. ............................................................................ 1-5-47
(37)
The duplex reversing clutch does not operate. .............................................................................. 1-5-47
(38)
The deck feed clutch does not operate. ........................................................................................ 1-5-47
(39)
The bypass solenoid does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-47
(40)
The duplex eject switching solenoid does not operate. ................................................................. 1-5-47
(41)
The duplex pressure release solenoid does not operate. .............................................................. 1-5-47
(42)
The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-5-47
(43)
The fixing web solenoid does not operate. .................................................................................... 1-5-48
(44)
The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................. 1-5-48
(45)
The exposure lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................ 1-5-48
(46)
The exposure lamp does not turn off. ............................................................................................ 1-5-48
(47)
Fixing heater M or S does not turn on (C6000). ............................................................................ 1-5-48
(48)
Fixing heater M or S does not turn off. .......................................................................................... 1-5-48
(49)
Main charging is not performed (C5100). ...................................................................................... 1-5-48
(50)
Transfer charging is not performed (C5110). ................................................................................ 1-5-49
(51)
Separation charging is not performed (C5110). ............................................................................ 1-5-49
(52)
No developing bias is output. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-49
(53)
The original size is not detected. ................................................................................................... 1-5-49
(54)
The original size is not detected correctly. .................................................................................... 1-5-49
(55)
The touch panel keys do not work. ................................................................................................ 1-5-50
(56)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in drawer 1. ......... 1-5-50
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the
bypass table. ................................................................................................................................. 1-5-50
(61) The size of paper in drawer 1 is not displayed correctly. ............................................................... 1-5-50
(62) The size of paper in drawer 2 is not displayed correctly. ............................................................... 1-5-51
(63) The size of paper on the bypass table is not displayed correctly. ................................................. 1-5-51
(64) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated on the touch
panel immediately after the main switch is turned on. ................................................................... 1-5-52
(65) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front and right covers
are closed. ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-52
(66) Others. ........................................................................................................................................... 1-5-52
• DF .................................................................................................................................................. 1-5-53
(1) The original feed motor does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-5-53
(2) The original conveying motor does not operate. ........................................................................... 1-5-53
(3) The original feed solenoid does not operate. ................................................................................ 1-5-53
(4) The switchback feedshift solenoid does not operate. .................................................................... 1-5-53
(5) The eject feedshift solenoid does not operate. .............................................................................. 1-5-53
(6) The switchback pressure solenoid does not operate. ................................................................... 1-5-53
(7) The original feed clutch does not operate. .................................................................................... 1-5-54
(8) A message indicating cover open is displayed when the DF is closed correctly. .......................... 1-5-54
(9) An original jams when the main switch is turned on. ..................................................................... 1-5-54
1-5-5 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-55
1-1-3
• Copier ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5-55
(1) No primary paper feed. .................................................................................................................. 1-5-55
(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................. 1-5-55
(3) Skewed paper feed. ....................................................................................................................... 1-5-55
(4) The scanner does not travel. ......................................................................................................... 1-5-55
(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ................................................................................ 1-5-55
2BC/D
(6) No refeed. ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5-55

(7) Paper jams. ................................................................................................................................... 1-5-55
(8) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. .................................................................................... 1-5-56
(9) Abnormal noise is heard. ............................................................................................................... 1-5-56
• DF .................................................................................................................................................. 1-5-57
(1) No primary original feed. ............................................................................................................... 1-5-57
(2) No secondary original feed. ........................................................................................................... 1-5-57
(3) Originals jam. ................................................................................................................................. 1-5-57
1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) Precautions ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(2) Running a maintenance item ........................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1-6-2 Paper feed section ................................................................................................................................ 1-6-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, upper paper feed and lower paper feed pulleys ................ 1-6-3
(1-1) Detaching and refitting the pulleys of drawers 1, 2, and 3...................................................... 1-6-3
(1-2) Detaching and refitting the pulley of drawer 4 ........................................................................ 1-6-7
(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys .................... 1-6-10
(3) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner brush ................................................................... 1-6-13
(4) Detaching and refitting the lower registration cleaner ................................................................... 1-6-13
(5) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter .......................................................................................... 1-6-14
(6) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................. 1-6-15
(6-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing ..................................................... 1-6-15
(6-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing...................................... 1-6-16
(6-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ............................................................................ 1-6-17
(6-4) Adjusting the margins for printing ......................................................................................... 1-6-18
(6-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller ..................................... 1-6-19
(6-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the vertical conveying ................................... 1-6-20
1-6-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-21
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp .................................................................................... 1-6-21
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ..................................................................................... 1-6-22
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ................................................................................................ 1-6-22
(2-2) Refitting the scanner wires ................................................................................................... 1-6-25
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit ............................................................................... 1-6-27
(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) ................................................................................... 1-6-30
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ........................................................................ 1-6-31
(6) Adjusting scanner image lateral squareness (reference) .............................................................. 1-6-32
(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit .................................................................... 1-6-32
(6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU .......................................................................................... 1-6-33
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ......................................... 1-6-34
(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction .................................... 1-6-35
(9) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ............................................................................ 1-6-36
(10) Adjusting the scanner center line .................................................................................................. 1-6-37
(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................. 1-6-38
1-6-4 Main charging section ......................................................................................................................... 1-6-39
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wire and main charger grid .................................................... 1-6-39
(2) Detaching and refitting the grid wire cleaning pad and main charger wire cleaning pad ............... 1-6-41
1-6-5 Drum section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-6-42
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum ................................................................................................... 1-6-42
1-6-6 Developing section .............................................................................................................................. 1-6-44
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum ................................................................................................... 1-6-42
1-1-4
(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit ................................................................................... 1-6-44
(2) Detaching and refitting the developing unit upper seal .................................................................. 1-6-46
(3) Adjusting the position of the magnetic brush (developing roller) (reference) ................................ 1-6-46
(4) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference) .................................................................. 1-6-47
(5) Detaching and refitting the developing duct filter ........................................................................... 1-6-47
1-6-7 Transfer and separation section .......................................................................................................... 1-6-48
2BC/D-1
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wires and cleaning pads ........................................................ 1-6-48
1-6-8 Cleaning section .................................................................................................................................. 1-6-50
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw and cleaning lower seal ................................... 1-6-50
(2) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade .................................................................................... 1-6-52
(3) Detaching and refitting the thrust gear .......................................................................................... 1-6-52
(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning brush, front and rear cleaning seal and bushing brush ........ 1-6-53
1-6-9 Fixing section ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-55
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ............................................................................................ 1-6-55
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing heaters M and S ........................................................................ 1-6-55
(3) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ............................................................................................ 1-6-57
(4) Detaching and refitting the press roller .......................................................................................... 1-6-59
(5) Detaching and refitting the lower cleaning roller ............................................................................ 1-6-60
(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor ........................................................................... 1-6-61
(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing web roller ................................................................................... 1-6-62
(8) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claw .................................................................. 1-6-63
1-6-10 Duplex section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-64
(1) Cleaning the duplex switchback rollers ......................................................................................... 1-6-64
(2) Adjusting the position of the duplex eject switching solenoid ........................................................ 1-6-65
(3) Setting the switchback drive .......................................................................................................... 1-6-66
1-6-11 DF section ........................................................................................................................................... 1-6-67
(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF feed pulley ........................................... 1-6-67
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley ........................................................................ 1-6-67-1
(3) Adjusting the DF magnification ...................................................................................................... 1-6-68
(4) Adjusting the DF original center line .............................................................................................. 1-6-69
(5) Adjusting the scanning start position when the DF is used ........................................................... 1-6-70
(5-1) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration ........................................................................... 1-6-70
(5-2) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration ............................................................................ 1-6-71
(6) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF ......................................................... 1-6-72
1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................. 1-7-1
1-7-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ................................................................................................ 1-7-2
2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section ................................................................................................................................ 2-1-1
(1) Drawers 1 and 2 paper feed ............................................................................................................ 2-1-1
(1-1) Detecting the paper level ........................................................................................................ 2-1-2
(2) Drawers 3 and 4 paper feed ............................................................................................................ 2-1-6
(2-1) Drawer 3 paper feed ............................................................................................................... 2-1-7
(2-2) Drawer 4 paper feed ............................................................................................................... 2-1-9
(2-3) Raising and lowering the lift .................................................................................................. 2-1-11
(2-4) Detecting the paper level ...................................................................................................... 2-1-12
(3) Paper feed from the bypass table .................................................................................................. 2-1-13
2-1-2 Main charging section ......................................................................................................................... 2-1-15
2-1-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-17
(1) Original scanning ........................................................................................................................... 2-1-18
(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................ 2-1-19
(1) Formation of magnetic brush ......................................................................................................... 2-1-22
(2) Toner density control ..................................................................................................................... 2-1-24
(2-1) Toner empty detection by the toner sensor .......................................................................... 2-1-24
(2-2) Controlling the toner feed motor and toner agitation motor .................................................. 2-1-25
1-1-5
(2-3) Toner empty detection by the toner level sensor.................................................................. 2-1-25
(2-4) Toner control level absolute humidity correction .................................................................. 2-1-26
2-1-5 Transfer/separation and conveying sections ....................................................................................... 2-1-27
2-1-6 Cleaning section .................................................................................................................................. 2-1-29
2-1-7 Charge erasing section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-30
2-1-8 Fixing section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-31
2BC/D
2-1-9 Feedshift and eject sections ................................................................................................................ 2-1-33

2-1-10 Duplex section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-34
2-1-11 DF ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1-37
(1) Original feed section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-37
(1-1) Original feed timing ............................................................................................................... 2-1-38
(2) Original switchback section ........................................................................................................... 2-1-39
(2-1) Operation of original switchback ........................................................................................... 2-1-40
(3) Original conveying section ............................................................................................................. 2-1-41
(3-1) Original switchback/conveying timing ................................................................................... 2-1-42
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PCBs ............................................................................................................................................... 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors ...................................................................................................................... 2-2-2
(3) Motors .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-4
(4) Clutches and solenoids ................................................................................................................... 2-2-5
(5) Other electrical components ............................................................................................................ 2-2-6
(6) DF PCBs .......................................................................................................................................... 2-2-7
(7) DF switches and sensors ................................................................................................................ 2-2-8
(8) DF motors ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2-9
(9) DF clutches and solenoids ............................................................................................................ 2-2-10
2-3 Operation of the PCBs

2-3-1 Power source PCB ................................................................................................................................ 2-3-1
2-3-2 Main PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-6
2-3-3 Engine PCB ......................................................................................................................................... 2-3-11
2-3-4 Scanner drive PCB .............................................................................................................................. 2-3-19
2-3-5 CCD PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 2-3-22
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1
Timing chart No. 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2
Timing chart No. 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3
Timing chart No. 4 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4
Timing chart No. 5 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-5
Timing chart No. 6 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-6
Timing chart No. 7 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-7
Timing chart No. 8 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-8
Timing chart No. 9 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-9
Timing chart No. 10 ....................................................................................................................................... 2-4-10
Chart of image adjustment procedures ......................................................................................................... 2-4-11
Maintenance parts list ................................................................................................................................... 2-4-14
Periodic maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................. 2-4-15
Optional devices supplied parts list ............................................................................................................... 2-4-19
Functions and settings combination chart ..................................................................................................... 2-4-20
General wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................. 2-4-21
1-1-6
2BC/D
1-1-1 Specifications
45 cpm copier
Type ............................................... Console
Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" × 17"
Original feed system ...................... Fixed
Copy paper .................................... Drawers: Plain paper (60 – 80 g/m2)
Duplex unit: Plain paper (64 – 80 g/m2)
Bypass table: Plain paper (45 – 200 g/m2)
Special paper:
Transparencies, tracing paper and colored paper
Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" × 17"
Minimum: A6R/51/2" × 81/2"
During duplex copying
Maximum: A3/11" × 17"
Minimum: A5R/51/2" × 81/2"
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 400%, 1% increments
Auto copy mode: Fixed ratios
Metric
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.27/1:1.06/1:0.90/1:0.75/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25
Inch
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.54/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.77/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25
100% magnification ........................ Copier: ±0.8%
DF: ±1.5%
Enlargement/reduction ................... Copier: ±1.0%
DF: ±1.5%
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
A4/11" × 81/2": 45 copies/min.
A4R/81/2" × 11": 32 copies/min.
A3/11" × 17": 24 copies/min.
B4 (257 × 364 mm)/81/2" × 14": 28 copies/min.
B5: 45 copies/min.
B5R: 36 copies/min.
When the DF is used (at 100% magnification):
A4/11" × 81/2": 45 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ 3.9 s less (A4/11" × 81/2", 100% magnification, drawer 1, manual copy density
control)
Warm-up time ................................. 120 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65%RH)
With preheat, switchable between 90 s and 30 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F,
65%RH)
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Two 500-sheet drawers
One 1000-sheet drawer
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 100 sheets
Multiple copying ............................. 1 – 999 copies
Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 78 mm)
Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging
Recording system .......................... Semiconductor laser
Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and black toner
Density control: Developer density detection
Toner replenishing: Automatic from a toner bottle
Transfer system ............................. Single minus corona charge
Separation system ......................... AC separation corona charger system
1-1-1
2BC/D
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller

Heat source:
Halogen heaters (main 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 V
specifications, sub 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 V
specifications)
Control temperature: 185°C/365°F (at normal ambient temperature)
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: 150°C/302°F thermostats
Fixing pressure: 265 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
Cleaning system ............................ Cleaning blade and fur brush
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Bitmap memory .............................. 128 MB (standard)
Image storage memory .................. 20.0 GB (standard)
Resolution ...................................... Reading: 600 × 600 dpi
Writing: 1800 equivalent × 600 dpi
Light source ................................... Inert gas lamp
Dimensions .................................... 680 (W) × 804 (D) × 1141 (H) mm
2613/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D) × 4415/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 180 kg/396 lbs
Floor requirements ......................... 1331 mm (W) × 804 (D) mm
527/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D)
Functions ........................................ (1) Self-diagnostics
(2) Preheat
(3) Automatic copy density control
(4) Original size detection
(5) Automatic paper selection
(6) Automatic magnification selection
(7) Zoom mode
(8) XY zoom mode
(9) Preset zoom mode
(10) Document management functions
(11) Output management functions
(12) Photo mode
(13) Duplex copy
(14) Margin modes
(15) Memo mode
(16) Border erase modes
(17) Combine/merge copy modes
(18) Booklet stitching modes
(19) Sort/finished mode
(20) Auto selection/filing mode
(21) Copy management function
(22) Language selection function
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A
220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 7.0 A (max.)
Power consumption ....................... 1500 W (max.)
Options ........................................... Document finisher, key counter, printer kit, network scanner kit and tandem copy kit.
1-1-2
2BC/D
55 cpm copier
Type ............................................... Console
Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" × 17"
Original feed system ...................... Fixed
Copy paper .................................... Drawers: Plain paper (60 – 80 g/m2)
Duplex unit: Plain paper (64 – 80 g/m2)
Bypass table: Plain paper (45 – 200 g/m2)
Special paper:
Transparencies, tracing paper and colored paper
Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" × 17"
Minimum: A6R/51/2" × 81/2"
During duplex copying
Maximum: A3/11" × 17"
Minimum: A5R/51/2" × 81/2"
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 400%, 1% increments
Auto copy mode: Fixed ratios
Metric
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.27/1:1.06/1:0.90/1:0.75/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25
Inch
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.54/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.77/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25
100% magnification ........................ Copier: ±0.8%
DF: ±1.5%
Enlargement/reduction ................... Copier: ±1.0%
DF: ±1.5%
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
A4/11" × 81/2": 55 copies/min.
A4R/81/2" × 11": 38 copies/min.
A3/11" × 17": 28 copies/min.
B4 (257 × 364 mm)/81/2" × 14": 32 copies/min.
B5: 55 copies/min.
B5R: 40 copies/min.
When the DF is used (at 100% magnification):
A4/11" × 81/2": 55 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ 3.9 s less (A4/11" × 81/2", 100% magnification, drawer 1, manual copy density
control)
Warm-up time ................................. 120 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65%RH)
With preheat, switchable between 90 s and 30 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F,
65%RH)
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Two 500-sheet drawers
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 100 sheets
Multiple copying ............................. 1 – 999 copies
Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 78 mm)
Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging
Recording system .......................... Semiconductor laser
Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and black toner
Density control: Developer density detection
Toner replenishing: Automatic from a toner bottle
Transfer system ............................. Single minus corona charge
Separation system ......................... AC separation corona charger system
1-1-3
2BC/D
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller

Heat source:
Halogen heaters (main 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 V
specifications, sub 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 V
specifications)
Control temperature: 185°C/365°F (at normal ambient temperature)
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: 150°C/302°F thermostats
Fixing pressure: 265 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
Cleaning system ............................ Cleaning blade and fur brush
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Bitmap memory .............................. 128 MB (standard)
Image storage memory .................. 20.0 GB (standard)
Resolution ...................................... Reading: 600 × 600 dpi
Writing: 1800 equivalent × 600 dpi
Light source ................................... Inert gas lamp
Dimensions .................................... 680 (W) × 804 (D) × 1141 (H) mm
2613/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D) × 4415/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 180 kg/396 lbs
Floor requirements ......................... 1331 mm (W) × 804 (D) mm
527/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D)
Functions ........................................ (1) Self-diagnostics
(2) Preheat
(3) Automatic copy density control
(4) Original size detection
(5) Automatic paper selection
(6) Automatic magnification selection
(7) Zoom mode
(8) XY zoom mode
(9) Preset zoom mode
(10) Document management functions
(11) Output management functions
(12) Photo mode
(13) Duplex copy
(14) Margin modes
(15) Memo mode
(16) Border erase modes
(17) Combine/merge copy modes
(18) Booklet stitching modes
(19) Sort/finished mode
(20) Auto selection/filing mode
(21) Copy management function
(22) Language selection function
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A
220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 7.0 A (max.)
Power consumption ....................... 1500 W (max.)
Options ........................................... Side deck, document finisher, key counter, printer kit, network scanner kit and
tandem copy kit.
DF
Original feed system ...................... Automatic feed
Originals ......................................... Sheets
Original weights ............................. Single-sided original mode: 35 – 160 g/m2
Double-sided original mode: 50 – 120 g/m2
Original paper ................................ Plain paper, thermal paper, art paper and colored paper
Original sizes .................................. A3 – A5R, folio/11" × 17" – 51/2" × 81/2"
No. of originals ............................... Up to 70 sheets (A3, B4, folio, 11" × 17", 81/2" × 14")
Up to 100 sheets (up to A4/11" × 81/2")
Up to 30 sheets in the auto selection mode
Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the copier
1-1-4
2BC/D
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions
(1) Copier
1
2
9
3
8
4 0
5
! @
7
^% $ # (
&
*
‹‚ · —
¤
›
⁄ fi
fl
‡
⁄
„ ´
Figure 1-1-1
1 Operation panel # Original table fi Main switch

2 Operation right cover $ Original insert guides fl Copy eject tray
3 Front cover % DF original reversing cover ‡ Fixing unit handle
4 Drawer 1 ^ Original set indicator — Paper conveying unit handle
5 Drawer 2 & Original eject table · Paper conveying unit release
6 Drawer 3 * DF opening/closing lever lever
7 Drawer 4 ( Ejection extension ‚ Paper conveying unit
8 Bypass tray ) Deck paper conveying unit Œ Duplex unit
9 Insert guides ⁄ Handles for transport „ Paper length guide release
0 Bypass extension ¤ Original size indicator lines levers
! Right cover ‹ Contact glass ´ Paper width guide release
@ Waste toner box › Total counter levers
1-1-5
2BC/D
(2) Operation panel
@! 0 * & ^ % $ 7 6 5 4
# 9 8 1 2 3
Figure 1-1-2
1 Start key & indicator lamp # Scanner key & indicator lamp
2 Stop/clear key $ Auto selection key & indicator lamp
3 Reset key % Job build key & indicator lamp
4 Energy saver key & indicator lamp ^ Repeat copy key & indicator lamp
5 Interrupt key & indicator lamp & Job queue key & indicator lamp
6 Management key * Document management key &
7 *(default setting) key indicator lamp
8 Numeric key
9 Touch panel
0 Brightness adjustment control dial
! Copier key & indicator lamp
@ Printer key & indicator lamp
1-1-6
2BC/D
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Light path
Paper and original path
Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section
1 Paper feed section 7 Charge erasing section

2 Main charging section 8 Fixing section
3 Optical section 9 Feedshift and eject section
4 Developing section 0 Duplex section
5 Transfer and paper conveying section ! DF
6 Cleaning section
1-1-7
2BC/D
1-1-4 Drive system
(1) Drive system 1 (optical section)
Figure 1-1-4
1 Scanner motor pulley

2 Scanner drive belt
3 Scanner drive pulley
4 Scanner wire drum
5 Scanner wire
6 Scanner wire pulley
1-1-8
2BC/D
(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-5
1 Idle gear 30 # Paper feed drive pulley 29/52

2 Pulley 16 $ Idle pulley 31/42
3 Pulley 20 % Tension pulley 20
4 Developing agitation drive belt ^ Paper feed drive belt
5 Gear 32 & Idle gear 26
6 Feed gear 42 * Gear 26
7 Registration clutch gear ( Gear 19
8 Feed gear 27 ) Feed high clutch 2 gear
9 Feed low clutch 1 gear 34 ⁄ Gear 40
0 Feed gear 49/65 ¤ Gear 24
! Paper feed motor gear ‹ Feed low clutch 2 gear
@ Paper feed gear 68
1-1-9
2BC/D
(3) Drive system 3 (Deck drive motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-6
1 Pulley 26 ! Deck drive motor gear

2 Tension pulley @ Pulley 20
3 Paper feed drive belt # Deck conveying belt
4 Idle gear 26 $ Deck feed clutch gear
5 Paper feed clutch 3 gear % Deck gear 27/45
6 Feed clutch 5 gear ^ Idle gear 48
7 Deck paper feed drive pulley & Paper feed clutch 4 gear
8 Tension pulley 20 * Paper feed pulley drive gear
9 Deck paper feed drive belt ( Gear 21
0 Feed gear 49/65 ) Gear 16
1-1-10
2BC/D
(4) Drive system 4 (image formation motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-7
1 Bypass paper feed idle gear 0 Drum drive belt

2 Gear 20 ! Gear 19
3 Gear 30 @ Registration gear 24
4 Gear 39/25 # Registration clutch gear
5 Drum drive pulley 23/84 $ Pulley 40/28
6 Image formation motor gear % Cleaning drive belt
7 Gear 63/35 ^ Gear 26
8 Drum pulley 51 & Gear 30
9 Tension pulley * Drum
Figure 1-1-8 Developing section
1 Toner supply gear 5 Spiral gear A

2 Developing idle gear 6 Spiral gear B
3 Developing input gear 7 Spiral gear C
4 Developing sleeve gear
1-1-11
2BC/D
(5) Drive system 5 (Paper conveying motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-9
1 Pulley 32 # Gear 18/26

2 Pulley 24 $ Fixing joint gear
3 Pulley 22 % Heat roller gear
4 Eject drive belt ^ Heat roller
5 Eject drive gear & Gear 26
6 Fixing gear 35 * Gear 25
7 Fixing pulley 34 ( Fixing eject joint gear
8 Fixing gear 63/32 ) Pulley 22
9 Paper conveying motor gear ⁄ Switch back pulley 20
0 Fixing drive belt ¤ Pulley 30
! Duplex gear 45/30 ‹ Feed shift belt pulley
@ Duplex gear 29/42 › Feed shift belt
1-1-12
2BC/D
(6) Drive system 6 (duplex section)
1
23
^
0 9 & 7
!
@
# 5
8 6 4
7%$
Figure 1-1-10
1 Duplex joint gear 0 Front transfer drive gear

2 Clutch gear 26 ! Gear 22
3 Paper conveying pulley 40 @ Gear 18
4 Paper conveying drive belt # Gear 17
5 Paper conveying tension pulley $ Gear 40
6 Paper conveying pulley 20 % Duplex forwarding clutch gear
7 Paper conveying pulley 20 ^ Gear 40
8 Duplex registration gear 20/30 & Duplex reversing clutch gear
9 Clutch gear 26
1-1-13
2BC/D
(7) Drive system 7 (DF)
4 3 #
9 5
6 @
!
^
0
1
7 8
2 $
*
& %
As viewed from machine rear
Figure 1-1-11 DF (inside rear of machine)
1 Original feed motor pulley 0 DF registration pulley 28/18

2 Pulley 35/22/22 ! Idle gear 15
3 Idle gear 26 @ Idle gear 20
4 Original feed clutch gear # Switch back gear 18
5 DF original feed pulley 18 $ DF registration drive belt
6 DF forwarding pulley 18 % Gear 22/35
7 Tension pulley ^ Original conveying motor pulley
8 Original feed drive belt & Gear 28
9 DF forwarding belt * Original conveying drive belt 1
8
6 0 3
9
7 5 1
4
2
!
As viewed from machine front
Figure 1-1-12 DF (inside front of machine)
1 Lower original conveying pulley 25/18 7 Joint gear 14

2 Gear 18/25 8 JAM release gear 14
3 Eject gear 18 9 Tension pulley
4 Middle original conveying pulley 18 0 Eject drive belt
5 Upper original conveying pulley 18 ! Conveying drive belt 2
6 JAM release gear 24
1-1-14
2BC/D
1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
• When removing the image formation unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
• Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between –20°C/–4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a relative humidity not higher
than 90% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
• Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
1-2-2 Developer and toner

Store the developer and toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-2-3 Installation environment
1. Temperature: 10 - 35°C/50 - 95°F

2. Humidity: 15 - 85%RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 12 A
220 - 240 V AC, 7.0 A (max.)
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ±0.3%/60 Hz ±0.3%
5. Installation location
• Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other
strong light when removing paper jams.
• Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto
the machine.
• Avoid dust and vibration.
• Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
• Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1° ).
• Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
• Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/315/16"
Machine right: 700 mm/279/16" Machine left: 600 mm/235/8"
a: 1141 mm/4415/16" d: 1470 mm/577/8"

b: 680 mm/2613/16" e: 1030 mm/409/16"
c: 804 mm/3111/16" f: 1375 mm/541/8"
Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions
1-2-1
2BC/D-1
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Start
Unpack.
Removing the securing tape and spacer. Initializing the developer

(run of maintenance mode U130).
Removing the pins Applying toner to the cleaning blade

holding light source units 1 and 2. (run of maintenance mode U160).
Removing the developing unit.

Exit maintenance mode.
Adding developer.
Setting the cleaning blade.
Installing the drum. Adding toner.
Adjusting the fixing pressure. Connect the drawer heater relay cable
and attach the OFF label.
Connect the power cord.

Make test copies.
Completion of the machine installation.
1-3-1
2BC/D-1
Unpack.
⁄
fi
¤ &
‹
^
)›
(
*
5
8
# %
1
9
9 3
0 $
6
7
Figure 1-3-1 Unpacking
1 Copier $ Supports
2 Machine cover % Bar code labels
3 Bottom pad ^ Power code
4 Upper left pad & Eject tray
5 Upper right pad * Drum set
6 Skid ( Tray spacer
7 Hinge joints ) OFF label
8 Eject pad ⁄ Size palates
9 Drawer spacer ¤ Screws (M3 × 08 flat-head taping chromate)
0 Drawer spacer ‹ Plastic bag
! Drawer spacer › Operation guide
@ Upper case fi Plastic bag
# Outer case
1-3-2
2BC/D
Removing the securing tape and the spacer.

Tape
1. Remove the piece of tape that secures the Tape
bypass tray.
2. Remove the piece of tape that secures the right
cover.
3. Remove the two pieces of tape that secure the
right rear cover.
4. Remove the four pieces of tape that secure the
drawers.
5. Remove the piece of tape that secures the front
cover.
6. Open the front cover and remove the piece of
tape that secures the DF. Tapes
Tapes
Figure 1-3-2
7. Pull out the duplex unit and remove the two

pieces of tape that secure the guide plates.
Tapes
Figure 1-3-3
8. Pull out drawer 1 and drawer 2 and remove the Spacer

spacer and the two blue screws from each Blue screw
drawer.
Blue screw
Figure 1-3-4
1-3-3
2BC/D-1
9. Pull out drawer 3, remove the spacer.

10. Pull out drawer 4, remove the spacer. Spacer
* The lift or the guide may be deformed or damaged when
turns the main switch on with the spacers mounted.
Consequently, be sure to remove the spacers.
Spacer
Figure 1-3-5
11. Open the DF and remove the piece of tape that

secures the original inverse cover.
12. Remove the paper from the platen. Tape
Paper
Figure 1-3-6
Removing the pins holding light source units 1 and 2. Light source unit 1 pins
1. Remove the securing tape from the two pins on
the light source unit 1 and from the pin on the
light source unit 2, and then remove these pins.
Light source unit 2 pin
Figure 1-3-7
1-3-4
2BC/D
Removing the developing unit.

1. Open the front cover, pull out the hinge shaft to
remove, and remove the front cover.
Front cover
Hinge
shaft
Figure 1-3-8
2. Remove the screw holding the image formation
left cover and then the cover. Image formation left cover
Figure 1-3-9
3. Remove the three screws and the connector that
secure the image formation unit and turn down Connector
Image formation unit
the paper conveying unit release lever to pull out
the image formation unit.
Paper conveying unit

release lever
Figure 1-3-10
1-3-5
2BC/D
4. Remove the two screws and open the image

Image formation rail
formation rail.
Figure 1-3-11
1P connector Sub toner hopper

5. Remove the 1P connector from the developing
unit and the 4P connector from the sub toner
hopper. Raise the shutter a little and slide it
toward the front side of the machine.
6. Turn the auxiliary toner hopper to the right of the
machine.
4P connector
Shutter
Figure 1-3-12
7. Hold the front and the rear of the developing unit

and remove the unit from the image formation
Developing unit
unit.
Figure 1-3-13
1-3-6
2BC/D
Adding developer.
1. Remove the two screws and the two hooks and

remove the upper developer cover.
* When adding developer, place the developing Upper developer cover
unit on a level location.
Hook
Hook
Figure 1-3-14
2. Shake the developer bottle sufficiently to stir the

developer.
3. While turning the developing magnet roller gear
and the developing spiral cam in the directions
indicated by the arrows alternately, add
developer uniformly into the developing unit.
* Never turn the developing magnet roller gear in
the reverse direction.
4. Refit the upper developer cover to its original
position.
Gear
Cam
Developer
Figure 1-3-15
1-3-7
2BC/D-1
Installing the drum. Connector

Main charger unit
Pin
1. Remove the two connectors from the main
charger unit.
2. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the pin at
the rear of the main charger unit and remove the
main charger unit from the image formation unit.
Connector
Figure 1-3-16
3. Remove the screw each from the front drum Front drum Rear drum
positioning plate and the rear drum positioning positioning plate positioning plate
plate and remove the plates.
Figure 1-3-17
4. Fit the front drum positioning plate and the rear Front drum Rear drum
positioning plate positioning plate
drum positioning plate to the drum, and set them Drum
on the image formation unit.
5. Secure the front drum positioning plate and the
rear drum positioning plate with a screw each.
* Fit the drum so that the side with the thin shaft of
the drum flange is placed on the front side of the
machine and the side with the thick shaft of the
drum flange is placed on the rear side.
6. Refit the main charger unit and the developing
unit to their original positions.
7. Refit the image formation unit to their original
positions.
* Be sure to reconnect the connector of the image
formation unit.
Figure 1-3-18
1-3-8
2BC/D
Adjusting the fixing pressure.

1. Remove the blue screw that secures the paper
conveying unit. Paper conveying unit
2. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
Blue screw
Figure 1-3-19
3. Open the eject cover.
4. Turn the fixing press nuts on the front and rear of
the fixing unit clockwise to adjust the fixing
pressure.
5. Close the eject cover.
6. Push the paper conveying unit into the machine
and raise the paper conveying unit release lever
to secure the unit.
Fixing press nut
Fixing press nut
Eject cover
Figure 1-3-20
1-3-9
2BC/D
Connecting the power cord.

1. Refit the front cover to its original position.
2. Connect the power cord to the connector on the copier.*
* 200-240 V specifications only.
3. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet. and turn on the main switch with the front cover open.
Initializing the developer (run of maintenance mode U130).

1. After warm-up starts and the message “Close the front cover.” appears, use the numeric keys to
enter “10871087” to start the maintenance mode.
2. Use the numeric keys to enter “130” and press the Start key.
3. Close the front cover.
4. Press the Start key.
* After approximately two minutes, the toner sensor control voltage and the toner control level will
be automatically set and the preset values will be displayed on the touch panel.
Example of display
INPUT: 130 (toner sensor output voltage)
CONTROL: 125 (toner sensor control voltage)
TARGET: 103 (toner feed start level)
HUMID: 65 (absolute humidity)
5. Press the Stop/clear key.
Applying toner to the cleaning blade (run of maintenance mode U160).

1. Use the numeric keys to enter “160” and press the Start key.
2. Press the Start key.
* The drum will be covered with toner and driving will stop automatically.
Exit maintenance mode.

1. Open and close the front cover, use the numeric keys to enter “001”, and press the Start key.
* The machine will exit from the maintenance mode.
Setting the cleaning blade.
1. Open the front cover. Remove the three screws

and the connector that secure the image
formation unit and turn down the paper conveying
unit release lever to pull out the image formation
Blade securing pin
unit.
2. After checking that the drum is covered with
toner, loosen the blade securing pin on the left
side of the imaging unit, slide the blade release
lever in the direction indicated by the arrow, and
tighten the blade securing pin.
* The cleaning blade will be set so that it touches
the drum.
3. Push the image formation unit into the machine to
set, and raise the paper conveying unit release
lever.
4. Fit the three screws and the connector to secure
the image formation unit.
Blade release lever
Figure 1-3-21
1-3-10
2BC/D
Adding toner. Operation right cover
1. Open the operation right cover.
Figure 1-3-22
2. Hold a new toner bottle upside down and tap the

bottom approximately 10 times.
Toner bottle
Figure 1-3-23
3. Shake the toner bottle up and down and from
side to side approximately 10 times.
Figure 1-3-24
1-3-11
2BC/D
4. Push the round hole of the toner bottle to the

metal pin at the opening for toner replenishment.
5. While pushing down the toner bottle, turn it 90°
clockwise.
Metal pin
Figure 1-3-25
6. Wait until toner drops.
Figure 1-3-26
7. To drop toner completely, tap the side of the

toner bottle approximately 10 times.
Figure 1-3-27
1-3-12
2BC/D-1
8. Turn the toner bottle to the original position while

pushing it down, and gently remove it from the
opening for toner replenishment.
9. Close the operation right cover.
Figure 1-3-28
Connect the drawer heater relay cable and attach the OFF label.
1. Remove the lower rear cover.
2. Connect the connector of the drawer heater relay
cable to CN12 of the power source PCB.
3. Refit the lower rear cover.
Drawer heater relay cable Power souce PCB
Drawer heater relay cable

CN12
Figure 1-3-29
1-3-13
2BC/D-1
4. Attach the OFF label to the OFF ( ) side of the

main switch.
OFF label
Figure 1-3-30
Make test copies.

1. Set paper in a drawer and execute a test copy
run.
Completion of the machine installation.
1-3-14
2BC/D-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes
Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance Contents Factory setting

item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count (A3/LEDGER)
U254 Turning auto start function on/off ON
U255 Setting auto clear time 90s
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off ON
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection SINGLE MODE, 5
U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DF FACE-DOWN
U264 Setting the display order of the date Month/Day/Year (inch)
Day/Month/Year (metric)
U266 Setting the number of days after which to automatically
delete documents 7
U329 Setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy ON
U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking moce
during sort operation 100
U331 Switching the paper ejection mode FACE UP
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode OFF
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode ENERGY STAR
U347 Setting auto drawer size detection ON
U350 Setting the ID-code error output OFF
U355 Setting the output mode for face up output FIRST PRINT
User setting Exposure mode Manual

Exposure steps 1 step
Original image quality Text+Photo
Paper selection APS
Default drawer Drawer1
Default magnification Manual
Margin width Left: 6 mm / 1/4" Top: 0 mm / 0"
Border erase width Outside border: 6 mm / 1/4"
Center area: 6 mm / 1/4"
Copy limit 999
Auto shutoff time 90
Auto preheat time 15
1-3-15
2BC/D
1-3-3 Installing the key counter (option)
Key counter installation requires the following parts:

Key counter set (P/N 2A369703)
Contents of the set:
• Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010)
• Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030)
• Key counter cover retainer (P/N 66060022)
• Key counter mount (P/N 66060040)
• Key counter socket assembly (P/N 41529210)
• Four (4) M4 × 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060)
• Two (2) M4 × 10 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304100)
• One (1) M4 × 20 bronze TP-A screw (P/N B4304200)
• One (1) M4 × 6 chrome TP-A screw (P/N B4104060)
• One (1) M3 × 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1303080)
• One (1) M4 × 30 bronze binding screw (P/N B1304300)
• Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060)
• One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000)
Procedure
1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the
key counter retainer using the two screws
and nut.
2. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)
cover using the two screws, and attach the
key counter retainer to the mount using the Key counter retainer (66060030)
two screws. Key counter mount (66060040)
M3 nut
(C2303000) Key counter cover
(2A360010)
M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)
Key counter socket assembly

(41529210)
M3 × 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)
Figure 1-3-32
1-3-16
2BC/D
3. Remove the developing duct cover and

middle right cover.
4. Cut out the aperture plate on the middle right
cover using nippers.
5. Pass the 4-pin connector of the key counter
through the apertures in the key counter
cover retainer and middle right cover, and
insert into the 4-pin connector inside the
machine.
6. Seat the projection of the key counter cover
retainer in the aperture in the middle right
cover, and fasten them both to the machine
using the two screws.
7. Refit all the removed parts.
8. Fit the key counter cover with the key counter
assembly inserted to the key counter cover
retainer on the machine.
4-pin connector Aperture Middle right cover
4-pin connector Key counter cover retainer

(66060022)
M4 × 30 screw
(B1304300)
Key counter cover
M4 × 20 screw M4 × 6 screw
(B4304200) (B4104060)
Figure 1-3-33
9. Insert the key counter into the key counter

assembly.
10. Turn the main switch on and enter the
maintenance mode.
11. Run maintenance item U204 and select
“KEY-COUNTER.”
12. Exit the maintenance mode.
13. Check that the message requesting the key
counter to be inserted is displayed on the
touch panel when the key counter is pulled
out.
14. Check that the counter counts up as copies
are made.
1-3-17
2BC/D
1-3-4 Installing the multi/simple finisher (option)

Left cover
Preparation
1. Attach the paper insertion aid guide plate to
the left cover of the copier and lock down with
the two M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screws.
Paper insertion aid guide plate
Figure 1-3-34
2. Attach the finisher connecting plate to the

copier left cover and then hold them together
with the two M4 × 12 binding screws. Left cover
Finisher connecting plate
Figure 1-3-35
3. Attach the connecting sponge to the finisher

by aligning the sponge to the upper end “a”
and front end “b” of the paper port of the
a
finisher.
a Connecting sponge
Figure 1-3-36
1-3-18
2BC/D
4. Open the front cover of the finisher.

5. Remove the screw and raise the connecting
lever at the bottom of the finisher. Fitting the
projection into the hole lowers the hooks.
Hooks
Projection
Hole
Connecting lever
Figure 1-3-37
6. Remove the screw and pull out the

connecting rail at the upper part of the
finisher.
Connecting rail
Figure 1-3-38
1-3-19
2BC/D
7. Join the finisher and the copier by hanging

the hooks onto the fittings inside the copier.
8. Join the finisher and the copier so that the
long pin of the finisher connecting plate is
inserted into the hole at the rear of the
finisher and the two short pins into the holes
on the connecting rail.
Finisher
Hole
Holes
Connecting rail
Long pin
Finisher connecting plate
Hooks Fittings
Short pins
Figure 1-3-39
9. Make sure that the finisher is securely joined

with the copier. Then, push the connecting rail
in and lock back down with the screw.
Connecting rail
Figure 1-3-40
1-3-20
2BC/D
10. Slide the connecting lever rightward and lock

down with the screw removed in step.
Connecting lever
Figure 1-3-41
11. Remove the four blue screws locking each of

the two separate retainers to the intermediate
tray and detach both retainers.
Blue screws
Intermediate tray
Separate retainers
Blue screws
Figure 1-3-42
1-3-21
2BC/D
12. Pull out the intermediate tray.

13. Remove the strip of fixing tape from the
Release lever
release lever.
Intermediate tray
Strip of fixing tape
Figure 1-3-43
14. Raise the release lever to open the

intermediate tray, and then remove the four
strips of fixing tape.
Strips of fixing tape
Release lever
Intermediate tray
15. Insert a stapler cartridge into each of the
staplers and of the intermediate tray. Press on
the cartridges until they are securely locked. Figure 1-3-44
Note: With the simple finisher, attach just one
stapler cartridge to the stapler.
Stapler
Stapler
Intermediate tray
Stapler cartridge
Figure 1-3-45
1-3-22
2BC/D
16. Fit the main tray with two hexagonal nuts.

17. Secure the main tray with two pins.
18. Attach the sub tray to the finisher by inserting
the projections at the front and back of the
sub tray into the holes of the finisher. (For the
multi finisher only)
19. Attach label A to the recessed portion on the
side of the main tray.
20. Attach label B to the recessed portion on the
side of the sub tray. (For the multi finisher
only)
Hexagonal nuts Sub tray

Main tray
Projection
Hole
Projection
Pins
Hole
Label A Label B
Figure 1-3-46
21. Connect the signal cable of the finisher to the

connector of the copier.
22. Plug the copier’s power cable into a wall
outlet and turn the copier on from the main
switch.
Signal cable
Figure 1-3-47
1-3-23
2BC/D
1-3-5 Installing the side deck (option)
Middle right cover

Preparation
1. Remove the screw locking down the
developing duct cover followed by the cover.
Then, disconnect the 2-pin connector from
the cooling fan.
2. Remove the six screws locking down the
bypass table and open the table. Open the Bypass table
2-pin connector
right cover halfway and detach the middle
right cover.
Right cover
Developing duct cover
Figure 1-3-48
3. Remove the two pins locking down the right

rear lower cover and then detach the cover by
sliding in the direction of the arrow.
4. Remove the two screws locking down the
right front lower cover followed by the cover.
Pin
Right front lower cover Right rear lower cover
Pin
Figure 1-3-49
5. Break off the three knock-out pieces on the
right cover of the copier.
Note: Be sure to remove the burrs from the
cover using needle-nose pliers or a knife.
6. Remove the four screws locking down the
Right cover
paper feed section lower cover followed by
the cover. Break off the knock-out piece on
the paper feed section lower cover.
Note: Be sure to remove the burrs from the
cover using needle-nose pliers or a knife. Knock-out pieces
Paper feed section lower cover
Knock-out piece
Figure 1-3-50
1-3-24
2BC/D
7. Reattach the paper feed section lower cover,

right rear lower cover and right front lower
cover.
8. Open the right cover and remove from the
copier by raising the cover in the direction of
the arrow.
Right cover
Figure 1-3-51
9. Attach the upper merge guide with two M4 ×

8 TP-P tight screws.
Lower merge guide
Note: With the 55 cpm copier, be sure to use
the merge guide with “2BD” etched on it.
M4 × 8 TP-P tight screws
Figure 1-3-52
10. Attach the upper merge guide with two M4 ×
8 TP-P tight screws.
Upper merge guide
M4 × 8 TP-P tight screws
Figure 1-3-53
1-3-25
2BC/D
11. Lock down the upper and lower merge guides Upper merge guide
with the four M3 × 6 TP-A bronze screws.
Lower merge guide
M3 × 6 TP-A bronze screws
Figure 1-3-54
12. Attach the interlock switch backstop to the

right rear lower cover with the M4 × 12 flat
head screw.
13. Reattach the developing duct cover, middle
right cover and right cover.
Note: When reattaching the developing unit Right rear lower cover
duct cover, be sure to reconnect the 2-pin
connector to the cooling fan.
Interlock switch backstop
M4 × 12 flat head screw
Figure 1-3-55
14. Pull out the retaining rail from the side deck
and insert into the paper feed section lower
cover of the copier.
Side deck
Paper feed section lower cover
Retaining rail
Figure 1-3-56
1-3-26
2BC/D
15. Open the right cover. Attach the retaining rail

to the copier with the V-groove of the rail
aligned with the center of the scale located at
the base of the copier, using the two M4 × 6
TP-A chromate screws. Center
Scale
V-groove
Retaining rail
M4 × 6 TP-A chromate screws
Figure 1-3-57
16. When the side deck is installed on the copier,

connect the deck signal cable to the
connector on the copier rear.
Connector
Deck signal cable
Figure 1-3-58
1-3-27
2BC/D
1-3-6 Installing the Network scanner kit (option)

Middle rear B cover Middle rear C cover
Preparation
1. Remove three screws and remove the middle
rear B cover.
2. Remove two screws and remove the middle
rear C cover.
3. Remove four screws and remove the middle
rear cover.
Middle rear cover
Figure 1-3-59
4. Remove the four screws and remove the

upper sequence cover.
5. Remove the two screws and remove the
cover.
Cover
Upper sequence cover
Figure 1-3-60
6. Firmly push connector CN1 on the scanner

board all the way into connector CN4 on the
main PCB.
7. Fasten the scanner board to the controller-
box cover with two screws. Scanner board
8. Refit the covers that have been removed in
step 1 to 4.
CN4
CN1
Figure 1-3-61
1-3-28
2BC/D
230 V specifications only Ethernet cable connector

9. Fit the Ethernet cable to the core by winding it Core
one turn around the core.
10. Fit the Ethernet cable described in step 9 to
the Ethernet cable connector.
Figure 1-3-62
11. Secure the Ethernet cable to the lower left

screw at the lower rear cover with the clamp.
Clamp
Figure 1-3-63
1-3-29
2BC/D
1-3-7 Installing the Printer kit (option)
Preparation
1. Remove two screws and take off the cover.
Cover
Figure 1-3-64
2. Push the printing system all the way in along Printing system
the rails, and fasten it to the controller box
with two screws.
Figure 1-3-65
1-3-30
2BC/D
Install the (optional) printer network kit.

4. Push the printer network kit all the way in
along the rails, and fasten it to the controller
box with two screws.
Cover Printer network kit
Figure 1-3-66
Install the (optional) hard disk.

6. Push the hard disk all the way in along the
rails, and fasten it to the controller box with
two screws.
Cover Hard disk
Figure 1-3-67
1-3-31
2BC/D
Installing the Optional Bar-Code Reader

7. Fasten the serial connector in place with two
screws.
Serial connector
Figure 1-3-68
Installing the Optional Memory DIMM Optional memory DIMM

8. Remove the printing system, and insert the
optional memory DIMM firmly into either of
Two hooks
the memory slots. Push the DIMM firmly into
the slot so that the two hooks (one hook at
each end of the slot) snap closed.
• The board provides two DIMM slots, and
can accept up to two optional DIMMs. If
installing a single DIMM, you can use either
slot.
Two hooks Memory slots
Figure 1-3-69
1-3-32
2BC/D
1-3-8 Installing the tandem kit (option)
Preparation
1. Remove the two screws securing the middle
rear C cover and then the cover. Middle rear C
cover
2. Remove the five screws securing the middle
rear cover and then the cover.
3. Remove the five screws securing the lower
rear cover and then the cover. Middle rear
cover
Lower rear
cover
Figure 1-3-70
4. Remove the eleven screws securing the

upper and lower sequence covers and then
the covers.
Upper and lower

sequence covers
Figure 1-3-71
5. Remove the two screws securing the

interface mounting plate and then the plate.
6. Remove the two screws securing the
interface cover and then the cover.
Interface
mounting plat
Interface cover
Figure 1-3-72
1-3-33
2BC/D
7. Insert CN2 on the assembly relay PCB into

CN1 on the interface PCB for installation. Interface PCB
CN1
CN2
Assembly relay PCB
Figure 1-3-73
8. Insert CN1 on the assembly relay PCB into

CN5 on the main PCB of the copier.
CN5
CN1
Main PCB
Figure 1-3-74
9. Secure the interface PCB with an M4 × 6

binding screw.
10. Insert the 2-pin connector on the S-BOX wire
into 2-pin connector CN1 on the interface
PCB. S-BOX wire
CN1
M4 × 6 binding
screw
Interface PCB
Figure 1-3-75
1-3-34
2BC/D
11. Secure the interface mounting plate with the

two screws removed in step 5.
Interface mounting plate
12. Secure the connector of the interface PCB to
the interface mounting plate with two M2.6 ×
5 brass binding screws.
Screws
M2.6 × 5 brass
binding screws
Figure 1-3-76
13. Refit the upper and lower sequence covers,

the lower rear cover, the middle rear cover,
and the middle rear C cover.
14. Connect the interface cable to the connector
of the interface PCB.
Interface cable
Figure 1-3-77
1-3-35
2BC/D
1-4-1 Copier management
This copier is equipped with the maintenance mode for service personnel and the management mode that can be used also
by users (mainly by copier administrator). In this copier management mode, settings such as default settings can be
changed.
(1) Using the copier management mode
Start
Press the * (Default setting) key.
Press the [Management] key.
Enter the Execute department manage-

management code. ment items (page 1-4-2).
Press the [Weekly timer] Press the [Close] key.

([Week timer]) key.
Enter the Make weekly timer settings

management code. (page 1-4-2).
Press the [Copy default] key. Press the [Close] key.
Enter the Make copy default settings

Press the [Machine default] key. Press the [Close] key.
Enter the Make machine default settings

Press the [Bypass setting] key. Press the [Close] key.
Enter the Make bypass settings

Press the [Document Press the [Close] key.

management] key.
Enter the Make document management

management code. default settings (page 1-4-6).
Press the [BOX management] Press the [Close] key.

([Hard Disk management]) key.
Enter the Execute hard disk management

management code. items (page 1-4-7).
Press the [Print Form] key. Press the [Close] key.
Output the setting list

(page 1-4-7).
Press the [Language] key.

Press the [Close] key.
Set the language (page 1-4-7).
End
1-4-1
2BC/D
(2) Setting department management items Enabling/disabling department management
Registering a new department code 1. Select “On” or “Off”.
Sets a department code and the limit of the Enabling/disabling printer department management
number of copies for that department.
1. Press the [ID-code Reg./Del.] key. 1. Select “On” or “Off” under “Printer”.
2. Press the [Register] key and press the [#
keys]. Setting printer error report
3. Enter a department code (8-digit) using the When the printer department management is
numeric keys and press the [# keys]. enabled, if printing is performed with an incorrect
4. Enter the number of copies limit using the department code, an error report can be output.
numeric keys. The copy limit can be set to any 1. Press the [On] key under “Printer”.
1 page increment between 1 and 999999. 2. Press the [Print Err. PRT.] key.
Entering “0” enables unlimited copying. 3. Press the [On] key.
5. Press the [Close] key. 4. Press the [Close] key.
6. Press the [Close] key.
7. Press the [On] key.
8. Press the [Close] key. (3) Weekly timer
Deleting a department code Setting weekly timer

1. Press the [ID-code Reg./Del.] key. Sets the time at which the copier is to be turned
2. Select the department code to be deleted and ON or OFF during each day of the week, or
press the [Delete] key. whether it will be left ON or OFF all day on any of
3. Select “Yes” or “No”. those days.
4. Press the [Close] key. 1. Select the day of the week and press the
5. Press the [On] key. [Change #] key.
6. Press the [Close] key. 2. To set the time at which the copier is to be
turned on or off, press the [Select work time]
Altering the copy limit key and press the +/- keys to select the
1. Press the [# of copy correct] key. power-on hour and minute and the power-off
2. Select the department code to be altered and hour and minute.
press the [Correction] key. To set the copier OFF all day, press the [All
3. Enter the number of copies limit using the day-OFF] key.
numeric keys. The copy limit can be set to any To set the copier ON all day, press the [All
1 page increment between 1 and 999999. day-ON] key.
Entering “0” enables unlimited copying. 3. Press the [Close] key.
5. Press the [Close] key. Canceling the weekly timer function temporarily
6. Press the [On] key. 1. Select the day of the week and press the
7. Press the [Close] key. [Change #] key.
2. Press the [On] key under “Cancel”.
Clearing copy counts 3. Press the [Close] key.
1. Press the [Counter clear] key.
2. Select “Yes” or “No”. Turning the [weekly timer] key ON/OFF
3. Press the [Close] key. 1. Select “On” or “Off”.
Viewing copy counts

1. Press the [Counter by ID-code] key.
2. View copy counts using the cursor up/down
keys.
Print management list

1. Press the [Print the list] key.
If A4/11" × 81/2" paper is present, the list is
automatically printed out. Otherwise, select
the paper source and press the start key.
1-4-2
2BC/D-1
(4) Copy default Default drawer
Exposure mode Sets the drawer to be selected in cases such as

after the reset key is pressed.
Selects the exposure mode at power-on. 1. Select “Default drawer”(“Default cassette”)
1. Select “Exposure mode” and press the and press the [Change #] key.
[Change #] key. 2. Select priority drawer.
2. Select “Manual” or “Auto”.
Drawer for cover paper
Exposure steps
Sets the drawer to be selected for cover paper.
Sets the number of exposure steps for the 1. Select “Drawer for cover paper” and press the
manual exposure mode. [Change #] key.
1. Select “Exposure steps” and press the 2. Select the drawer for cover paper.
[Change #] key.
2. Select “1 step” or “0.5 step”. Default magnification
Original image quality Selects whether auto magnification selection or

100% magnification is to be given priority when
Selects the copy quantity mode at power-on. the sizes of the original and copy paper are
1. Select “Original image quality” (“Image quality different.
Original”) and press the [Change #] key. 1. Select “Default magnification”(“Default mode”)
2. Select “Text+Photo”, “Photo” or “Text”. and press the [Change #] key.
2. Select “Manual” or “AMS”.
Custom original size (setting No. 1 - No. 4)
Sets the custom original sizes. Auto exposure adjustment
1. Select one of “Original size” settings (“custom Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposure mode.
1” through “custom 4”) and press the [Change 1. Select “Auto exposure adj. (Auto)” and press
#] key. the [Change #] key.
2. Press the [On] key. 2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust
3. Press the +/- keys to set Y (width). default setting of copy exposure.
Setting range: 2 to 11" (inch specifications) Setting range: -3 to +3
50 to 297 mm (metric specifications)
4. Press the +/- keys to set X (length). Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)
Setting range: 2 to 17" (inch specifications)
50 to 432 mm (metric specifications) Adjusts the exposure for scanning with OCR in
the scanner mode.
Eco print 1. Select “Auto exposure adj. (OCR)” and press
the [Change #] key.
Selects the toner economy mode to be 2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust
automatically on or off at power-on. default setting of copy exposure.
1. Select “Eco print” and press the [Change #] Setting range: -3 to +3
key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”. Manual exposure adjustment (Mixed)
Paper selection Adjusts the exposure to be used when text and

photo original is selected for the image mode.
Sets whether the same sized paper as the 1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Mixed)” and press
original to be copied is automatically selected. the [Change #] key.
1. Select “Paper selection”(“Select paper”) and 2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust
press the [Change #] key. default setting of copy exposure.
2. Select “APS” or “Default cassette”. Setting range: -3 to +3
Select paper type (APS) Manual exposure adjustment (Text)

Specifies paper types to be selected for the auto Adjusts the exposure to be used when text
paper selection mode. original is selected for the image mode.
1. Select “Select paper type(APS)” and press 1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Text)” and press the
the [Change #] key. [Change #] key.
2. Press the [On] key. 2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust
3. Select the paper type. (Multiple types can be default setting of copy exposure.
selected.) Setting range: -3 to +3
1-4-3
2BC/D-1
Manual exposure adjustment (Photo) Display register key

Adjusts the exposure to be used when photo Sets whether or not to display the Register key in
original is selected for the image mode. the copy operation screen.
1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Photo)” and press the 1. Select “Display register key” and press the
[Change #] key. [Change #] key.
2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust 2. Select “On” or “Off”.
default setting of copy exposure.
Setting range: -3 to +3 Black-line correction
Reduces black lines that may be caused when
Margin width
the DF is used.
Sets the default setting of the margin width for the 1. Select “Correct. fine black line” and press the
margin copying. [Change #] key.
1. Select “Default margin width” and press the 2. Select “On” or “Off”.
[Change #] key.
2. Press the up, down, right, and left cursor keys Customize the base screen (main function)
to set the default settings.
Setting range: 0 to 3/4" (inch specifications) Changes the layout of the main functions of the
0 to 18 mm (metric specifications) base screen.
1. Select “Customize (Main function)” and press
the [Change #] key.
Border erase width
2. Change the layout to press [Move ahead] or
Sets the default setting of the border erase width [Move to behind].
for the border erase mode.
1. Select “Default erase width” and press the Customize the copy operating screen (add function)
[Change #] key.
2. Press the +/- keys to adjust default erase Changes the layout of the functions except the
width. main functions of the copy operating screens.
Setting range: 1. Select “Customize (Add function)” and press
Outside border: the [Change #] key.
0 to 3/4" (inch specifications) 2. Change the layout to press [ ← ].
Center area:
0 to 1 1/2" (inch specifications)
Copy limit
Sets the number of copies limit for multiple
copying.
1. Select “Preset limit” and press the [Change #]
key.
2. Press the +/- keys to set copy preset in one
job.
Setting range: 1 to 999 copies
Modify Copy
Disables the modify copy function or enables the
modify copy function in the default mode.
1. Select “Modify Copy” and press the [Change
#] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off” under “Function”.
3. Select “On” or “Off” under “Default”.
Job Queue Report

Sets whether or not the job queue report is
selected.
1. Select “Job Queue Report” and press the
[Change #] key.
2. Select “off”, “On/All copy job” (“On/(All
copy)”) or “On/reserved” (“On/reserv.job”).
1-4-4
2BC/D-1
(5) Machine default Auto shutoff time
Auto drawer switching Sets the auto shutoff time.

1. Select “Auto shut-off time” and press the
Enables or disables the auto drawer switching [Change #] key.
function and sets whether “All types of paper” or 2. Press the +/- keys to set the auto shutoff
“Feed same paper type” is selected. time.
1. Select “Auto drawer switching” (“Auto Setting range: 15 to 240 minutes
cassette switching”) and press the [Change #]
key. Auto preheat time
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
3. Select “All types of paper” or “Feed same Sets the auto preheat time.
paper type”. 1. Select “Auto preheat time” and press the
[Change #] key.
Paper size (drawer No.1 & No.2) 2. Press the +/- keys to set the auto preheat
time.
Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawers 1 Setting range: 1 to 45 minutes
and 2. Note: Set the auto preheat time to be shorter
1. Select one of the “Paper size” settings (“1st than the auto shutoff time.
drawers” or “2nd drawer”) and press the
[Change #] key. Copy eject location setting
2. Select the paper size.
Sets the copy eject location when a finisher and a
Paper type (drawer No.1 - No.5) multi-job tray are installed.
1. Select “Select Copy output mode” and press
Sets the type of paper for drawers 1 through 5. the [Change #] key.
1. Select one of “Paper type” settings (“1st 2. Select the eject location.
drawer” through "5th drawer") and press the
[Change #] key. Key sound
2. Select the paper type.
Sets if a beep sounds when a key on the key
Select paper type (2 sided) press panel is pressed.
1. Select “Key sound ON/OFF” and press the
Sets whether or not each of custom paper types [Change #] key.
(custom 1 - custom 8) will be available for 2 sided 2. Select “On” or “Off”.
copying.
1. Select “Select paper type (2 sided)” and Silent mode
press the [Change #] key.
2. Select one of the “custom” paper type Selects whether or not to enter silent mode after
settings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) and copying.
set “On” or “Off”. 1. Select “Silent Mode” and press the [Change
#] key.
Select paper type (for used paper) 2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Sets whether or not the used paper function will Day & time
be turned on for each custom type of paper
(custom 1 - custom 8). Sets the current date and time.
1. Select “Select paper (Used Paper)” [“Select 1. Select “Day & time” and press the [Change #]
‘used paper’ type”] and press the [Change #] key.
key. 2. Press the +/- keys to set the year, month, day,
2. Select one of the “custom” paper type hour, and minute respectively.
settings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) and
set “On” or “Off”. Time difference
Sets the time difference.
Select paper type (for high-resistance paper) 1. Select “Time difference” and press the
Sets whether or not the high-resistance paper [Change #] key.
function will be turned on for each custom type of 2. Press the +/- keys to set the time difference.
paper (custom 1 - custom 8). Setting range: +12:00 to -12:00
1. Select “Sel.(High resist.paper)” [“Sel.‘High
resist.paper’”] and press the [Change #] key.
2. Select one of the “custom” paper type
settings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) and
set “On” or “Off”.
1-4-5
2BC/D-1
Management code change (7) Document management default setting
Changes the management code. Document list print out

1. Select “Management code change” and press
the [Change #] key. Prints out each job list.
2. Enter the 4-digit management code using the 1. Press the function key to print out the
numeric keys and press the enter key. document list you want.
Auto shutoff Reset box

Sets whether the auto shutoff function is Prints out each job list.
available. 1. Press the function key to delete all data you
1. Select “Auto shut-off” and press the [Change don’t want.
#] key. 2. Press the [Yes] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Box name setting
Sets the name of synergy print box.
(6) Bypass setting
1. Press the [Box editting] key.
2. Select the desired box.
Paper size and paper type settings
3. Press the [Change #] key.
Sets the paper size and paper type for the 4. Enter the box name.
bypass settings. 5. Press the [End] key.
When using special papers such as transparency, 6. Press the [Yes] key.
cards, and postcards, be sure to set the paper 7. Press the [Close] key.
type to prevent faulty transfer and faulty fixing. 8. Press the [Job cancel] key.
1. To enable the auto paper size detection,
press the [Auto Detection] key and select Box password setting
“Centimeter” or “Inch”.
Sets the password for the synergy box.
To set a custom size, press the [Input size]
1. Press the [Box editting] key.
key and press the +/- keys to set the paper
size.
3. Select “Password” and press the [Change #]
Setting range: Width: 3 7/8" - 11 5/8" (inch
key.
specifications)
4. Enter the password and press the [Close]
Length: 5 7/8" - 17"
key.
Width: 98 - 297 mm (metric specifications)
Length: 148 - 432 mm
6. Press the [Job cancel] key.
2. Press the [Select paper type] key.
3. Select the paper type.
Box data deletion
Deletes the data in the synergy print box.
Other standard size setting 1. Press the [Box editting] key.
Sets a special standard size.
3. Press the [Reset Box] key.
1. Press the [Others standard] key.
4. Press the [Yes] key.
2. Press the [Select size] key.
3. Select the paper size.
6. Press the [Job cancel] key.
Duration to save document data setting
Sets the duration to save the document data in
the synergy print box.
1. Press the [Document data saving term]
([Document data save period]) key.
2. Press the +/- keys to set the duration.
Setting range: 1 to 7 days
To save documents with no specific duration,
press the [Save without duration] key.
1-4-6
2BC/D
(8) Hard disk management
Deletes the invalid data in the hard disk.

1. Press the [On] key.
(9) Report
Outputs the setting reports.

1. Press the [Print form] key.
2. Select the report.
Copy report/Option report/Counter report/
Machine report
(10) Language
Switches the language to be displayed on the

press panel.
1. Press the [Language] key.
2. Select the display language.
1-4-7
2BC/D
1-4-2 Maintenance mode
The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the cursor up/down keys
The maintenance item is
or numeric keys.
selected.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter “001” using the cursor

up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
1-4-8
2BC/D-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list
Item Initial
Section Maintenance item contents
No. setting*
General U000 Outputting an own-status report —
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode —
U002 Setting the factory default data —
U003 Setting the service telephone number ***************
U004 Setting the machine number 000000
U005 Copying without paper —
U018 Displaying the ROM checksum —
U019 Displaying the ROM version —
Initialization U020 Initializing all data —
U021 Initializing all memory —
U022 Initializing backup memory —
U024 HDD formatting —
Drive, paper U030 Checking motor operation —
feed, paper U031 Checking switches for paper conveying —
conveying and
U032 Checking clutch operation —
cooling system
U033 Checking solenoid operation —
U034 Setting paper timing
• Leading edge registration/Leading edge registration for duplex copying 5/0
• Center line/Center line for duplex copying –2.8/0
U035 Setting folio size
• Length 330
• Width 210
U037 Checking fan motor operation —
U050 Setting switchback drive
• Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing 160
• Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing 110
(for 11" × 17" copy paper only)
• Duplex reversing clutch-on timing 50
• Duplex reversing clutch-off timing 132
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller
• Drawer 1 –10
• Drawer 2 3
• Bypass tray 25
• Duplex copying (second face) 18
U053 Adjusting motor speed standard
• Image formation motor 6
• Paper conveying motor 3
• Polygon motor 0
U054 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the vertical conveying
• Duplex paper feeding (second face) of A3, A5, 11" × 17", 70
and 51/2" × 81/2" sizes
• Duplex paper feeding (second face) of B4, A4, B5, 81/2" × 14", 70
and 11" × 81/2" sizes
• Paper feeding through the bypass 0
U059 Setting fan mode MODE1
Optical U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties 12
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on —
U063 Adjusting the shading position 0
U064 Adjusting the CCD level 9
U065 Adjusting the scanner motor speed
• Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction –6/0
* Initial setting for factory default setting

1-4-9
2BC/D-1
Item Initial
No. setting*
Optical U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the
contact glass
• Leading edge registration/Leading edge registration for rotate copying –10/0
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
• Center line/Center line for rotate copying –30/0
U070 Adjusting the DF magnification –1
U071 Adjusting the DF leading timing
• DF leading edge registration 10
• DF trailing edge registration –15
U072 Adjusting the DF original center line
• 1 sided mode/front in 2 sided mode/rear in 2 sided mode –8/–8/–7
U073 Checking scanner motors —
U074 Executing DF automatic adjustment —
U080 Adjusting exposure in toner economy mode –6
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern —
U091 Checking shading —
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically —
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
• Text and photo/text/photo 0/0/0
U099 Checking and setting the original size detection sensor —
High voltage U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage
• Grid control voltage 168
U101 Setting the other high voltages
• Developing bias step control final voltage 207
• Developing bias step control initial voltage 52
• Transfer control voltage for simplex copying 210
• Transfer control voltage for duplex copying 210
• Separation control voltage for simplex copying 200
• Separation control voltage for duplex copying 230
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger 2
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count —
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time —
U114 Selecting AC mode Inch: ON
Metric: NORMAL
U126 Setting effective potential correction
• Drum drive time for starting correction 17000
• Correction interval for effective potential correction 1000
• Effective correction target value 550
Developing U130 Initial setting for the developer —
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage 154
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly —
U135 Checking toner motors operation —
U136 Turning the toner level detection function on/off On
U137 Checking the toner level detection sensor —
U147 Setting toner loading operation MODE1: On/MODE2: Off
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output —
U156 Changing the toner control level
• Toner control level 102
• Toner empty level 30
• Toner control reference voltage 102
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
• Image formation motor drive time 0
• Paper feed motor drive time 0

1-4-10
2BC/D-1
Item Initial
No. setting*
Developing U158 Checking/clearing the developing count 0
Fixing and U160 Applying toner to the cleaning blade —
cleaning U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
• Control temperature during copying 185
• Primary stabilization fixing temperature 165
• Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 185
• Aging time after secondary stabilization 120
• Compensation value for setting card stock/postcard through the bypass 10
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly —
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data —
U194 Setting the fixing web drive —
U196 Turning the fixing heater on —
U198 Setting the fixing phase control Inch: OFF
Metric: ON
Operation U200 Turning all LEDs on —
panel and U201 Initializing the touch panel —
support
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system —
U203 Operating DF separately —
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter —
U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender —
U207 Checking the operation panel keys —
U208 Setting the paper size for the large paper deck Inch: 11" × 81/2"
Metric: A4
U209 Setting date and time —
U212 Setting the deck lift operation Side feed
U235 Setting output tray initialize mode HP ON
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher —
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher —
U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch —
U244 Checking the DF switches —
U245 Checking messages —
U247 Setting the paper feed device —
U248 Setting the paper eject devices —
Mode setting U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 400000 (45 cpm copier)
500000 (55 cpm copier)
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count —
U252 Setting the destination Inch
U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count
U254 Turning auto start function on/off On
U255 Setting auto clear time 90
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off On
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection —
U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DF Face-down ejection
U264 Setting the display order of the date Inch
MONTH-DAY-YEAR
Metric
DAY-MONTH-YEAR
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code 0
U266 Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents 7
U275 Setting the number of sheets for duplex circulation Mode0
1-4-11
2BC/D-1
Item Initial
No. setting*
Mode setting U277 Setting auto application change time 30
U329 Default setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy
• Auto rotation copy/Sort copy ON/ON
U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation 100
U331 Switching the paper ejection mode Face-up ejection
U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1.0
U336 Setting the HDD type 0
U339 Setting the drawer heater mode ON
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function —
U342 Setting the ejection restriction —
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode ENERGY STAR
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication —
U347 Setting auto drawer size detection On
Printer U350 Setting the ID-code error output Off
U355 Setting the output mode for face up output First print
Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing —
processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass —
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF —
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 0
Network U504 Initializing the scanner NIC —
scanner U505 Setting Data Base Assistant ON
Others U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations —
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts —
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts —
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices —
U906 Resetting partial operation control —
U907 Checking and resetting the count value on each ejection location —
U908 Changing the total counter value —
U909 Checking/clearing the fixing web count —
U910 Clearing the black ratio data —
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes —
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box maintenance count value —
U922 Checking/clearing the solenoid count value —
U923 Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning count —
U960 Outputting the machine used circumstances list —
U989 HDD Scandisk —
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light —
U991 Checking/clearing the scanner count —
U992 Checking or clearing the printer count

1-4-12
1-4-11-1
2BC/D-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-4-13
2BC/D-1
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000 Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to
reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be output. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Output list
MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
JAM List of the paper jam occurrences
SERVICE CALL List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/11" × 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.
When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Setting the factory default data
Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
To reset the values such as an electronic counter. Also to move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position
for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed).
Method
2. Select a mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE1(ALL) To set the language to English and return the other settings to
the factory default settings
MODE2(SELECT) To return the settings to the factory default settings without
changing the language
3. Press the start key.
The following count values are cleared.
Developing count, service call count, each paper source count, and jam count
Backup data of user simulation, etc. is reset to the default values for each destination.
Completion
Turn the main switch off.
1-4-12
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U003 Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits) using the numeric keys.
• To enter symbols such as hyphens and parentheses, select as required from the symbols displayed on
the touch panel as shown below. To move the cursor, press LEFT or RIGHT in the bottom row.
∗ #
( )
- (Space)
LEFT RIGHT
2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U004 Setting the machine number
Description
Displays and changes the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric key.
Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.
2. Press the start key. The machine number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Completion
1-4-13
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U005 Copying without paper
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operation
PPC Only the copier operates.
PPC + DF Both the copier and DF operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be
made.
• Paper feed locations
• Magnifications
• Simplex or duplex copy mode
• Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999; in duplex
copy mode, continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting.
• Copy density
• Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper
present, the paper feed pulley does not operate.
6. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the
screen for selecting an item is displayed.
7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
displayed.
U018 Displaying the ROM checksum
Description
Displays the checksum of ROM.
Purpose
To check the checksum.
Method
1. Press the start key. Program names for the copier and an optional finisher (when installed) are displayed.
2. Press the start key. The ROM checksum is displayed.
Display Description
MAIN Main PCB ROM checksum
MMI 1 Operation PCB ROM checksum
MMI 2 Operation PCB ROM checksum
LANGUAGE(Stand.) Standard language ROM checksum
LANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM checksum
FINISHER Finisher main PCB ROM checksum
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-14
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U019 Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number.
Method
Press the start key. The last six digits of the part number indicating the ROM version are displayed.
Display Description
MAIN Main ROM IC
MMI 1 Operation ROM IC
MMI 2 Operation ROM IC
LANGUAGE(Stand.) Standard language ROM IC
LANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM IC
MAIN BOOT Boot of main ROM IC
MMI BOOT Boot of operation ROM IC
NETWORK SCANNER Optional network scanner ROM IC
FINISHER Optional finisher ROM IC
FINISHER BOOT Boot of optional finisher ROM IC
PRINTER Optional printer ROM IC
Completion
U020 Initializing all data
Description
Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.
Purpose
Used when replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for inch specifications
are set.
When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
switch is turned on and the display language to the initial setting of English.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U021 Initializing all memory
Description
Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,
settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM according
to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
Purpose
Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is
initialized based on the destination setting.
Completion
1-4-15
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U022 Initializing backup memory
Description
Initializes only the data set for the optical section.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the scanner unit.
Method
2. Press SCANNER on the touch panel.
4. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 067, U080 to 099, U403, U990 and U991) is
initialized.
Completion
U024 HDD formatting
Description
Formats the HDD backup data areas for the network scanner and department administration.
Purpose
To initialize the HDD when installing or replacing the HDD after shipping.
Method
3. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk.
The EXECUTE display flashes during initializing.
Initialization results will be displayed when initializing is completed.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U030 Checking motor operation
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motor
MAIN Image formation motor (IFM)
CONV Paper conveying motor (PCM)
FEED Paper feed motor (PFM)
DECK Deck drive motor (DDM)
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-16
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches
FEED B SW Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2)
FEED C SW Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3)
FEED D SW Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4)
FEED E SW Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5)
FEED F SW Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6)
FEED DK 2SW Deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2)
FEED DK 1SW Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1)
FEED A SW Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1)
RESIST SW Registration switch (RSW)
EJECT SW Eject switch (ESW)
BRA SW Feed shift switch (FSSW)
REV SW Face down eject switch (FDESW)
DUP BRA SW Duplex feed shift switch (DUPFSSW)
DUP J SW Duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW)
DUP1 SW Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1)
DUP2 SW Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)
DUP3 SW Duplex eject switch (DUPESW)
Completion
1-4-17
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U032 Checking clutch operation
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
2. Select the clutch to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display Clutches
SB FEED Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)
PF A Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1)
PF B Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2)
PF C Paper feed clutch 3 (PFCL3)
PF D Paper feed clutch 4 (PFCL4)
FEED B L Feed low clutch 2 (FCL2-L)
FEED B H Feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H)
FEED C Feed clutch 3 (FCL3)
FEED D Feed clutch 4 (FCL4)
FEED E Feed clutch 5 (FCL5)
FEED DK Deck feed clutch (DFCL)
FEED A L Feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L)
FEED A H Feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H)
RESIST Registration clutch (RCL)
DUP FWD Duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL)
DUP REV Duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL)
Completion
U033 Checking solenoid operation
Description
Turns each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
2. Select the solenoid to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the solenoid turns on for
1 s.
Display Solenoids
BRANCH Feed shift solenoid (FSSOL)
DUP FS Duplex eject switching solenoid (DUPESSOL)
DUP PR Duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL)
SB SOL Bypass solenoid (BYPSOL)
FIX WEB SOL Fixing WEB solenoid (FWEBSOL)
MSW OFF Main switch turns on
Select MAIN SW SOL to check the operation of the main switch in auto shut off.
Completion
U034 Setting paper timing
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-15 and 17.
1-4-18
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U035 Setting folio size
Description
Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
Purpose
To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting the
actual size of the folio paper used.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Setting Setting range Initial setting
LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330
WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U037 Checking fan motor operation
Description
Applies power to each fan motor to turn on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each fan motor.
Method
2. Select the desired fan motor to operate. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Switches
CONV FAN Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM)
DEV FAN Image formation fan motor (IFFM)
Completion
U050 Setting the switchback drive
Adjustment
See page 1-6-66.
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Adjustment
See page 1-6-19.
1-4-19
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U053 Adjusting motor speed standard
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.
Method
Setting
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
MAIN MOTOR Image formation motor speed adjustment 0 to +14 6
CONV MOTOR Paper conveying motor speed adjustment 0 to +14 3
POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor speed adjustment -20 to +20 0
MAIN MOTOR /CONV MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makes
the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.
POLYGON MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary
scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and
longer in the auxiliary scanning direction.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode.
Correct values for an A3/11" × 17" output are:
A = 300 ± 1.5 mm
B = 270 ± 1.0 mm
Figure 1-4-1
Adjustment
1. Output an A3/11" × 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.
2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:
A: Image formation motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Completion
displayed.
1-4-20
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U054 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Adjustment
See page 1-6-20.
U059 Setting fan mode
Description
Sets the rotation time of conveying fan motor after stop of drive.
Purpose
For prevention of faulty image caused by increase of ozone inside the machine, the rotation time of conveying
fan motor after stop of drive is set to 30 seconds (MODE1) as the default setting. If the user requests reduction
of noise, change the setting to 10 seconds (MODE2).
Method
Display Description
MODE1 ON for 30 seconds after stop of drive
MODE2 ON for 10 seconds after stop of drive
Initial setting: MODE1
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
displayed.
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
Description
Adjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Setting
Description Setting range Initial setting
Image scanning density 1 to +23 12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
displayed.
Caution
The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:
• Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)
• Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on
Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.
Method
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
1-4-21
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U063 Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position.
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is
due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changed
so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
Shading position –8 to +2 0 0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine left.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
displayed.
U064 Adjusting the CCD level
Description
Adjusts the CCD level.
Purpose
To adjust when density difference due to CCD is generated between both sides of the center of the copy image.
Setting
CCD level 0 to +15 9
Completion
displayed.
U065 Adjusting the scanner motor speed
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-34 and 35.
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-36.
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-37.
U070 Adjusting the DF magnification
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-68.
U071 Adjusting the DF leading timing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-70.
U072 Adjusting the DF original center line
Adjustment
See page 1-6-69.
1-4-22
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U073 Checking scanner motors
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.
Method
2. Select the item to be changed. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400%
SIZE Original size See below.
LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
8 A4 42 A5R
9 B5 47 Folio
24 11" × 81/2" 52 11" × 17"
36 A3 53 11" × 15"
39 B4 55 81/2" × 14"
40 A4R 56 81/2" × 11"
41 B5R 58 51/2" × 81/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-23
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U074 Executing DF automatic adjustment
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DF scanning section.
• Adjusting the DF magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DF scanning timing (U071)
• Adjusting the DF center line (U072)
• Adjusting the margins for scanning an original from the DF (U404)
When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U70, U071, U072, and U404 will also be updated.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DF scanning section.
Method
1. Set a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) in the DF.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
Display Description
CONVEY SPEED DF auxiliary scanning direction
LEAD EDGE ADJ DF leading edge registration
TRAIL EDGE ADJ DF trailing edge registration
DF CENTER DF center line
DF A MARGIN DF scanning left margin
DF B MARGIN DF scanning leading edge margin
DF C MARGIN DF scanning right margin
DF D MARGIN DF scanning trailing edge margin
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and
operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure
from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance
items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is
displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
U080 Adjusting exposure in toner economy mode
Description
Adjusts the image density in the eco-print mode.
Purpose
To increase or decrease the image density in the eco-print mode.
Method
Setting
Exposure is toner economy mode –12 to 0 –6
Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-24
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the copier.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of
the scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output.
Display PG pattern to be output Purpose

GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit
engine output characteristics.
MONO-LEVEL To check the drum quality.
256-LEVEL To check resolution

reproducibility in printing.
1 DOT-LINE To check fine line reproducibility.

To adjust the position of the laser
scanner unit (lateral squareness)
3. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL and 1dot-LINE, use the cursor up/down keys to change
the preset values and press the Start key to register the setting.
Display Setting range Initial setting
Output density of MONO-LEVEL 0 or 70 0
1dot-LINE 0 to 21 0
4. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
5. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-25
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U091 Checking shading
Description
Performs scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the original
scanning values at nine points of the contact glass.
Purpose
To check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to decide
the causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical (shading
or CCD) or other problems.
Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SHD BEFORE Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.
SHD AFTER Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.
3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.
When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightly
different from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there should
be no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front and rear
indicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.
If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) is
caused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).
If a black line appears, the cause may assumed to be based on the results of the scanning operation before
shading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation after
shading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it may not be possible
to use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning at
the limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.
20 mm from the machine left

100 mm from the Machine center 100 mm from the

machine center machine center
toward machine toward machine
front rear
Figure 1-4-2
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for entering a maintenance item is
displayed.
1-4-26
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the main direction(U065)
• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
• Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass (U403)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A068020) on the contact glass.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
Display Description
SCAN CENTER Scanner center line
SCAN TIMING Scanner leading edge registration
SUB SCAN Scanner auxiliary scanning direction
MAIN SCAN Scanner main scanning direction
DF A MARGIN Scanner scanning left margin
DF B MARGIN Scanner scanning leading edge margin
DF C MARGIN Scanner scanning right margin
DF D MARGIN Scanner scanning trailing edge margin
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and
operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure
from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance
items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-27
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,
text and photo, photo).
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used to
make copy image darker or lighter.
Start
2. Select the image mode to be adjusted and press the start key. The screen for the selected item is
displayed.
Display Description
MIXED Density in text and photo mode
TEXT Density in text mode
PHOTO Density in photo mode
Setting
1. Select the item to be adjusted. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Adjust the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0
LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density Setting: 0

Setting: 3
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Density adjustment
Light Center Dark
Figure 1-4-3 Exposure density gradient

Interrupt copy mode
Completion
displayed.
1-4-28
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U099 Checking and setting the original size detection sensor
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor
malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like.
Start
2. Select an item and press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data
B/W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value
Setting original size judgment time
Method to display the data for the sensor

1. Press the start key. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed.
Rear of machine : 123 123 123

Center of machine : 123 123 123
Front of machine : 255 255 255
Figure 1-4-4
Setting
1. Select an item to be set.
LEVEL Detection sensor threshold value 0 to 255 170
WAIT TIME Original size judgment time* 0 to 100 50
ORIG. AREA Original size detection position display (mm) – –
SIZE Detected original size display – –
Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment
Method to set the detection threshold value
1. Adjust the preset value using the cursor up/down keys.
A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity, and a smaller value decreases it.
Method to set the original size judgment time
1. Adjust the preset value using the cursor up/down keys.
A larger value increases the original size judgment time, and a smaller value decreases it.
Completion
1-4-29
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage
Description
Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging.
Purpose
To set the surface potential or check main charging.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
DSP DATA Changing the grid control voltage
MC ON Turning the main charger on
MC ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and off
LASER ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off
Method for main chager output

1. Select the main charger output on the screen for selecting an item: select one from MC ON, MC ON/OFF
or LASER ON/OFF on the touch panel. The selected operation starts.
Setting the grid control voltage
1. Press the DSP DATA on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the setting using the ∗ or # keys.
Grid control voltage 77 to 230 168
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main charger output stops. The screen for
1-4-30
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U101 Setting the other high voltages
Description
Sets the developing bias control voltage, the transfer control voltage, and the separation control voltage or
checks the output of these voltages.
Purpose
To check or change the developing bias, the transfer voltage, and the separation voltage.
Method
Display Description
DEV BIAS SET Setting of developing bias control voltage
TC SET Setting and output check of transfer control voltage
AC SET Setting of separation control voltage
Setting: developing bias control voltage

1. Press the DEV BIAS SET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
DB DATA Developing bias step control final voltage 0 to 255 207
DB DATA2 Developing bias step control initial voltage 0 to 255 52
Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
Setting: transfer bias control voltage
1. Press the TC SET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
TC DATA Transfer control voltage for simplex copying 0 to 255 210
TC DATA (DUP) Transfer control voltage for duplex copying 0 to 255 210
TC ON Transfer voltage output ON – –
Increasing the setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.
Press the TC ON on the touch panel. The currently set transfer voltage is output. To stop the transfer
voltage output, press the stop/clear key.
Setting: separation bias control voltage
1. Press the AC SET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
AC DATA separation control voltage for simplex copying 0 to 255 200
AC DATA (DUP) separation control voltage for duplex copying 0 to 255 230
Increasing the setting makes the separation voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
1-4-31
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger
Description
Executes a cleaning operation for the main charger and changes the intervals at which the main charger is
cleaned.
Purpose
To check the cleaning operation for the main charger. Also to change the intervals for the operation. Making the
intervals longer decreases the stand-by time when starting copying.
Method
Display Description
MC ADJUST DATA Main charger cleaning operation intervals
MC TEST RUN Main charger cleaning operation ON
Setting
1. Change the setting using the ∗ or # keys.
Setting range: 1 to 2 (unit: 1,000 sheets)
Initial setting: 2
If you select MC TEST RUN, the main charger cleaning operation will be performed once.
Completion
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the main charger potential output.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.
Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.
Method
Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Press the CLEAR on the touch panel.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-32
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.
Method
Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed.
Clearing
1. Press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The drive time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a five-digit drive time using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The drive time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the drive time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
U114 Selecting AC mode
Description
Sets separation control for A3, B4, A4R, 11" × 17", 11" × 15", and 81/2" × 14" sizes.
Purpose
To change the setting to solve the problem of faulty image.
Method
Display Description
NORMAL Separation voltage ON only for the leading edge
ON Separation voltage ON for overall area
Initial setting: ON (for the inch specifications)
NORMAL (for the metric specifications)
Supplement
Note that if the setting is changed from ON to NORMAL, faulty transfer of gray image may occur and that if the
setting is changed from NORMAL to ON, horizontal black stripes may occur.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-33
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U126 Setting effective potential correction
Description
Sets the correction interval and the correction target value for effective potential correction.
Purpose
To run when replacing the drum or when a density failure which may be caused mainly by the drum occurs.
Method
Setting
1. Select the item to change the setting.
2. Use the numeric keys to change the setting value.
START (M) Drum drive time for starting correction 0 to 600000 17000
INTERVAL (M) Correction interval for effective 0 to 600000 1000
potential correction
TARGET Effective correction target value 0 to 999 550
RUN To run the test operation – –
Test operation
1. Select RUN and start test operation.
* After correction is complete, each data will be displayed.
Display Description
VO A Dark potential measurement A acquired data
VR A Light potential measurement A acquired data
VO B Dark potential measurement B acquired data
VR B Light potential measurement B acquired data
VO TARGET Target dark potential calculation result
DB CAL Developing bias calculation result
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
1-4-34
1-4-33-1
2BC/D-1
1-4-35
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U130 Initial setting for the developer
Description
Automatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start level for the installed developer.
Purpose
To set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or replacing the developer.
Method
2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and the result is displayed.
Display Description
INPUT Toner sensor output value
CONTROL Toner sensor control voltage
FIRST TARGET Toner feed start level
HUMID Absolute humidity
Supplement
The following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:
• Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)
• Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)
• Clearing the developing drive time (U157)
• Clearing the developing count (U158)
• Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after initial setting is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Displays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in maintenance item U130.
Purpose
To check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to change the toner density if an image is too
dark or light.
Method
Setting
1. Adjust the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Toner sensor control voltage 0 to 255 154
Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it makes the density lower.
Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-34
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Display Description
INPUT Toner sensor output value after start key is pressed
CONTROL Current toner feed start level
TARGET Current toner sensor control voltage
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when toner replenishment stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U135 Checking toner motors operation
Description
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of the toner motor.
Caution
Note that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam, resulting in machine lockup. Be sure to
drive the motor for only a few seconds.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse. The toner motor turns on.
Display Motor
MOTOR1 Toner feed motor (TFM)
MOTOR2 Toner agitation motor (TAM)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U136 Turning the toner level detection function on/off
Description
Turning the control based on the toner level sensor output on/off.
Purpose
To enable copying using the toner in the developing section after the toner level in the toner hopper decreases,
by turning the control function off.
Method
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Controls based on the detection by the toner sensor detection sensor
OFF Ignores the detection by the toner level detection sensor
Initial setting: ON
Completion
1-4-35
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U137 Checking the toner level detection sensor
Description
Displays the detection status of the toner level detection sensor and toner hopper lockup detection sensor.
Purpose
To check the toner level in the toner hopper.
Method
Display Description
TE SW Toner level detection sensor (toner level in the toner hopper)
When there is toner or if the sensor connector is disconnected, on is detected , and the corresponding
display is displayed in reverse.
Completion
U147 Setting toner loading operation
Description
Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying.
Purpose
To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is necessary
from the initial setting.
Method
2. Select ON or OFF for MODE1 or MODE2. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE1 Toner loading at the rate of one time every 30 sheets
ON Toner loading performed in MODE1
OFF Toner loading not performed in MODE1
MODE2 Toner loading at the rate of one time per sheet (between two
sheets of paper)
ON Toner loading performed in MODE2
OFF Toner loading not performed in MODE2
Initial setting: MODE1: ON MODE2: OFF
3. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value, and related data.
Purpose
To check the toner sensor output value.
Method
2. Press the start key. The current data is displayed.
Display Description
INPUT Toner sensor output value after start key is pressed
TARGET Current toner feed level
(value corrected based on humidity and drive time)
CONTROL Current toner sensor control voltage
OUT TEMP External temperature
3. Press the stop/clear key. The sampling operation stops.
Completion
1-4-36
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U156 Changing the toner control level
Description
Changes the toner control reference voltage set in maintenance item U130 or the toner control level or the
toner empty level to be determined by the difference from the toner control level. The setting for this
maintenance item does not need to be changed.
Purpose
To check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.
Method
Display Description
TARGET Toner control level
EMPTY Difference between the toner control level and toner empty level
FIRST TARGET Toner control reference voltage for initial developer setting
Setting for the toner control level

1. Press the TARGET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
Toner control level 0 to 255 102
Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.
3. Press the start key. The time is set.
Setting for the toner empty level
1. Press the EMPTY on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
Difference between the toner control level 0 to 255 30
and the toner empty level
Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner density is lower when the toner empty
is detected.
Setting for the toner control reference voltage
1. Press the FIRST TARGET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.
Toner control reference voltage 0 to 255 102
Completion
1-4-37
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference
when correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit.
Method
Display Description
MAG TIME(M) Image formation motor drive time
AGT TIME(M) Paper feed motor drive time
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared.
3. Press the start key. The drive time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be changed.
2. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The drive time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the drive time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
U158 Checking/clearing the developing count
Description
Displays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit.
Method
Press the start key. The developing count is displayed.
Clearing
Setting
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
U160 Applying toner to the cleaning blade
Description
Applies toner to the cleaning blade.
Purpose
To apply toner to the drum to coat the cleaning blade. To be executed when replacing or cleaning the cleaning
blade or the drum.
Method
2. Press the start key. Operation starts.
When the operation is complete, the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed after open
and close the front cover.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without performing operation, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
1-4-38
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
Description
Changes the fixing control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fixing problem on thick paper.
Method
CONT TEMP Control temperature during copying 170 to 200 (°C) 185
1ST TEMP Primary stabilization fixing temperature 140 to 200 (°C) 165
2ND TEMP Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 170 to 200 (°C) 185
TIME Aging time after secondary stabilization 0 to 180 (s) 120
THICK ADJ Compensation value for setting card 0 to 15 (°C) 10
stock/postcard through the bypass
Setting
1. Select the item to be set. The selecting item is displayed in reverse.
The respective temperatures are to be set such that 2ND TEMP = > 1ST TEMP.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
displayed.
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly
Description
Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method
2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless
of fixing temperature. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data
Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.
Method
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.
Completion
1-4-39
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U194 Setting the fixing web drive
Description
Sets the interval (number of copies) for turning on the fixing web solenoid.
Purpose
To be executed when the fixing web roller becomes extremely soiled.
Method
Setting
Interval for turning on the fixing web solenoid 1 to 40 30
Completion
U196 Turning the fixing heater on
Description
Turns the fixing heater M or S on.
Purpose
To check fixing heaters turning on.
Method
2. Select the heater to be turned on. The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off.
Display Description
MAIN Fixing heater M (FH-M)
SUB Fixing heater S (FH-S)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when fixing motors M and S are off. The screen for selecting the maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U198 Setting the fixing phase control
Description
Sets the use of fixing phase control to reduce electrical noise generated by the copier.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If electrical noise generated by the copier causes flickering of the lights
around the copier, select fixing phase control to reduces the noise.
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Fixing phase control present
OFF Fixing phase control absent
Initial setting: ON (220-240 V specifications) / OFF (120 V specifications)
2. If you select ON, use the ∗ or # key to set 0 (100 V system fixing heater phase control) or 1 (200 V system
fixing heater phase control).
Completion
1-4-40
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U200 Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item
No. is displayed.
U201 Initializing the touch panel
Description
Automatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel.
Purpose
To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed, and the + key displayed at the upper left of the
touch panel flashes.
2. Press on the center of the + key. The + key on lower right flashes.
3. Press the center of the flashing +. Initialization of the touch panel is complete, and the screen for selecting
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without initializing, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance mode No. is displayed.
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.
1-4-41
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U203 Operating DF separately
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DF.
Purpose
To check the DF.
Method
2. Place an original in the DF if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Operation
ADF With paper, single-sided original
RADF With paper, double-sided original
ADF (NON-P) Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)
RADF (NON-P) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)
4. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed
Setting
1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down keys. The selected counter is
displayed in reverse.
Display Description
KEY-CARD The key card is installed
KEY-COUNTER The key counter is installed
2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-42
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the details for coin vender operation, such
as mode and unit price.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
2. "COUNT1" is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom,
the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressed
and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in that
line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.
5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
Completion
U208 Setting the paper size for the large paper deck
Description
Sets the sizes of paper placed in drawer 3, drawer 4 and optional side deck (55 cpm copier only) respectively.
Purpose
To set the size when the size of paper placed in drawer 3, drawer 4 or optional side deck is changed.
Method
Setting
1. Select the paper size (A4/11" × 81/2" or B5). The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Initial setting: A4/11" × 81/2"
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
1-4-43
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U209 Setting date and time
Description
Sets the real time clock.
Purpose
To set the date and time after initializing data.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. The current setting for the year is displayed.
2. Set the year (last two digits of the year) using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. For
years 2000 to 2009, enter only the last digit. The current setting for the month is displayed.
3. Set the month using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. The current setting for the date
is displayed.
4. Set the date using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. The current time setting for hours
is displayed.
5. Set the hours using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. The current time setting for
minutes is displayed.
6. Set the minutes using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. Setting is complete, and the
screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Supplement
To return to the last screen, press the stop/clear key while setting.
Completion
To stop this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key at the screen for
the year setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U212 Setting the deck lift operation
Description
Sets the operation of the side deck (55 cpm copier only) lift motor for when paper in the optional side deck is
exhausted.
Purpose
To be set according to the paper loading method.
Method
Setting
1. Select the method to load paper.
Display Description
SIDE FEED Load paper through the right cover
UPPER FEED Load paper through the upper cover
Initial setting: SIDE FEED
Completion
U235 Setting output tray initialize mode
Description
Sets whether or not initialization (shift of eject position to main tray) is performed when auto clear is triggered if
a multi-job tray is installed to an optional finisher.
Purpose
To be set as required according to the user.
Method
Setting
Display Description
HP ON Job tray initialization is performed.
HP OFF Job tray initialization is not performed.
Initial setting: HP ON
1-4-44
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U235 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
displayed.
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher
Description
Turns each motor, clutch and solenoid of the optional document finisher ON.
Purpose
Used to check the operation of each motor, clutch and solenoid of the optional document finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item will be displayed.
2. Select the motor, clutch or solenoid that you want to check the operation for. The selected item is displayed
in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motors, clutches and solenoids
CONV MOTOR Paper conveying motor (PCM)
PUNCH MOTOR Punch motor (PUNM)
WID T MOTOR Front/rear upper side-registration guide motor (SRGM-FU/SRGM-RU)
WID U MOTOR Lower side-registration guide motor (SRGM-L)
MTRAY MOTOR Main tray elevation motor (MTEM)
JTRAY MOTOR Multi job tray elevation motor (MJTEM)
BRA A SOL Feedshift solenoid A (FSSOLA)
BRA B SOL Feedshift solenoid B (FSSOLB)
BRA C SOL Feedshift solenoid C (FSSOLC)
PUNCH P SOL Punch solenoid (PUNSOL)
MTRAY SOL Paper holder solenoid (PHSOL)
EJEC SOL Eject guide solenoid (EGSOL)
PUNCH I SOL Paper entry guide solenoid (PEGSOL)
MIDDLE SOL Movable guide solenoid (MGSOL)
DRAM CL Siding drum clutch (SDCL)
FEED IN CL Paper conveying clutch (PCCL)
PUNCH CL Punch clutch (PUNCL)
SADDLE ROL1 Main motor (MM)
SADDLE ROL2 Main motor (MM)
SADDLE BLD Centerfold blade motor (SBLM)
SADDLE INI1 Centering plate motor (CPM)
SADDLE INI2 Side-registration guide motor (SRGM)
SADDLE SOL Pressure release solenoid (PRSOL)
3. To turn ON a clutch or solenoid with the motor driving, press the interrupt key before selecting the clutch or
solenoid.
* The driving motor will start operation, and the selected clutch or the solenoid will remain ON until the
interrupt key is pressed again.
4. To stop motor driving, press the interrupt key again.
5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key with the motor stopped.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
1-4-45
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
Description
Displays the status of each switch of the optional document finisher.
Purpose
Used to check the operation of each switch of the optional document finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key to run the maintenance item.
2. Turn each switch ON manually.
* When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted.
Display Switches
CONV Paper entry sensor (PES)
EJECT SUB Paper ejection sensor (PEJS)
CONV TRAY Intermediate tray paper conveying sensor (ITPCS)
EJECT MAIN Sub tray paper ejection sensor (STPES)
TRAY U PAP Upper paper sensor (PS-U)
TRAY L PAP Lower paper sensor (PS-L)
MTRAY U LMT Main tray upper limit detection sensor (MTULDS)
MTRAY L LMT Main tray lower limit detection sensor (MTLLDS)
MTRAY POS Main tray paper upper surface detection light emitting/intercepting sensor
(MTPUSDLES/MTPUSDLIS)
MTRAY PUSH Paper holder detection sensor (PHDS)
MTRAY OVER1 Main tray load 1000 detection sensor (MTLDS-10)
MTRAY OVER2 Main tray load 1500 detection sensor (MTLDS-15)
MTRAY OVER3 Main tray load 3000/2000 detection sensor (MTLDS-30/MTLDS-20)
JOB U LMT Multi job tray upper limit detection sensor (MJTULDS)
JOB L LMT Multi job tray lower limit detection sensor (MJTLLDS)
JOB SAFETY Multi job tray front/rear switch (MJTSW-F/MJTSW-R)
JOB POS Multi job tray position sensor (MJPS)
JOB OVER Multi job tray paper upper surface detection light emitting/intercepting sensor
(MJTPUSDLES/MJTPUSDLIS)
JOB PAP1 Paper detection switch 1 (PDSW1)
SDL CONV Centerfold unit paper entry sensor (CUPES)
SDL EJECT Eject switch (ESW)
SDL PAP Eject tray paper detection switch (ETPDSW)
SDL BIN PAP Inside tray detection sensor (ITDS)
Completion
1-4-46
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch
Description
Turns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the DF on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch .
Method
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motors, solenoids and clutch Operation In operation
F MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operation
C MOT Original paper conveying motor (OCM) On for 0.5 s
FD CL Original feed clutch (OFCL) On for 0.5 s
EJ SL Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) On for 0.5 s
RJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 s
FD SL Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) On and off
RP SL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On and off
3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U244 Checking the DF switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the DF.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the DF operate correctly.
Start
2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Type of switches
SW On/off switches
VR Volume switch
Method for the on/off switches (SW)

1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches
SET SW Original set switch (OSSW)
FEED SW Original feed switch (OFSW)
REV SW Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
TMG SW DF timing switch (DFTSW)
SZ A SW Original size length switch (OSLSW)
1-4-47
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U244 Method for the volume switch (VR)
1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch.
The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted.
Numerical
Original width to be detected
value
000
51/2" × 81/2"
····
49.664
····
A5R
50.176
····
61.440
····
61.952
····
B5R
103.936 81/2" × 14"/
81/2" × 11"
····
104.448
····
Folio/A4R
139.264
····
139.776
····
146.432
····
B4/B5
146.994
····
197.120
····
197.632 11" × 17"/

CF (11" × 15") 11" × 15"/
····
197.720 11" × 81/2"

····
223.232
····
A3/A4
256
For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are adjusted
for A4R paper, it indicates that the original width is detected correctly.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-48
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U245 Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
To check the messages to be displayed.
Method
2. Select the item to be displayed.
3. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each message one at a time.
When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the message
corresponding the specified number is displayed.
Completion
U247 Setting the paper feed device
Descrioption
Drives each motor of the optional side deck.
Purpose
To check the operation of the optional side deck.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motor
SDECK MOT Side deck drive motor (SDDM)
SDECK FAN Suction fan motor (IFM)
SDECK LIFT Side deck lift motor (SDLM)
SDECK CVCL Side deck paper conveying clutch (SDCCL)
SDECK FDCL Side deck paper feed clutch (SDPFCL)
Completion
1-4-49
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U248 Setting the paper eject devices
Descrioption
Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper for finisher punch mode, the booklet stapling position, and the center
folding position for the copier with an optional finisher installed. Also, displays and clears the punch-hole scrap
count.
Purpose
• Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper in punch mode
Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper while in the punch section if, in punch mode, paper jams or is Z-
folded frequently due to too much slack in the paper, or, the position of punch holes varies due to too little
slack in the paper.
• Punch-hole scrap count display (clearing)
Used to manually clear the punch-hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch-hole scrap is
shown on the touch panel after collection.
• Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Start
Display Operation
PUNCH TIMING Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper in punch mode
PUNCH TIMING(TURN) Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper at reversed
paper ejection in punch mode
PUNCH COUNT Punch-hole scrap count display
SADDLE STAPLE ADJUST Booklet stapling position adjustment
SADDLE ADJUST Adjustment of center folding position
SADDLE ADJUST 2 Adjustment of center folding position (correction of number of
sheets of a batch)
Setting the amount of slack in the paper
1. Select PUNCH TIMING on the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the paper size to be set.
B5 Amount of slack in the paper of B5 size -15 to +15 0
A4/11 × 8.5 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
A4/11" × 81/2" size
B5R Amount of slack in the paper of B5R size -15 to +15 0
A4R/8.5 × 11 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
A4R/81/2" × 11" size
B4/8.5 × 14 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
B4/81/2" × 14" size
A3/11 × 17 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
A3/11" × 17" size
If the position of punch holes varies, increase the setting to make the amount of slack larger.
If paper jams or is Z-folded frequently, decrease the setting to make the amount of slack smaller.
Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.
1-4-50
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U248 Setting the amount of slack in the paper at reversed paper ejection
1. Select PUNCH TIMING(TURN) on the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the paper size to be set.
B5 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0
reversed paper ejection of B5 size
A4/11 × 8.5 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0
reversed paper ejection of A4/11" × 81/2" size
B5R Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0
reversed paper ejection of B5R size
A4R/8.5 × 11 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0
reversed paper ejection of A4R/81/2" × 11" size
B4/8.5 × 14 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0
reversed paper ejection of B4/81/2" × 14" size
A3/11 × 17 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0
reversed paper ejection of A3/11" × 17" size
If the position of punch holes varies, increase the setting to make the amount of slack larger.
If paper jams or is Z-folded frequently, decrease the setting to make the amount of slack smaller.
Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.
Displaying the punch-hole scrap count
1. Select PUNCH COUNT on the screen for selecting an item. The punch-hole scrap count is displayed.
Punch-hole scrap count 0 to 999999 -
(current number of punching times)
3. Press the start key to clear the count.
Setting the booklet stapling position
1. Select SADDLE STAPLE ADJUST on the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the size to be set.
Display Description
A4R/LTR Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4R/LETTER size
B4R Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4R size
A3R/LDR Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3R/LEDGER size
Setting range: –10 to +10
Initial setting: 0
Change in value per step: 0.6 mm
1-4-51
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U248
Left stapling Right stapling Adjustment method
Proper
Decrease the
preset value.
Upper side is longer. Lower side is longer.
Increase the
preset value.
Lower side is longer. Upper side is longer.

Setting the center folding position
1. Select SADDLE ADJUST on the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the size to be set.
Display Description
A4R/LTR Adjustment of center folding position for A4R/LETTER size
B4R Adjustment of center folding position for B4R size
A3R/LDR Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/LEDGER size
Setting range: –10 to +10
Initial setting: 0
Setting the center folding position (correction of number of sheets of a batch)
1. Select SADDLE ADJUST 2 on the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
A4R/LTR(2) Adjustment of center folding position for A4R/LETTER size
(Number of sheets of a batch: 6 - 10 sheets)
B4R(2) Adjustment of center folding position for B4R size
A3R/LDR(2) Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/LEDGER size
A4R/LTR(3) Adjustment of center folding position for A4R/LETTER size
B4R(3) Adjustment of center folding position for B4R size
A3R/LDR(3) Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/LEDGER size
Setting range: -10 to +10
Initial setting: 0
1-4-52
1-4-51-1
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U248 Supplement
If the items of SADDLE ADJUST are changed, those of SADDLE ADJUST 2 will also be changed. SADDLE
ADJUST 2, therefore, need not be changed in principle. Only if any problem occurs at the center folding
position depending on the number of sheets of a batch, adjust SADDLE ADJUST 2.
Completion
1-4-51-2
1-4-53
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle
Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Maintenance cycle 0 to 600000 400000 (45 cpm copier)/500000 (55 cpm copier)
Completion
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Clearing
Setting
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-52
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U252 Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running
maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Setting
1. Select the destination. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specifications
INCH Inch (North America) specifications
EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications
ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as when
the power is turned on.
Completion
Supplement
The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To
change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination.
• Initial setting according to the destinations
Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric,
item No. Asia Pacific
253 Switching between double and single counts Single Double Double
255 Setting auto clear time 120 s 90 s 90 s
U253 Switching between double and single counts

Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/LEDGER or B4/LEGEL paper is to be counted as
one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
Method
Setting
1. Select double or single count. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper
DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER) Double count for A3/LEDGER paper only
DOUBLE COUNT(B4/LEGEL) Double count for B4/LEGEL size or larger
Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER)
Completion
1-4-53
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U254 Turning auto start function on/off
Description
Selects if the auto start function is turned on.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve the
problem.
Method
Setting
1. Select either ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Auto start function on
OFF Auto start function off
Initial setting: ON
Completion
U255 Setting auto clear time
Description
Sets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the same
settings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.
Method
Setting
Auto clear time 0 to 270 (s) 90
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.
When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.
Completion
1-4-54
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
Description
Selects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/
energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.
Purpose
According to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without the
recovery time from preheat mode.
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Auto preheat/energy saver function on
OFF Auto preheat/energy saver function off
Initial setting: ON
When the setting is changed from OFF to ON, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15
minutes.
Completion
1-4-55
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that can
be made after the detection.
Purpose
To change the copying operation after detection of toner empty status.
Method
Display Description
EMPTY COUNT Number of copies to be made after turning off of the toner
level sensor before indicating toner empty
EMPTY MODE Operation of copies after toner empty detection
Setting the number of copies after turning off of the toner level sensor before indicating toner empty
Number of copies to be made after turning off of 100 to 300 (copies) 200
the toner level sensor before indicating toner empty
The setting can be changed by 100 per step.
Setting the copy operation after toner empty detection
1. Select single or continuous copying. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE Enables only single copying.
CONTINUE Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: SINGLE
2. Set the number of copies that can be made using the cursor up/down keys.
Number of copies after toner empty detection 0 to 200 (copies) 5
The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.
When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous copying.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-56
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U260 Changing the copy count timing
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper
ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.
To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is counted
before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, the
copy timing should be made later.
Method
Setting
1. Select the copy count timing . The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FEED When secondary paper feed starts
EJECT When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJECT
Completion
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DF
Description
Sets whether the copies will be ejected in the same or opposite order as the originals when copying from the
DF.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Method
Setting
1. Select the ejection order.
Display Setting
FACE-DOWN (NOMAL) Face down ejection
FACE-UP (SPEED) Face up ejection with bitmap copy
FACE-UP (MEMORY) Face up ejection with memory copy
Initial setting: FACE-DOWN
Completion
1-4-57
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U264 Setting the display order of the date
Description
Selects year, month and day as the order of that appears on lists, etc.
Purpose
Set according to the user preference.
Method
Setting
1. Select the desired order.
Display Setting
YEAR-MONTH-DATE Year/Month/Day
MONTH-DATE-YEAR Month/Day/Year
DATE-MONTH-YEAR Day/Month/Year
Initial setting: MONTH-DATE-YEAR (for the inch specifications)
DATE-MONTH-YEAR (for the metric specifications)
Completion
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
Description
Sets the OEM purchaser code.
Purpose
Sets the code when replacing the main PCB and the like.
Method
Setting
1. Use the numeric keys or cursor up/down keys to adjust the preset value.
2. Press the start key. The count is set , and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
1-4-58
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U266 Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents
Descrioption
Sets the number of days to save documents on the HDD before automatically deleting.
Purpose
To change the number of days to retain data that is saved within the auto-delete area of the HDD before
automatically deleting.
Method
Setting
Number of days after which to automatically delete documents 0 to 7 (days) 7
Completion
U275 Setting the number of sheets for duplex circulation
Descrioption
Sets the number of sheets for circulation in the duplex copy mode.
Purpose
To reduce the number of sheets for circulation if paper jams occur frequently in the duplex copy mode.
Method
Display Description
MODE0 Circulation of five sheets
MODE1 Circulation of four sheets
Initial setting: MODE0
Completion
U277 Setting auto application change time
Description
Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operation
when the machine is used as a printer (only if the printer kit is installed).
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Method
Setting
Switching time 30 to 270 (s) 30
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.
Completion
1-4-59
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U329 Default setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy
Description
Sets the initial mode for the Auto rotation copy/Sort copy selected when auto clear is triggered or the reset key
is pressed.
Purpose
To be set as required according to the user.
Method
2. Select the item to be set.
Setting Auto rotation copy
1. Select ON or OFF.
Initial setting: ON
Setting Sort copy
Initial setting: ON
Completion
displayed.
U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation
Description
Sets the number of copies at which copy ejection will be switched from the optional document finisher's sub
tray to its main tray when sorting is turned ON in the setting for the output mode under user simulation.
Purpose
To be set as required according to the number of copies the user makes.
Method
Setting
Number of copies to be ejected on the sub tray 0 to 100 (sheets) 100
Completion
U331 Switching the paper ejection mode
Descrioption
Sets whether to eject copied sheets with the printed face facing up or down.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Method
Setting
1. Select the ejection mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FACE UP Face-up ejection
FACE DOWN Face-down ejection
Initial setting: FACE UP
Completion
1-4-60
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
Description
Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size. The coefficient set here is used to
convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size and to display the result in user simulation.
Purpose
To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size for
copying and printing respectively.
Method
Setting
1. Select copying (COPY) or printing (PRT).
COPY Size parameter for copying 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
PRT Size parameter for printing 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
Completion
selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U336 Setting the HDD type
Descrioption
Sets the manufacturer and type of the HDD.
Purpose
To set data according to the manufacturer and type of the new HDD after replacement.
Method
Setting
HDD type 0 to 255 0
Completion
U339 Setting the drawer heater mode
Description
Sets the drawer heater to ON or OFF for the sleep mode.
Purpose
Change of setting is not needed in principle.
Method
Display Description
ON The drawer heater is on even if the main switch is off.
(The drawer heater is always on except during driving.)
OFF The drawer heater is on only if the main switch is off.
(The drawer heater is off if the main switch is on.)
Initial setting: ON
Completion
1-4-61
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function
Description
Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output (only if a printer kit is installed).
Purpose
To use a paper feed location only for printer output.
Method
2. Select the paper feed location for the printer. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
CASSETTE 1 Drawer 1
CASSETTE 2 Drawer 2
CASSETTE 3 Drawer 3
CASSETTE 4 Drawer 4
SIDE DECK Optional side deck (55 cpm copier only)
Completion
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray
is selected as the eject location.
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method
Display Description
ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets
OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Completion
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Duplex copy
OFF Simplex copy
Initial setting: OFF
Completion
1-4-62
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode
Description
Changes the control for preheat/energy saver mode.
Purpose
According to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver.
Method
Setting
1. Select control mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
INSTANT READY The fixing control temperature is not lowered and only the display on
the operation panel is turned off.
ENERGY STAR The fixing control temperature is lowered by 30°C/86°F and forced
stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.
E 2000 The fixing control temperature is lowered by 30°C/86°F and forced
stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.
TOP RUNNER Control in accordance with Top Runner is performed.
Initial setting: ENERGY STAR
Completion
displayed.
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the
number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification.
1-4-63
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U347 Setting auto drawer size detection
Description
Turns the auto drawer size detection function on/off.
Purpose
To be used when turning the auto paper size (in the drawers) detection off and making copies onto only the
specified size paper.
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Detects the paper sizes in the drawers automatically.
OFF Does not detect the paper sizes in the drawers automatically.
Initial setting: ON
Completion
U350 Setting the ID-code error output
Descrioption
Sets whether or not an error report is output when an ID-code error occurs.
Purpose
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Error report is output
OFF Error report is not output
Initial setting: OFF
Completion
1-4-64
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U355 Setting the output mode for face up output
Descrioption
Specifies whether to output from the first page so that the pages after the second page are stacked on the first
page or to output from the last page so that the first page is stacked at the top when outputting face up in
printing.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Method
Setting
1. Select The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FIRST PRINT To output from the first page
ORDER OF PAGE To output from the last page
Initial setting: FIRST PRINT
Completion
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-18.
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-38.
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF
Adjustment
See page 1-6-72.
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-16.
1-4-65
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U504 Initializing the scanner NIC
Description
Initializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default.
Purpose
To return to a setup at the time of factory shipments.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized.
Completion
U505 Setting Data Base Assistant
Description
Sets whether or not the database linkage setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed.
Purpose
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Database linkage setting is enabled.
OFF Database linkage setting is disabled.
Initial setting: ON
Completion
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Paper feed locations
BYPASS Bypass tray
FIRST Drawer 1
SECOND Drawer 2
THIRD Drawer 3
FORTH Drawer 4
SIDE DECK Optional side deck (55 cpm copier only)
DUPLEX Duplex unit
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all paper feed locations, press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance
item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-66
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Implementation
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the jam counts
TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts
Method: Displays/clears the jam counts

1. Select COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The count for jam detection by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the ∗ or # keys.
3. Select the counts for all jam codes and press the reset key.
4. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Method: Displays the total jam counts
1. Select TOTAL COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The total number of jam counts by type is
displayed.
2. Use the ∗ or # keys to switch the display.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop clear key.
Completion
displayed.
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing
consumable parts.
Implementation
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the call for service counts
TOTAL COUNT Displays the total call for service counts
Method: Displays/clears the call for service counts

1. Select COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The count for call for service detection by type is
displayed.
2. Change the screen using the ∗ or # keys.
3. Select the counts for all service call and press the reset key.
Method: Displays the total call for service counts
1. Select TOTAL COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The total number of call for service counts by
type is displayed.
2. Use the ∗ or # keys to switch the display.
The total number of call for service count cannot be cleared.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop clear key.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-67
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
Description
Displays or clears the counts of the DF or optional finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of the DF and optional finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
• DF
Display Description
CHANGE Original replacement count
ADF No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DF in ADF mode
RADF No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DF in RADF mode
• Finisher
Display Description
CP CNT No. of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated
PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated
STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated
SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Select the counts for all, press the
reset key.
Completion
displayed.
U906 Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and the
related parts are serviced.
Method
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine
returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on.
1-4-68
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U907 Checking and resetting the count value on each ejection location
Description
Displays and resets the count value of ejected sheets on each ejection location.
Purpose
Checks the replacement period for maintenance parts. Also resets the count value after replacing the
maintenance parts.
Method
The count value on each ejection location is displayed
Display Description
STRAIGHT Straight ejection count
SWITCH BACK Reversed ejection count
AUTO DUPLEX Duplex tray ejection count
Clearing
To clear the counts for all, press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance
item No. is displayed.
Completion
U908 Changing the total counter value
Description
Displays, clears and changes the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for total count value is displayed.
Display Description
TOTAL COUNT Electronic total counter value
TOTAL COUNT (MACHINE) Mechanical total counter value entered at the beginning
Clearing
Completion
U909 Checking/clearing the fixing web count
Description
Displays and clears the count of the fixing web roller operation.
Purpose
To clear the fixing web counts after replacing the fixing web roller during maintenance or for other reasons.
Method
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit value using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-69
2BC/D
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
2. Press CANCEL on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the paper size. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear all counts, press the reset key.
When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box maintenance count value
Description
Displays and clears the count value of waste toner box
Purpose
To check the period of replacement of waste toner box. Also to clear the count value after replacement.
Method
Clearing
Setting
Completion
1-4-70
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U922 Checking/clearing the solenoid count value
Description
Displays and clears the count value of solenoid
Purpose
To check the period of replacement of solenoid. Also to clear the count value after replacement.
Method
Display Description
BRA SOL COUNT Feed shift solenoid (FSSOL)
DPRAS SOL COUNT Duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL)
Clearing
Setting
Completion
maintenance No. item is displayed.
U923 Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning count
Description
Displays or clears the count value for transfer charger cleaning.
Purpose
To clear the count value before replacing maintenance parts.
Method
Press the start key. The count value for transfer charger cleaning is displayed.
Clearing
Completion
U960 Outputting the machine used circumstances list
Description
Outputs machine used circumstances list and clears the data.
Purpose
To check the machine operation situation. Also to clear the data.
Method
Outputting the list
1. Select OUTPUT.
2. Press the start key to output the list.
Clearing
1. Select COUNT CLEAR.
2. Press the start key to clear the count.
Completion
1-4-71
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U989 HDD Scandisk
Description
Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
Purpose
If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the hard disk drive
may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.
Method
3. Press the start key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing scandisk, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after
replacement.
Method
Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
1-4-72
1-4-71-1
2BC/D-1

2BC/D-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U991 Checking/clearing the scanner count
Description
Displays or clears the scanner operation count.
Purpose
To check the status of use of the scanner.
Method
Display Description
TOTAL SCAN COUNT Counts of scanner operation
NT SCAN COUNT Counts of network scanner operation
Clearing
3. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
2. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric key.
Completion
U992 Checking or clearing the printer count
Description
Displays, clears or changes the print count of the printer when the optional printer board is installed.
Purpose
To check the frequency of use of the printer.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for the printer count of the printer is displayed.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric keys.
Completion
1-4-74
1-4-72
2BC/D
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication

When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.
Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.
To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the drawer, front cover or right cover. When paper is jammed in the DF, open
the DF original reversing cover. To clear a jam in the feedshift and duplex sections, draw out the duplex unit.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch 1 or 2 off and on.
• Misfeed in drawer
Jam code 10
Jam code 11
Jam code 12
Jam code 13
Jam code 16
Jam code 17
Jam code 31
• Misfeed in bypass
Jam code 14
• Misfeed in right cover

Jam code 18
Jam code 19
Jam code 20
Jam code 21
Jam code 22
Jam code 24
Jam code 25
Jam code 26
Jam code 27
Jam code 28
Jam code 29
• Misfeed in side deck*1

Jam code 15
*1: Optional for 55 cpm copier only. *2: Optional.
1-5-1
2BC/D
• Misfeed in paper conveying section

Jam code 23
Jam code 30
Jam code 32
• Misfeed in fixing section

Jam code 40
Jam code 50
Jam code 52
Jam code 53
• Misfeed in duplex section

Jam code 51
Jam code 60
Jam code 61
Jam code 62
Jam code 63
Jam code 64
Jam code 65
Jam code 66
Jam code 67
Jam code 68
• Misfeed in DF
Jam code 70
Jam code 71
Jam code 72
Jam code 73
Jam code 74
Jam code 75
Jam code 76
• Misfeed in document finisher*2

Jam code 80 to 95
1-5-2
2BC/D
;
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
;
OFSW
; ;
OSBSW
DFTSW
;;;
;;
BYPPSW
BYPPFCL
RCL
RSW
ESW FCL1-H PFSW1
FDESW
FSSW FCL1-L PFSW2
DUPREVCL
FCL2-H
;;
;;
DUPJSW
FCL2-L
DUPFSSW
FCL3
DUPPCSW1 DUPESW PFSW3
DUPPCSW2
DUPFWDCL PFCL1
FCL4
PFSW4
PFCL2
PFSW5
PFCL4 DFCL
DPCSW1 PFSW6
DPCSW2
FCL5
PFCL3
Figure 1-5-1
1-5-3
2BC/D
Section Jam code Description Conditions

Paper feed 10 No paper feed from Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) does not turn on within 660 ms
section drawer 1 of paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then
successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on once, but
the switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
11 No paper feed from Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) does not turn on within 660 ms
drawer 2 of paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turning on; the clutch is then
12 No paper feed from Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) does not turn on within 660 ms
drawer 3 of paper feed clutch 3 (PFCL3) turning on; the clutch is then
13 No paper feed from Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) does not turn on
drawer 4 within 660 ms of paper feed clutch 4 (PFCL4) turning on; the
clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back
on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
14 No paper feed from by- Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn on within 980 ms
pass of the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on; the
15 No paper feed from side Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn on within 660 ms
deck*1 of the side deck paper feed clutch (SDPFCL) turning on; the
16 Misfeed in deck paper Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) does not turn on
conveying section 1 within 760 ms of deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2)
turning on.
17 Misfeed in deck paper Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) does not turn on within 840 ms
conveying section 2 of deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) turning on.
Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) does not turn off
within 760 ms of deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2)
turning off.
18 Misfeed in copier vertical Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn on within 760 ms
paper conveying section of paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) turning on.
1
2
3
4
5
23 Misfeed in converging The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 740
section ms of paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turning on.

1-5-4
2BC/D

Paper feed 24 Multiple sheets in copier Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn off within the
section vertical conveying sec- time required to convey the length of the used paper size
tion 1 plus 1470 ms of turning on.
Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn off within 800 ms
of paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turning off.
25 Multiple sheets in copier Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn off by the previ-
vertical conveying sec- ous paper within 1330 ms of duplex eject switch (DUPESW)
tion turning on.
26 Multiple sheets in copier Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) does not turn off within the
vertical conveying sec- time required to convey the length of the used paper size
of deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2) turning off.
30 Multiple sheets in con- Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn off within the
verging section time required to convey the length of the used paper size
plus 2179 ms of turning on.
31 Multiple sheets in deck Deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2) does not turn off
paper conveying section within the time required to convey the length of the used pa-
per size plus 1470 ms of turning on.
Paper con- 32 Misfeed in registration/ The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 670
veying transfer section ms of paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turning off.
section
Fixing sec- 40 Misfeed in fixing section The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 2260 ms of
tion the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
Even if 2260 ms elapses after the registration clutch (RCL)
turns on, the OFF status of the eject switch (ESW) for the
preceding paper is not detected.
Eject sec- 50 Misfeed in eject section The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within the time re-
tion quired to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2180
ms of turning on.
51 Misfeed in face down The face down eject switch (FDESW) does not turn off within
eject section the time required to convey the length of the used paper size
plus 2180 ms of turning on.
1-5-5
2BC/D

Feedshift 52 Misfeed in feedshift sec- The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1190
section tion ms of the eject switch (ESW) turning on.
53 Misfeed in feedshift de- The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1190
tention section ms of the eject switch (ESW) turning off.
Even if 1190 ms elapses after the eject switch (ESW) turns
on, the OFF status of the feedshift switch (FSSW) for the
preceding paper is not detected.
Duplex 60 Misfeed in duplex tray The duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) does not turn on
section section within 860 ms of the duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL)
turning on.
61 Misfeed in duplex The face down eject switch (FDESW) does not turn on within
feedshift section (face 1120 ms of the duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) turning
down eject) on.
62 Misfeed in duplex Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1) does not

feedshift section (duplex) turn on within 910 ms of the duplex feedshift switch
(DUPFSSW) turning on.
Even if 860 ms elapses after the duplex reverse clutch
(DUPREVCL) turns on, the ON status of the duplex feedshift
switch (DUPFSSW) for the preceding paper is not detected.
63 Misfeed in duplex paper Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not
conveying section 1 turn on within 1280 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) turning on.
64 Misfeed in duplex paper Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not
conveying detention sec- turn off within 1280 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
tion 1 (DUPPCSW1) turning off.
Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not
turn off within 1280 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) turning on.
65 Misfeed in duplex paper The duplex eject switch (DUPESW) does not turn on within
conveying section 2 1270 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)
turning on.
66 Misfeed in duplex paper The duplex eject switch (DUPESW) does not turn off within
conveying detention sec- 1270 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)
tion 2 turning off.
The duplex eject switch (DUPESW) does not turn off within
1270 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)
turning on.
67 Misfeed in duplex eject Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn on within 1200
section ms of the duplex eject switch (DUPESW) turning on.
68 Misfeed in duplex eject Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn off within 1200
detention section ms of the duplex eject switch (DUPESW) turning off.
DF 70 No original feed In the primary original feed for the second original or after in
the 1 sided or 2 sided original mode, even if retry operation is
performed two times, primary original feed is not performed.
71 An original jam in the In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided original mode,
original feed section 1 even if the specified number of pulses of the original feed
motor (OFM) passes after the original switchback switch
(OSBSW) turns on, the ON status of the DF timing switch
(DFTSW) is not detected.
1-5-6
2BC/D-1

DF 72 An original jam in the In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided original mode,
original feed section 2 even if the specified number of pulses of the original
conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF timing switch
(DFTSW) turns on, the OFF status of the original feed switch
(OFSW) or the original switchback switch (OSBSW) is not
detected.
In the original switchback in the 2 sided original mode, even
if the specified number of pulses of the original feed motor
(OFM) passes after the original feed switch (OFSW) turns
on, the OFF status of the original feed switch (OFSW) is not
detected and the ON status of the original switchback switch
(OSBSW) is not detected.
73 An original jam in the In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided or 2 sided origi-
original conveying sec- nal mode, even if the specified number of pulses of the origi-
tion nal conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF timing
switch (DFTSW) turns on, the OFF status of the DF timing
switch (DFTSW) is not detected.
In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided or 2 sided origi-
nal mode, before the specified number of pulses of the origi-
nal conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF timing
switch (DFTSW) turns on, the OFF status of the DF timing
switch (DFTSW) is detected.
74 An original jam remaining In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided or 2 sided origi-
after retries nal mode, even if retry operation is performed five times,
secondary original feed is not performed.
75 An original jam in the In the original switchback in the 2 sided original mode, even
switchback section 1 if the specified number of pulses of the original feed motor
(OFM) passes after the original switchback switch (OSBSW)
turns on, the OFF status of the original switchback switch
(OSBSW) is not detected.
In the secondary original feed in the 2 sided original mode,
even if the specified number of pulses of the original feed
motor (OFM) passes after the original conveying motor
(OCM) turns on, the ON status of the DF timing switch
(DFTSW) is not detected.
In the original switchback in the 2 sided original mode, even
if the specified number of pulses of the original feed motor
(OFM) passes after the original feed switch (OFSW) turns
on, the OFF status of the original feed switch (OFSW) is not
detected and the OFF status of the original switchback
switch (OSBSW) is detected.
76 An original jam in the While the back side of an original is being scanned in the 2
switchback section 2 sided original mode, even if the specified number of pulses
of the original conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF
timing switch (DFTSW) turns on, the ON status of the original
switchback switch (OSBSW) is not detected.
1-5-7
2BC/D

Finisher*2 80 Jam between the finisher There is no reply.
and copier
81 Paper jam during paper See the finisher service manual.
insertion to the finisher

insertion to the finisher
and paper ejection to the
sub tray
83 Paper jam at the siding See the finisher service manual.

drum

insertion to the intermedi-
ate tray
85 Paper jam during ejection See the finisher service manual.

of stack of paper
86 Jam in eject section of See the finisher service manual.

main tray
87 Jam in eject section See the finisher service manual.

(middle tray) of main tray
88 Jam in eject section of See the finisher service manual.

main tray
89 Jam in cover open See the finisher service manual.
90 Jam in stapler See the finisher service manual.
91 Jam in saddle paper en- See the finisher service manual.

try section
92 Jam in saddle paper en- See the finisher service manual.

try section
93 Jam in saddle tray sec- See the finisher service manual.

tion
94 Jam in saddle eject sec- See the finisher service manual.

tion
95 Jam in saddle eject sec- See the finisher service manual.

tion

1-5-8
2BC/D
(3) Paper misfeeds

• Copier
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1) A piece of paper torn from Check visually and remove it, if any.
A paper jam in the copy paper is caught
paper feed, convey- around paper feed switch
ing or eject section 1/2/3/4/5/6, the registration
is indicated as soon switch or eject switch.
as the main switch
Defective paper feed Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 on
is turned on.
switch 1. and off manually. Replace paper feed switch 1 if indication of the
corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-
verse.
verse.
verse.
verse.
verse.
verse.
Defective registration Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on
switch. and off manually. Replace the registration switch if indication of
the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
reverse.
Defective eject switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off
manually. Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre-
sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
(2) Paper in drawer 1 is ex- Change the paper.

A paper jam in the tremely curled.
paper feed section
Check if the upper paper Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
is indicated during
feed pulley, lower paper
copying (no paper
feed pulley or upper for-
feed from copier
warding pulley of drawer 1
drawer 1).
are deformed.
Jam code 10
Broken paper feed switch Check visually and replace paper feed switch 3 if its actuator is
3 actuator. broken.
verse.
1-5-9
2BC/D

(2) Check if paper feed clutch Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 1 on
A paper jam in the 1 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
paper feed section remedy if necessary.
is indicated during
Electrical problem with pa- Check (see page 1-5-46).
copying (no paper
per feed clutch 1.
feed from copier
drawer 1).
Jam code 10

paper feed section
Check if the upper paper Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
is indicated during
feed pulley, lower paper
copying (no paper
feed pulley or upper for-
feed from copier
warding pulley of drawer 2
drawer 2).
are deformed.
Jam code 11
4 actuator. broken.
verse.
Check if paper feed clutch Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 2 on
2 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
remedy if necessary.

per feed clutch 2.

paper feed section
is indicated during
6 actuator. broken.
copying (no paper
feed from copier Defective paper feed Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 6 on
drawer 3). switch 6. and off manually. Replace paper feed switch 6 if indication of the
Jam code 12 corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-
verse.
Check if paper feed clutch Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 3 on
3 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and

per feed clutch 3.

paper feed section
Broken deck paper con- Check visually and replace deck feed switch 1 if its actuator is
is indicated during
veying switch 1 actuator. broken.
copying (no paper
feed from copier Defective deck paper con-
drawer 4). veying switch 1. Run maintenance item U031 and turn deck paper conveying
Jam code 13 switch 1 on and off manually. Replace deck paper conveying
switch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch
panel is not displayed in reverse.
1-5-10
2BC/D

(5) Check if paper feed clutch Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 4 on
A paper jam in the 4 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
paper feed section remedy if necessary.
is indicated during
copying (no paper
per feed clutch 4.
feed from copier
drawer 4).
Jam code 13
(6) Paper on the bypass table Change the paper.

A paper jam in the is extremely curled.
paper feed section
Check if the forwarding Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
is indicated during
pulley, upper or lower pa-
copying (no paper
per feed pulleys of the by-
feed from bypass).
pass are deformed.
Jam code 14
1 actuator. broken.
verse.
Check if the bypass paper Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feed
feed clutch malfunctions. clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-
tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-5-46).

bypass paper feed clutch.
(7) Check if the side deck pa- Check and repair if necessary.
A paper jam in the per feed clutch malfunc-
paper feed section tions.
is indicated during
Electrical problem with the Check.
copying (no paper
side deck paper feed
feed from side
clutch.
deck*). Jam code 15
(8) Broken deck paper con- Check visually and replace deck paper conveying switch 2 if its
A paper jam in the veying switch 2 actuator. actuator is broken.
paper feed section
Defective deck paper con-
is indicated during
veying switch 2. Run maintenance item U031 and turn deck paper conveying
copying (jam in deck
switch 2 on and off manually. Replace deck paper conveying
paper conveying
section).
Jam code 16/17 Broken paper feed switch
5 actuator. Check visually and replace paper feed switch 5 if its actuator is
broken.
Defective paper feed
switch 5. Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 5 on
and off manually. Replace paper feed switch 5 if indication of the
verse.
Check if the deck feed
clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the deck feed clutch on
the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
Electrical problem with the
deck feed clutch. Check (see page 1-5-47).
*Optional for 55 cpm copier only.

1-5-11
2BC/D

(9) Broken paper feed switch Check visually and replace paper feed switch 1 if its actuator is
A paper jam in the 1 actuator. broken.
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (jam in
copier vertical paper
verse.
conveying section).
Jam code 18/19/20/ Broken paper feed switch Check visually and replace paper feed switch 2 if its actuator is
21/22 2 actuator. broken.
verse.
3 actuator. broken.
verse.
4 actuator. broken.
verse.
5 actuator. broken.
verse.
6 actuator. broken.
verse.
Check if the feed pulleys, Check visually and remedy if necessary.

feed roller and vertical pa-
per conveying rollers A,
B,C,D and E do not con-
tact each other.
Check if the feed pulleys, Repair or replace if necessary.

B,C,D and E are de-
formed.
Check if the feed clutch 3/ Run maintenance item U032 and select the feed clutch 3/4/5 on
4/5 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
1-5-12
2BC/D

(9) Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-5-45).
A paper jam in the feed clutch 3/4/5.
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (jam in
copier vertical paper
conveying section).
Jam code 18/19/20/
21/22
(10) Defective registration Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on
A paper jam in the switch. and off manually. Replace the registration switch if indication of
paper feed section the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
is indicated during reverse.
copying (jam in con-
verging section).
Jam code 23
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in copier ver-
verse.
tical conveying sec-
tion). Broken paper feed switch Check visually and replace paper feed switch 3 if its actuator is
Jam code 24/25/26/ 3 actuator. broken.
27/28/29
verse.
4 actuator. broken.
verse.
5 actuator. broken.
verse.
6 actuator. broken.
verse.
Check if the feed pulleys, Check visually and remedy if necessary.

B,C,D and E do not con-
tact each other.
1-5-13
2BC/D

(11) Check if the feed pulleys, Repair or replace if necessary.
A paper jam in the feed roller and vertical pa-
paper feed section per conveying rollers A,
is indicated during B,C,D and E are de-
copying (multiple formed.
sheets in copier ver-
Check if the feed clutch 3/ Run maintenance item U032 and select the feed clutch 3/4/5 on
tical conveying sec-
4/5 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
tion).
Jam code 24/25/26/
27/28/29 Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-5-45).
feed clutch 3/4/5.
Deformed guides along Repair or replace if necessary.

the paper conveying path.
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in copier
verse.
converging section).
Jam code 30
(13) Check if the deck paper Repair or replace if necessary.

A paper jam in the conveying rollers are de-
paper feed section formed.
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in deck pa-
per conveying sec-
tion).
Jam code 31
(14) Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch
A paper jam in the clutch malfunctions. on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
paper conveying remedy if necessary.
section is indicated
during copying (jam
registration clutch.
in registration/trans-
fer section). Check if the upper and Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Jam code 32 lower registration rollers
contact each other.
Check if the upper and Check visually and remedy if necessary.

lower feed rollers contact
each other.
(15) Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch
A paper jam in the clutch malfunctions. on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
fixing section is indi- remedy if necessary.
cated during copy-
ing (jam in fixing
registration clutch.
section).
Jam code 40 Check if the upper and Check visually and remedy if necessary.
lower registration rollers
contact each other.
1-5-14
2BC/D

(15) Check if the upper and Check visually and remedy if necessary.
A paper jam in the lower feed rollers contact
fixing section is indi- each other.
cated during copy-
Check if the fixing unit Repair or replace if necessary.
ing (jam in fixing
front guide is deformed.
section).
Jam code 40 Check if the press roller is Clean or replace if necessary.
extremely dirty or de-
formed.
Check if the heat roller Clean or replace if necessary.

separation claws are dirty
or deformed.
Check if the heat roller and Remedy if the separation claw springs are out of place.
its separation claws con-
tact each other.
Broken eject switch actua- Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro-
tor. ken.
(16) Check if the eject roller Check visually and remedy if necessary.
A paper jam in the and eject pulley contact
eject section is indi- each other.
cated during copy-
Broken eject switch actua- Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro-
ing (jam in eject
tor. ken.
section).
Jam code 50 Defective eject switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off
(17) Defective face down eject Run maintenance item U031 and turn the face down eject switch
A paper jam in the switch. on and off manually. Replace the face down eject switch if indi-
eject section is indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis-
cated during copy- played in reverse.
ing (jam in face
Check if the left or right Check visually and replace any deformed rollers.
down eject section).
face down feed roller is
Jam code 51
deformed.
Check if the right middle or Repair or replace if necessary.

left face down eject guide
is deformed.
(18) Broken feedshift switch Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is
A paper jam in the actuator. broken.
feedshift section is
Defective feedshift switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on
indicated during
and off manually. Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the
copying (jam in
feedshift section).
verse.
Jam code 52/53
1-5-15
2BC/D

(18) Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-5-47).
A paper jam in the feedshift solenoid.
feedshift section is
Deformed lower feedshift Repair or replace if necessary.
indicated during
guide.
copying (jam in
feedshift section). Check if the left and right Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Jam code 52/53 feedshift rollers contact
each other.
(19) Broken duplex feedshift Check visually and replace the duplex feedshift switch if its ac-
A paper jam in the switch actuator. tuator is broken.
duplex section is
Defective duplex feedshift Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex feedshift switch
indicated during
switch. on and off manually. Replace the duplex feedshift switch if indi-
copying (jam in du-
cation of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis-
plex tray section).
played in reverse.
Jam code 60
Check if the duplex pres- Run maintenance item U033 and select the duplex pressure re-
sure release solenoid mal- lease solenoid on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check
functions. the status and remedy if necessary.

duplex pressure release
solenoid.
(20) Check if the duplex eject Check and repair if necessary.

A paper jam in the switching solenoid mal-
duplex section is functions.
indicated during
copying (jam in du-
duplex eject switching so-
plex feedshift sec-
lenoid.
tion).
Jam code 61 Defective face down eject Run maintenance item U031 and turn the face down eject switch
switch. on and off manually. Replace the face down eject switch if indi-
played in reverse.
(21) Broken duplex paper con- Check visually and replace duplex paper conveying switch 1 if
A paper jam in the veying switch 1 actuator. its actuator is broken.
duplex section is
Defective duplex paper Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveying
indicated during
conveying switch 1. switch 1 on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveying
copying (jam in du-
plex feedshift sec-
tion).
Jam code 62 Defective duplex feedshift Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex feedshift switch
switch. on and off manually. Replace the duplex feedshift switch if indi-
played in reverse.
1-5-16
2BC/D

(22) Broken duplex paper con- Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch 2
A paper jam in the veying switch 2 actuator. if its actuator is broken.
duplex section is
Defective duplex paper Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveying
indicated during
conveying switch 2. switch 2 on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveying
copying (jam in du-
plex paper convey-
ing section).
Jam code 63/64/65/ Broken duplex eject switch Check visually and replace the duplex eject switch if its actuator
66 actuator. is broken.
Defective duplex eject Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex eject switch on
switch. and off manually. Replace the duplex eject switch if indication of
reverse.
Check if upper and lower Check visually and remedy if necessary.

duplex registration rollers,
upper and lower duplex
paper conveying rollers
and upper and lower du-
plex eject rollers contact
each other correctly.
Check if upper or lower Repair or replace if necessary.

duplex registration roller,
paper conveying roller or
eject roller are deformed.
duplex section is
indicated during
copying (jam in du-
plex eject section).
verse.
Jam code 67/68
Broken duplex eject switch Check visually and replace the duplex eject switch if its actuator
actuator. is broken.
Defective duplex eject Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex eject switch on
switch. and off manually. Replace the duplex eject switch if indication of
reverse.
1-5-17
2BC/D
• DF
(1) A piece of paper torn from Remove any found.
An original jams an original is caught
when the main around the original feed
switch is turned on. switch.
Defective original feed Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on
switch. and off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication of
reverse.
A piece of paper torn from Remove any found.

an original is caught
around the original
switchback switch.
Defective original Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback
switchback switch. switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback
switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch

around the DF timing
switch.
Defective DF timing Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch on
switch. and off manually. Replace the DF timing switch if indication of
reverse.
(2) Defective original feed Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on
An original jams switch. and off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication of
during continuous the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
copying of multiple reverse.
originals.
Check if the original feed Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor/
motor or the original con- original conveying motor on the touch panel to be turned on and
veying motor malfunction. off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
(3) Defective original feed Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on
An original jams in switch. and off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication of
the DF is indicated the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
during copying (no reverse.
original feed).
Check if the original feed Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor
Jam code 70
motor malfunctions. on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
(4) Defective DF timing Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch on
An original jams in switch. and off manually. Replace the DF timing switch if indication of
the DF during copy- the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
ing (a jam in the reverse.
original feed/con-
veying section).
Jam code 72/73
reverse.
1-5-18
2BC/D

(4) Defective original Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback
An original jams in switchback switch. switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback
the DF during copy- switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch
ing (a jam in the panel is not displayed in reverse.
original feed/con-
veying section).
Jam code 72/73
Check if the DF original Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
feed pulley or the DF
separation pulley is de-
formed.
Check if the DF registra- Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
tion roller or the DF regis-
tration pulley is deformed.
Check if the lower original Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
conveying roller or the
front scanning pulley is
deformed.
Check if the original con- Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying
veying motor malfunctions. motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-
(5) Defective original Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback
An original jams in switchback switch. switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback
the DF during copy- switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch
ing (a jam in the panel is not displayed in reverse.
original switchback
section).
Jam code 75/76
reverse.
Check if the original con- Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying
veying motor malfunctions. motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-
(6) An original outside the Use only originals conforming to the specifications.
Original jams fre- specifications is used.
quently.
The DF forwarding pulleys, Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
DF original feed pulley or
DF switchback pulley is
dirty with paper powder.
The DF original feed pulley Check and remedy.

and the DF separation pul-
ley do not contact cor-
rectly.
1-5-19
2BD/C
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function

This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem
displayed as a code consisting of "C" followed by a number between 0040 and 7810, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches 1 or 2 off and back on.
Call for service.
012345678901234
C2000
Figure 1-5-2 Service call code display
1-5-20
2BC/D
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0040 Network scanner PCB* problem Defective network Replace the network scanner PCB and
• Correct communication data is not scanner PCB. check for correct operation.
obtained from network scanner PCB.
C0100 Backup memory read/write problem Defective backup Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
• Read and write data does not match. RAM or main rect operation.
PCB.
C0110 Backup memory data problem Problem with the Turn safety switch 1 off and back on and
• Data in the specified area of the backup memory run maintenance item U020 to set the con-
backup memory does not match the data. tents of the backup memory data again.
specified values.
Defective backup If the C0110 is displayed after re-setting
RAM. the backup memory contents, replace the
backup RAM or main PCB.
C0210 Operation unit PCB communication Poor contact in Check the connection of connectors CN10
problem the connector ter- on the main PCB and CN2 on the opera-
• There is no reply after 20 retries at minals. tion unit PCB, and the continuity across the
communication. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective main Replace the main PCB or operation unit

PCB or operation left PCB and check for correct operation.
unit left PCB.
C0240 Printer PCB* communication prob- Poor contact in Check the connection of connector CN3 on
lem the connector ter- the main PCB and the connector on the
• There is no reply after 20 retries at minals. printer PCB. Repair or replace if neces-
communication. sary.
Defective main Replace the main PCB or printer PCB and

PCB or printer check for correct operation.
PCB.
C0250 Network scanner PCB* communica- Poor contact in Check the connection of connector CN4 on
tion problem the connector ter- the main PCB and the connector on the
• There is no reply, in during regular minals. network scanner PCB. Repair or replace if
communication from network scanner necessary.
PCB to main PCB.
Defective main Replace the main PCB or network scanner
PCB or network PCB and check for correct operation.
scanner PCB.
*: Optional.
1-5-21
2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C0420 Side deck*1 communication problem Poor contact in Check the connection of connectors CN13
• An error code from the side deck is the connector ter- on the main PCB and CN3 on the side
detected eight times in succession. minals. deck main PCB, and the continuity across
No communication: there is no reply the connector terminals. Repair or replace
after 3 retries. if necessary.
Abnormal communication: a commu-
Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
nication error (parity or checksum er-
PCB. rect operation.
ror) is detected five times in succes-
sion. Defective side Replace the side deck main PCB and
deck main PCB. check for correct operation.
C0440 Finisher*2 communication problem Poor contact in Check the connection of connectors CN24
• An error code from the side deck is the connector ter- on the main PCB and CN2 on the finisher
detected eight times in succession. minals. main PCB, and the continuity across the
No communication: there is no reply connector terminals. Repair or replace if
after 3 retries. necessary.
Abnormal communication: a commu-
nication error (parity or checksum er-
ror) is detected five times in succes-
sion. Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PCB and check
main PCB. for correct operation.
C0610 Bitmap (DIMM) problem Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
• There is a problem with the data or PCB. rect operation.
address bus of the bitmap DRAM.
DIMM installed Check if the DIMM is inserted into the
incorrectly. socket on the main PCB correctly.
Defective DIMM. Replace the DIMM and check for correct

operation.
C0630 DMA problem Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
• DMA transmission of compressed, PCB. rect operation.
decompressed, rotated, relocated or
blanked-out image data does not
complete within the specified period
of time.

1-5-22
2BC/D-1
Remarks
Code Contents
C0640 Hard disk drive problem Poor contact of Check the connection of connectors CN2
• The hard disk drive cannot be ac- the hard disk drive on the main PCB and hard disk drive, and
cessed. connector termi- the continuity across the connector termi-
nals. nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective hard Run U906 (Resetting partial operation con-

disk drive. trol) to cancel partial operation control. Run
U024 (HDD formatting) without turning the
power off to initialize the hard disk.
Replace the hard disk drive and check for
correct operation if the problem is still de-
tected after initialization.
C1010 Upper lift motor problem [Drawer 1] Broken gears or Replace the upper lift motor.
• When the drawer 1 is inserted, the lift couplings of the
limit switch 1 does not turn on within upper lift motor.
5.5 s of the upper lift motor turning
Defective upper Check for continuity across the coil. If
on.
lift motor. none, replace the upper lift motor.
• During copying, the lift limit switch 1
does not turn on within 200 ms of the Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
upper lift motor turning on. the lift motor 1 tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
connector termi- repair or replace the cable.
nals.
Defective lift limit Check if CN 7-6 on the engine PCB goes

switch 1. low when the lift limit switch 1 is turned off.
If not, replace the lift limit switch 1.
Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-

the lift limit switch tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
1 connector termi- repair or replace the cable.
nals.
C1020 Lower lift motor problem [Drawer 2] Broken gears or Replace the lower lift motor.
• When the drawer 2 is inserted, the lift couplings of the
limit switch 2 does not turn on within lower lift motor.
5.5 s of the lower lift motor turning on.
Defective lower lift Check for continuity across the coil. If
• During copying, the lift limit switch 2
motor. none, replace the lower lift motor.
does not turn on within 200 ms of the
lower lift motor turning on. Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
the lower lift motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
nals.
Defective lift limit Check if CN7-22 on the engine PCB goes

switch 2. low when the lift limit switch 2 is turned off.
If not, replace the lift limit switch 2.

the lift limit switch tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
2 connector termi- repair or replace the cable.
nals.
1-5-23
2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C1100 Deck right lift motor problem Broken gears or Replace the deck right lift motor.
[Drawer 3] couplings of the
• When the drawer 3 is inserted, the deck right lift mo-
Deck lift limit switch 1 does not turn tor.
on within 33 s of the deck right lift mo-
Defective deck Check for continuity across the coil. If
tor turning on.
right lift motor. none, replace the deck right lift motor.
• During copying, the deck lift limit
switch 1 does not turn on within 200 Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
ms of the deck right lift motor turning the deck right lift tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
on. motor connector repair or replace the cable.
terminals.
Defective deck lift Check if CN8-2 on the engine PCB goes

limit switch 1. low when the deck right lift limit switch 1 is
turned off. If not, replace the deck lift limit
switch 1.

the deck lift limit tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
switch 1 connec- repair or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
C1110 Deck left lift motor problem Broken gears or Replace the deck left lift motor.
[Drawer 4] couplings of the
• When the drawer 4 is inserted, the deck left lift motor.
deck lift limit switch 2 does not turn on
Defective deck left Check for continuity across the coil. If
within 33 s of the deck left lift motor
lift motor. none, replace the deck left lift motor.
turning on.
• During copying, the deck lift limit Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
switch 2 does not turn on within 200 the deck left lift tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
ms of the deck left lift motor turning motor connector repair or replace the cable.
on. terminals.
Defective deck left Check if CN26-8 on the engine PCB goes

lift limit switch 2. low when the deck lift limit switch 2 is
turned off. If not, replace the deck lift limit
switch 2.

the deck lift limit tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
switch 2 connec- repair or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
1-5-24
2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C1140 Side deck* lift motor (going up) Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
problem the upper limit de- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• When the side deck’s right cover is tection switch remedy or replace the cable.
closed, the upper limit detection connector termi-
switch does not turn on within 17 s of nals.
the side deck lift motor turning on.
Defective upper Replace the upper limit detection switch.
• When the upper limit detection switch
limit detection
detects edge of turning off signal, the
switch.
upper limit detection switch does not
turn on within 200 ms of the side deck Defective side Replace the side deck main PCB.
lift motor turning on. deck main PCB.
C1150 Side deck* lift motor (going down) Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
problem the lower limit de- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• When the side deck’s right cover is tection switch remedy or replace the cable.
closed, the lower limit detection connector termi-
switch does not turn on within 17 s of nals.
the side deck lift motor turning on.
Defective lower Replace the lower limit detection switch.
• When the lower limit detection switch
limit detection
detects edge of turning off signal, the
switch.
lower limit detection switch does not
turn on within 200 ms of the side deck Defective side Replace the side deck main PCB.
lift motor turning on. deck main PCB.
Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-

C2000 Image formation motor problem the image forma- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 tion motor con- remedy or replace the cable.
s, 1 s after the drive motor has turned nector terminals.
on.
Defective image Replace the image formation motor.
formation motor
rotation control
circuit.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate

transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace
if any.
C2500 Paper feed motor problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• LOCK DRIVE signal remains high for the paper feed tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
1 s, 1 s after the paper feed motor motor connector remedy or replace the cable.
has turned on. terminals.
Defective paper Replace the paper feed motor.

feed motor rota-
tion control circuit.

if any.
*: Optional for 55 cpm copier only.

1-5-25
2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C2550 Paper conveying motor problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 the paper convey- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
s, 1 s after the paper conveying motor ing motor connec- remedy or replace the cable.
has turned on. tor terminals.
Defective paper Replace the paper conveying motor.

conveying motor
rotation control
circuit.

if any.
C2600 Deck drive motor problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 the deck drive tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
s, 1 s after the deck drive motor has motor connector remedy or replace the cable.
turned on. terminals.
Defective deck Replace the deck drive motor.

drive motor rota-
tion control circuit.

if any.
C2640 Side deck* drive motor problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• SDDM ALM signal remains high for 1 the side deck tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
s, 1 s after the side deck drive motor drive motor con- remedy or replace the cable.
has turned on. nector terminals.
Defective side Replace the side deck drive motor.

Scanner carriage problem
deck drive motor
rotation control
circuit.

if any.
*: Optional for 55 cpm copier only.

1-5-26
2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C3100 • The home position is not correct Poor contact of Check the connection of connector CN10
when the power is turned on or copy- the connector ter- on the engine PCB and the continuity
ing the document placed on the con- minals. across the connector terminals. Repair or
tact glass. replace if necessary.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner home position switch.

home position
switch.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB or scanner drive

PCB or scanner PCB and check for correct operation.
drive PCB.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner motor.

motor.
C3300 Optical system (AGC) problem Insufficient expo- Replace the exposure lamp or inverter
• After AGC, correct input is not ob- sure lamp lumi- PCB.
tained at CCD. nosity.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB and check for

PCB. correct operation.
Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass

position. (shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position sensor.
CCD PCB output Replace the ISU.

problem.
C4000 Polygon motor synchronization Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
problem the polygon motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The polygon motor does not reach connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
the stable speed within 9 s of the nals.
START signal turning on.
Defective polygon Replace the LSU.
motor.
Defective power Check if 24 V DC is supplied to CN1-4 on

source PCB. the main PCB. If not, replace the power
source PCB.
Defective engine Check if 24 V DC is output from CN14-14

PCB. on the engine PCB. If not, replace the main
PCB.
C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• The polygon motor rotation is not the polygon motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
stable for 600 ms after the polygon connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
motor rotation has been stabilized. nals.
BD steady-state problem
motor.
Defective power Check if 24 V DC is supplied to CN1-4 on

source PCB. the main PCB. If not, replace the power
source PCB.
Defective engine Check if 24 V DC is output from CN14-14

PCB. on the engine PCB. If not, replace the main
PCB.
1-5-27
2BC/D-1
Remarks
Code Contents
C4100 BD initialization (A) problem Defective laser Replace the LSU.
When power is turned on, only laser A scanner unit.
is output and MIP detects a BD error for
600 ms.
C4110 BD initialization (B) problem Defective laser Replace the LSU.
When power is turned on, only laser B scanner unit.
is output and MIP detects a BD error for
600 ms.
C4200 • The VTC detects a BD error for 600 Defective laser Replace the LSU.
ms after the polygon motor rotation diode.
has been stabilized.
motor.
C5100 Main charger problem Leakage during Check and clean the main charger unit.
MC ALM signal is detected continu- main charging.
ously for 400 ms when MC REM signal
Defective high Replace the high voltage transformer PCB
is turned on.
voltage trans- and check for correct operation.
former PCB.
C5110 Transfer/separation charger problem Leakage during Check and clean the transfer charger unit.
SC/TC ALM signal is detected continu- transfer/separa-
ously for 400 ms when SC/TC REM tion charging.
signal is turned on.
former PCB.
C5300 Eraser problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
After completion of potential adjustment the image forma- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
(automatic adjustment), the drum sur- tion unit connector repair or replace the cable.
face potential is 400 V or more. terminals.
the eraser lamp tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
nals.
Defective eraser Replace the eraser lamp.
lamp.
1-5-28
2BC/D-1
Remarks
Code Contents
C5500 Drum surface potential sensor prob- Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
lem 1 the drum surface tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
Drum surface potential sensor output potential sensor repair or replace the cable.
voltage is 0.5 V or less when MC REM connector termi-
signal is turn on. (except during step- nals.
ping control)
Defective drum Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
surface potential
sensor.


former PCB.
C5510 Drum surface potential sensor prob- Defective drum Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
lem 2 surface potential
Drum surface potential sensor output sensor.
voltage is 4.5 V or less when MC REM
signal is turn on. (except during step-
ping control)
C5600 Drum surface potential problem 1 Deteriorated main Check the main charger wire and replace it
• Maximizing the grid output cannot set charger. if necessary.
the potential.
Grid or main Clean the grid or main charger shield if
charger shield is necessary.
dirty.

former PCB.

1-5-28-1
1-5-29
2BC/D-1

2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C5610 Drum surface potential problem 2 Defective high Replace the high voltage transformer PCB
• Minimizing the grid output cannot set voltage trans- and check for correct operation.
the potential. former PCB.
C6000 Broken fixing heater wire Poor contact in Check the connection of connector CN25
• The fixing temperature does not in- the fixing unit on the engine PCB and the continuity
crease for 40 s after the fixing heaters thermistor con- across the connector terminals. Repair or
have been turned on for warming up. nector terminals. replace if necessary.
• The fixing temperature remains below
Fixing unit ther- Check and reinstall if necessary.
50°C/122°F for 10 s continuously af-
mistor installed
ter the fixing heaters have been
incorrectly.
turned on during stabilization.
Fixing unit ther- Check for continuity. If none, replace the
mostat triggered. fixing unit thermostat.
Fixing heater M Check and reinstall if necessary.

and S installed
incorrectly.
Broken fixing Check for continuity. If none, replace the

heater M and S fixing heater M and S.
wire.
C6020 Abnormally high fixing unit ther- Shorted fixing unit Measure the resistance. If it is 0 Ω, replace
mistor temperature thermistor. the fixing unit thermistor.
• The fixing temperature exceeds
Broken fixing Replace the power source PCB and check
220°C/446 °F for 10 s.
heater control cir- for correct operation.
• The fixing unit temperature detection
cuit on the power
circuit on the engine PCB detects and
source PCB.
abnormally high temperature.
C6030 Broken fixing unit thermistor Poor contact in Check the connection of connector CN25
• The fixing temperature remains at the fixing unit on the engine PCB and the continuity
0°C/32°F for 30 s continuously when thermistor con- across the connector terminals. Repair or
the fixing heater is on. nector terminals. replace if necessary.
Broken fixing unit Check and reinstall if necessary.

thermistor.
C6050 Abnormally low fixing unit ther- Poor contact in Check the connection of connector CN25
mistor temperature the fixing unit on the engine PCB and the continuity
• The fixing temperature remains below thermistor con- across the connector terminals. Repair or
120°C/248°F for 10 s. nector terminals. replace if necessary.
Broken fixing unit Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replace

thermistor wire. the fixing unit thermistor.
Fixing unit ther- Check and reinstall if necessary.

mistor installed
incorrectly.
Fixing unit ther- Check for continuity. If none, replace the

mostat triggered. fixing unit thermostat.
Fixing heater M Check and reinstall if necessary.

and S installed
incorrectly.
Broken fixing Check for continuity. If none, replace the

heater M and S fixing heater M and S.
wire.
1-5-31
1-5-29
2BC/D
Remarks
Code Contents
C6400 Zero-crossing signal problem Poor contact in Check the connection of connectors CN17
• The main PCB does not detect the the connector ter- on the main PCB and CN2 on the power
zero-crossing signal (Z CROSS SIG) minals. source PCB, and the continuity across the
for the time specified below. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
At power-on: 3 s necessary.
Others: 5 s
Defective power Check if the zero-crossing signal is output
source PCB. from CN2-7 on the power source PCB. If
not, replace the power source PCB.
Defective main Replace the main PCB if C6400 is de-

PCB. tected while CN2-7 on the power source
PCB outputs the zero-crossing signal.
C7100 Toner sensor problem Defective toner Replace the toner sensor.
• The toner sensor output voltage is sensor.
outside the range of 0.5 to 4.5 V dur-
ing copying or in maintenance item
the toner sensor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
U130.
connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
• The toner sensor control voltage can-
nals.
not be set within the range in mainte-
nance item U130. Defective devel- Replace the developer.
oper.
C7300 Toner hopper problem Defective toner Replace the toner level detection sensor.
• Toner level is not detected when level detection
toner empty is detected. sensor.

the toner level de- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
tection sensor remedy or replace the cable.
connector termi-
nals.
C7800 Broken external temperature ther- Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
mistor the humidity sen- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The input voltage is 4.5 V or more. sor PCB connec- remedy or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
Defective external Replace the humidity sensor PCB and

temperature ther- check for correct operation.
mistor.
C7810 Short-circuited external temperature Defective external Replace the humidity sensor PCB and
thermistor temperature ther- check for correct operation.
• The input voltage is 0.5 V or less. mistor.
Defective humidity Replace the humidity sensor PCB and

sensor PCB. check for correct operation.
1-5-32
1-5-30
2BC/D
1-5-3 Image formation problems

(1) No image appears (2) No image appears (3) Image is too light. (4) Background is visible.
(entirely white). (entirely black).
See page 1-5-33 See page 1-5-33 See page 1-5-34 See page 1-5-34
(5) A white line appears (6) A black line appears (7) A black line appears (8) One side of the copy
longitudinally. longitudinally. laterally. image is darker than
the other.
(9) Black dots appear on (10) Image is blurred. (11) The leading edge of the (12) The leading edge of the
the image. image is consistently image is sporadically
misaligned with the misaligned with the
original. original.
(13) Paper creases. (14) Offset occurs. (15) Image is partly missing. (16) Fixing is poor.
(17) Image is out of focus. (18) Image center does not (19) Image is not square. (20) Image contrast is low
align with the original (carrier scattering).
center.
1-5-31
2BC/D-1
(21) There is a regular error (22) There is a regular error (23)There is a regular error (24) When the duplex unit is
between the centers of between the leading between the trailing used, the center of the
the original and copy edges of the original edges of the original original image and that
image when the DF is and copy image when and copy image when of the copy image do
used. the DF is used. the DF is used. not align.
(25) Toner scatters at the

leading edge of the im-
age.
See page 1-5-40-1
1-5-32
2BC/D-1
(1) No image appears Causes

(entirely white). 1. No transfer charging.

1. No transfer charging.
A. Broken transfer charger wire. Replace the transfer charger wire.
B. The connector terminals of the high voltage Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
transformer PCB make poor contact. connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
C. Defective engine PCB. Check if CN12-3 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenance
item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.
D. Defective high voltage transformer PCB. Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-7 on the high
voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 is
run. If not, replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
(2) No image appears Causes

(entirely black). 1. No main charging.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

1. No main charging.
A. Broken main charger wire. Replace the main charger wire.
B. Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
C. The connector terminals of the high voltage Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
transformer PCB make poor contact. connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
D. Defective engine PCB. Check if CN12-12 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenance
E. Defective high voltage transformer PCB. Check if main charging takes place when CN1-12 on the high
voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is
run. If not, replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
A. The connector terminals of the exposure Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
lamp make poor contact. connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
B. Defective inverter PCB. Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1-5 and 1-6 on the
inverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,
replace the inverter PCB.
1-5-33
2BC/D
(3) Image is too Causes

light. 1. Insufficient toner.
2. Deteriorated developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.

1. Insufficient toner. If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment,
replace the cartridge.
2. Deteriorated developer. Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If it
has reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum. Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level has been reached,
replace the drum (see page 1-6-42).
(4) Background is visible. Causes

1. Deteriorated developer.

1. Deteriorated developer. Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If it
has reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
(5) A white line appears Causes

longitudinally. 1. Dirty or flawed transfer charger wire.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section.
3. Flawed drum.
4. Dirty shading plate.

1. Dirty or flawed transfer charger wire. Clean the transfer charger wire or, if it is flawed, replace it.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section. Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. If not, replace the
developer.
3. Flawed drum. Replace the drum (see page 1-6-42).
4. Dirty shading plate. Clean the shading plate.
1-5-34
2BC/D
(6) A black line appears Causes

longitudinally. 1. Dirty contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
4. Dirty scanner mirror.

1. Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-42).
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-52).
4. Dirty scanner mirror. Clean the scanner mirror.
(7) A black line ap- Causes

pears laterally. 1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.

2. Dirty developing section. Clean any part contaminated with toner or carrier in the developing
section.
3. Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
(8) One side of the Causes

copy image is 1. Dirty main charger wire.
darker than the 2. Defective exposure lamp.
other.

1. Dirty main charger wire. Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.
2. Defective exposure lamp. Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replace
the exposure lamp (see page 1-6-21).
1-5-35
2BC/D
(9) Black dots appear Causes

on the image. 1. Dirty or flawed drum.
2. Dirty contact glass.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

1. Dirty or flawed drum. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-42).
2. Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-52).
(10) Image is blurred. Causes

1. Scanner moves erratically.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.

1. Scanner moves erratically. Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner
rails. If any, remove it.
2. Deformed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-59).
3. Paper conveying section drive problem. Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.
(11) The leading edge of Causes

the image is consis- 1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
tently misaligned with
the original.

1. Misadjusted leading edge registration. Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-15).
1-5-36
2BC/D
(12) The leading edge of Causes

the image is sporadi- 1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch
cally misaligned with or paper feed clutch 1/2/3/4 installed or
the original. operating incorrectly.

1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch Check the installation position and operation of the registration
or paper feed clutch 1/2/3/4 installed clutch, bypass paper feed clutch and paper feed clutch 1/2/3/4. If any
or operating incorrectly. of them operates incorrectly, replace it.
(13) Paper creases. Causes

1. Paper curled.
2. Paper damp.
3. Defective pressure springs.

1. Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
3. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
(14) Offset occurs. Causes

1. Defective cleaning blade.

1. Defective cleaning blade. Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-52).
1-5-37
2BC/D-1
(15) Image is partly miss- Causes

ing. 1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
3. Drum condensation.
4. Flawed drum.

1. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper creased. Replace the paper.
3. Drum condensation. Clean the drum.
(16) Fixing is poor. Causes

1. Wrong paper.
2. Defective pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller.
4. Proper paper type is not set.

1. Wrong paper. Check if the paper meets specifications.
2. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-59).
4. Proper paper type is not set. Set the paper type. (Refer to page 1-4-6.)
(17) Image is out of fo- Causes

cus. 1. Defective image scanning unit.

1. Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-30).
(18) Image center does not Causes

align with the original 1. Misadjusted image center line.
center. 2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
3. Original placed incorrectly.

1. Misadjusted image center line. Readjust the image center line (see page 1-6-17).
2. Misadjusted scanner center line. Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-37).
3. Original placed incorrectly. Place the original correctly.
1-5-38
2BC/D
(19) Image is not Causes

square. 1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.
2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.

1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly. Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit
(see page 1-6-32).
2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly. Adjust the installation position of the image scanning unit
(see page 1-6-33).
(20) Image contrast is Causes

low (carrier scatter- 1. No developing bias output.
ing).

1. No developing bias output.
A. Developing bias wire makes poor contact. Check the developing bias wire. If there are any problems, replace it.
B. Defective engine PCB. Check if CN12-9 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenance
C. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB. Check if developing bias is output when there is no problem with the
main PCB while maintenance item U030 is run. If not, replace the
high voltage transformer PCB.
(21) There is a regular Causes

error between the 1. Misadjusted DF center line.
centers of the
original and copy
image when the DF
is used.

1. Misadjusted DF center line. Readjust the DF center line (see page 1-6-69).
1-5-39
2BC/D-1

error between the 1. Misadjusted DF original scanning start
leading edges of position.
the original and
copy image when
the DF is used.

1. Misadjusted DF original scanning start Readjust the DF original scanning start position (see page 1-6-70).
position.

error between the 1. Misadjusted DF original scanning end
trailing edges of the position.
original and copy
image when the DF
is used.

1. Misadjusted DF original scanning end Readjust the DF original scanning end position (see page 1-6-71).
position.
(24) When the duplex Causes

unit is used, the 1. Side registration section installed incorrectly.
center of the
original image and
that of the copy
image do not align.

1. Side registration section installed incorrectly. Adjust the installation position of the side registration section.
1-5-40
2BC/D-1
(25) Toner scatters at Causes

the leading edge of 1. Registration cleaner brush or lower
the image. registration cleaner soiled with paper powder.

1. Registration cleaner brush or lower registra- Vacuum clean the paper powder from the registration cleaner brush
tion cleaner soiled with paper powder. or lower registration cleaner .
1-5-40-1
1-5-41
2BC/D-1
1-5-42
2BC/D
1-5-4 Electrical problems

• Copier
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1) No electricity at the power Measure the input voltage.
The machine does outlet.
not operate when
The power cord is not Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
the main switch is
plugged in properly.
turned on.
The front and/or right Check the front and right covers.
cover are/is not closed
completely.
Broken power cord. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
Defective main switch. Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the
main switch.
Blown fuse in the power Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing and
source PCB. replace the fuse.
Defective safety switch 1 Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If none,
or 2. replace the switch.
Defective power source With AC present, check for 5 V DC at CN5-12 on the power
PCB. source PCB and 24 V DC at CN1-2. If none, replace the power
source PCB.
(2) Poor contact in the image Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The image forma- formation motor connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tion motor does not terminals.
operate (C2000).
Broken image formation Check visually and replace the image formation motor if neces-
motor gear. sary.
Defective image formation Run maintenance item U030 and check if the image formation
motor. motor operates when CN15-A3 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the image formation motor.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN15-A3 on the en-
gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
(3) Poor contact in the paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Paper feed motor feed motor connector ter- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not operate minals.
(C2500).
Broken paper feed motor Check visually and replace the paper feed motor if necessary.
gear.
Defective paper feed mo- Run maintenance item U030 and check if the paper feed motor
tor. operates when CN16-5 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, re-
place the paper feed motor.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN16-5 on the engine
PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
1-5-41
2BC/D

(4) Poor contact in the paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The paper convey- conveying motor connec- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
ing motor does not tor terminals.
operate (C2550).
Broken paper conveying Check visually and replace the paper conveying motor if neces-
motor gear. sary.
Defective paper conveying Run maintenance item U030 and check if the paper conveying
motor. motor operates when CN15-B3 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the paper conveying motor.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN15-B3 on the en-
(5) Poor contact in the deck Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The deck drive mo- drive motor connector ter- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor does not operate minals.
(C2600).
Broken deck drive motor Check visually and replace the deck drive motor if necessary.
gear.
Defective deck drive mo- Run maintenance item U030 and check if the deck drive motor
tor. operates when CN16-6 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, re-
place the deck drive motor.
(6) Poor contact in the scan- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The scanner motor ner motor connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not operate. nals.
Defective scanner motor. Run maintenance item U073 and check if the scanner motor op-
erates when the motor drive coil energization pulse signals are
output at CN2-1, CN2-3, CN2-4 and CN2-6 on the scanner drive
PCB. If not, replace the scanner motor.
Defective scanner drive Run maintenance item U073 and check if the scanner motor op-
PCB. erates when CN1-10, CN1-11 and CN1-12 go low. If not, replace
the scanner drive PCB.
(7) Broken paper conveying Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paper
The paper convey- fan motor coil. conveying fan motor.
ing fan motor does
Poor contact in the paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
not operate.
conveying fan motor connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nector terminals.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U037 and check if CN3-B4 on the engine
(8) Broken image formation Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the image
The image forma- fan motor coil. formation fan motor.
tion fan motor does
Poor contact in the image Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
not operate.
formation fan motor connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nector terminals.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U037 and check if CN14-12 on the en-
1-5-42
2BC/D

(9) Broken cooling fan motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the cooling
The cooling fan mo- coil. fan motor.
tor does not oper-
Poor contact in the cooling Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
ate.
fan motor connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
(10) Broken fixing fan motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the fixing
The fixing fan motor coil. fan motor.
does not operate.
Poor contact in the fixing Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nals.
(11) Broken eject fan motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace eject fan
Eject fan motor 1 coil. motor 1.
does not operate.
Poor contact in eject fan Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
motor 1 connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
(12) Broken eject fan motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace eject fan
Eject fan motor 2 coil. motor 2.
does not operate.
Poor contact in eject fan Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
motor 2 connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
(13) Broken HDD fan motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the HDD
The HDD fan motor coil. fan motor.
does not operate.
Poor contact in the HDD Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nals.
(14) Broken power supply fan Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the power
The power supply motor coil. supply fan motor.
fan motor does not
Poor contact in the power Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
operate.
supply fan motor connec- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
(15) Broken upper lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the upper
The upper lift motor coil. lift motor.
does not operate
Poor contact in the upper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
(C1010).
lift motor connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
Defective engine PCB. Check if 24 V DC is output across CN17-5 on the engine PCB
right after drawer 1 is installed. If not, replace the engine PCB.
(16) Broken lower lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the lower lift
The lower lift motor coil. motor.
does not operate
Poor contact in the lower Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
(C1020).
lift motor connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
1-5-43
2BC/D

(17) Broken deck right lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deck
The deck right lift coil. right lift motor.
motor does not op-
Poor contact in the deck Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
erate (C1100).
right lift motor connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
terminals.
(18) Broken deck left lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deck left
The deck left lift mo- coil. lift motor.
tor does not operate
(C1110).
left lift motor connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
terminals.
(19) Broken toner feed motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the toner
The toner feed mo- coil. feed motor.
tor does not oper-
Poor contact in the toner Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
ate.
feed motor connector ter- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
minals.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U135 and check if drive pulse signal is
output across CN4-1 and CN4-2 on the engine PCB. If not, re-
place the engine PCB.
(20) Broken main charger Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the main
The main charger cleaning motor coil. charger cleaning motor.
cleaning motor does
Poor contact in the main Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
not operate.
charger cleaning motor nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
connector terminals.
(21) Broken toner agitation mo- Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the toner
The toner agitation tor coil. agitation motor.
motor does not op-
Poor contact in the toner Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
erate.
agitation motor connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
terminals.
(22) Broken transfer charger Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the transfer
The transfer charger cleaning motor coil. charger cleaning motor.
cleaning motor does
Poor contact in the trans- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
not operate.
fer charger cleaning motor nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(23) Broken registration clutch Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the registra-
The registration coil. tion clutch.
clutch does not op-
Poor contact in the regis- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
erate.
tration clutch connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
terminals.
1-5-44
2BC/D

(24) Broken feed low clutch 1 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed low
Feed low clutch 1 coil. clutch 1.
does not operate.
Poor contact in feed low Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
clutch 1 connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
(25) Broken feed high clutch 1 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed high
Feed high clutch 1 coil. clutch 1.
does not operate.
Poor contact in feed high Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nals.
(26) Broken feed low clutch 2 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed low
Feed low clutch 2 coil. clutch 2.
does not operate.
Poor contact in feed low Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nals.
(27) Broken feed high clutch 2 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed high
Feed high clutch 2 coil. clutch 2.
does not operate.
Poor contact in feed high Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nals.
(28) Broken feed clutch 3 coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed clutch
Feed clutch 3 does 3.
not operate.
Poor contact in feed clutch Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
3 connector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
not operate.
not operate.
1-5-45
2BC/D

(31) Broken paper feed clutch 1 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feed
Paper feed clutch 1 coil. clutch 1.
does not operate.
Poor contact in paper feed Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nals.
does not operate.
nals.
does not operate.
nals.
does not operate.
nals.
(35) Broken bypass paper feed Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypass
The bypass paper clutch coil. paper feed clutch.
feed clutch does not
Poor contact in the bypass Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
operate.
paper feed clutch connec- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN9-B5 on the engine
(36) Broken duplex forwarding Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplex
The duplex forward- clutch coil. forwarding clutch.
ing clutch does not
Poor contact in the duplex Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
operate.
forwarding clutch connec- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
1-5-46
2BC/D

(37) Broken duplex reversing Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplex
The duplex revers- clutch coil. reversing clutch.
ing clutch does not
operate.
reversing clutch connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
terminals.
(38) Broken deck feed clutch Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deck
The deck feed coil. feed clutch.
clutch does not op-
erate.
feed clutch connector ter- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
minals.
(39) Broken bypass solenoid Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypass
The bypass sole- coil. solenoid.
noid does not oper-
ate.
solenoid connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
(40) Broken duplex eject Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplex
The duplex eject switching solenoid coil. eject switching solenoid.
switching solenoid
does not operate.
eject switching solenoid nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN6-7 and CN6-8 on
the engine PCB go low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
(41) Broken duplex pressure Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplex
The duplex pressure release solenoid coil. pressure release solenoid.
release solenoid
does not operate.
pressure release solenoid nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN6-9 and CN6-10 on
the engine PCB go low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
(42) Broken feedshift solenoid Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the feedshift
The feedshift sole- coil. solenoid.
noid does not oper-
Poor contact in the Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
ate.
feedshift solenoid connec- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN3-A7 and CN3-A8
on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
1-5-47
2BC/D

(43) Broken fixing web solenoid Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the fixing
The fixing web sole- coil. web solenoid.
noid does not oper-
Poor contact in the fixing Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
ate.
web solenoid connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
terminals.
(44) Poor contact in the clean- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The cleaning lamp ing lamp connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not turn on. nals.
Defective cleaning lamp. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.
Defective engine PCB. If the cleaning lamp turns on when CN4-11 on the engine PCB is
held low, replace the engine PCB.
(45) Poor contact in the expo- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The exposure lamp sure lamp connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not turn on. nals.
Defective inverter PCB. If the exposure lamp turn on when CN1-5 and CN1-6 on the in-
verter PCB are held low, replace the inverter PCB.
Defective scanner drive If the exposure lamp turn on when CN3-1 and CN3-2 on the
PCB. scanner motor PCB are held low, replace the scanner drive
PCB.
(46) Defective inverter PCB. If the exposure lamp does not turn off with CN1-5 and CN1-6 on
The exposure lamp the inverter PCB high, replace the inverter PCB.
does not turn off.
Defective scanner drive If CN3-1 and CN3-2 on the scanner motor PCB are always low,
PCB. replace the scanner drive PCB.
(47) Broken wire in fixing Check for continuity across each heater. If none, replace the
Fixing heater M or S heater M or S. heater (see page 1-6-55).
does not turn on
Fixing unit thermostat trig- Check for continuity across thermostat. If none, remove the
(C6000).
gered. cause and replace the thermostat.
(48) Dirty sensor part of the Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.
Fixing heater M or S fixing unit thermistor.
does not turn off.
Defective engine PCB. If fixing heater M/S stays on while CN2-5 and CN2-6 on the en-
gine PCB go high, replace the engine PCB.
(49) Broken main charger wire. See page 1-5-33.

Main charging is not
Leaking main charger
performed (C5100).
housing.
Poor contact in the high

voltage transformer PCB
Defective engine PCB.
Defective high voltage

transformer PCB.
1-5-48
2BC/D

(50) Broken transfer charger See page 1-5-33.
Transfer charging is wire.
not performed
Poor contact in the high
(C5110).
voltage transformer PCB
Defective engine PCB.
Defective high voltage

transformer PCB.
(51) Broken separation charger Replace the separation charger wire (see page 1-6-48).
Separation charging wire.
is not performed
Poor contact in the high Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
(C5110).
voltage transformer PCB nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(52) Poor contact in the devel- Check the developing bias wire. If there is any problem, replace
No developing bias oping bias wire. it.
is output.
Poor contact in the high Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
voltage transformer PCB nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective high voltage Check if the developing bias is output when CN1-9 on the high
transformer PCB. voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U030
is run. If not, replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
Defective engine PCB. Check if CN12-9 on the engine PCB goes low during copying. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
(53) Defective original detec- If the level of CN5-2 on the scanner drive PCB does not change
The original size is tion switch. when the original detection switch is turned on and off, replace
not detected. the original detection switch.
(54) Original is not placed cor- Check the original and correct if necessary.
The original size is rectly.
not detected
Poor contact in the original Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
correctly.
size detection sensors nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective original size de- Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it or, if neces-
tection sensor or the scan- sary, the scanner drive PCB.
ner drive PCB.
(55) Poor contact in the touch Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The touch panel panel connector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
keys do not work.
Defective touch panel or If any keys do not work after the touch panel has been initial-
operation unit PCB. ized, replace the touch panel or operation unit main PCB.
1-5-49
2BC/D

(56) Poor contact in paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message re- switch 1 connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
questing paper to be nals.
loaded is shown
Defective paper switch 1. Check if CN7-9 on the engine PCB goes low when paper switch
when paper is
1 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN7-10 on the engine
present in drawer 1.
PCB. If not, replace paper switch 1.
(57) Poor contact in paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
loaded is shown
Defective paper switch 2. Check if CN7-25 on the engine PCB goes low when paper
when paper is
switch 2 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN7-26 on the en-
gine PCB. If not, replace paper switch 2.
(58) Poor contact in deck paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
loaded is shown
Defective deck paper Check if CN8-5 on the engine PCB goes low when deck paper
when paper is
switch 1. switch 1 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN8-6 on the en-
gine PCB. If not, replace deck paper switch 1.
(59) Poor contact in deck paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
loaded is shown
Defective deck paper Check if CN26-17 on the engine PCB goes low when deck pa-
when paper is
switch 2. per switch 2 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN26-18 on the
engine PCB. If not, replace deck paper switch 2.
(60) Poor contact in the bypass Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message re- paper switch connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
questing paper to be terminals.
loaded is shown
Defective bypass paper Check if CN9-B8 on the engine PCB goes low when the bypass
when paper is
switch. paper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN9-B9 on the
present on the by-
engine PCB. If not, replace the bypass paper switch.
pass table.
(61) Poor contact in the upper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The size of paper in paper length switch connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
drawer 1 is not dis- nector terminals.
played correctly.
Defective upper paper Check if CN7-14 on the engine PCB goes low when the upper
length switch. paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the upper paper
length switch.
Poor contact in the upper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
paper width switch connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nector terminals.
Defective upper paper Check if the levels of CN7-1, CN7-2 and CN7-3 on the engine
width switch. PCB change alternately when the width guide in drawer 1 is
moved. If not, replace the upper paper width switch.
1-5-50
2BC/D

(62) Poor contact in the lower Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The size of paper in paper length switch connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
drawer 2 is not dis- nector terminals.
played correctly.
Defective lower paper Check if CN7-16 on the engine PCB goes low when the lower
length switch. paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the lower paper
length switch.
Poor contact in the lower Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
nector terminals.
Defective lower paper Check if the levels of CN7-17, CN7-18 and CN7-19 on the en-
width switch. gine PCB change alternately when the width guide in drawer 2
is moved. If not, replace the lower paper width switch.
(63) Poor contact in the bypass Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The size of paper on paper length switch connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
the bypass table is nector terminals.
not displayed cor-
Defective bypass paper Check if CN9-A2 on the engine PCB goes low when the bypass
rectly.
length switch. paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the bypass pa-
per length switch.
nector terminals.
Defective bypass paper Check if the levels of CN9-A6, CN9-A7 and CN9-A8 on the en-
width switch. gine PCB change alternately when the insert guide on the by-
pass table is moved. If not, replace the bypass paper width
switch.
1-5-51
2BC/D

(64) A piece of paper torn from Check and remove if any.
A paper jam in the copy paper is caught
paper feed, paper around paper feed switch
conveying or fixing 1/2/3/4/5/6, registration
section is indicated switch, feedshift switch or
on the touch panel eject switch.
immediately after
the main switch is
switch 1. and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
turned on.
Defective registration Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on
switch. and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
Defective feedshift switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on
and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
(65) Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message re- nector terminals of safety nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
questing covers to switch 1 or 2.
be closed is dis-
Defective safety switch 1 Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuity
played when the
or 2. when the switch is on, replace it.
front and right cov-
ers are closed.
(66) Wiring is broken, shorted Check for continuity. If none, repair.

Others. or makes poor contact.
Noise. Locate the source of noise and remove.
1-5-52
2BC/D
• DF
(1) Defective original feed mo- Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
The original feed tor coil. feed motor.
motor does not
The connector terminals of Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
operate.
the original feed motor nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
make poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check for continuity across the original feed motor coil and con-
nector terminals. If good, replace the DF driver PCB.
(2) Defective original convey- Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
The original conveying motor coil. conveying motor.
ing motor does not
operate.
the original conveying mo- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor make poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check for continuity across the original conveying motor coil and
connector terminals. If good, replace the DF driver PCB.
(3) Defective original feed so- Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
The original feed lenoid coil. feed solenoid.
solenoid does not
operate.
the original feed solenoid nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
make poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check if the original feed solenoid operates when CN5-B13 or
CN5-B12 on the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF
driver PCB.
(4) Defective switchback Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the switch-
The switchback feedshift solenoid coil. back feedshift solenoid.
feedshift solenoid
does not operate.
the switchback feedshift nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
solenoid make poor con-
tact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check if the switchback feedshift solenoid operates when CN5-
B8 on the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF driver
PCB.
(5) Defective eject feedshift Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the eject
The eject feedshift solenoid coil. feedshift solenoid.
solenoid does not
operate.
the eject feedshift solenoid nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
make poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check if the eject feedshift solenoid operates when CN5-A7 on
the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF driver PCB.
(6) Defective switchback pres- Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the switch-
The switchback sure solenoid coil. back pressure solenoid.
pressure solenoid
does not operate.
the switchback pressure nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
solenoid make poor con-
tact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check if the switchback pressure solenoid operates when CN5-
A2 or CN5-A3 on the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the
DF driver PCB.
1-5-53
2BC/D

(7) Defective original feed Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
The original feed clutch coil. feed clutch.
clutch does not
operate.
the original feed clutch nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
make poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB. Check if the original feed clutch operates when CN5-A5 on the
DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF driver PCB.
(8) The connector terminals of Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
A message indicat- DF safety switch 1 make nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
ing cover open is poor contact.
displayed when the
Defective DF safety switch Check for continuity across the contacts of the switch. If none
DF is closed cor-
1. when the switch is on, replace DF safety switch 1.
rectly.
(9) A piece of paper torn from Remove any found.

An original jams an original is caught
when the main around the original feed
switch is turned on. switch.
reverse.

around the original switch-
back switch.
Defective original switch- Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback
back switch. switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback
switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch

around the DF timing
switch.
reverse.
The surface facing the DF Check if the projection at the center of the conveying cover that
timing switch is soiled. is facing the DF timing switch is soiled with paper powder. If so,
clean it.
1-5-54
2BC/D
1-5-5 Mechanical problems

• Copier
(1) Check if the surfaces of the following rollers Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary paper feed. or pulleys are dirty with paper powder: for-
warding pulleys, upper/lower paper feed pul-
leys, upper/lower feed rollers, vertical paper
conveying rollers A/B/C/D/E, feed pulleys,
bypass forwarding roller and bypass upper/
lower paper feed pulleys.
Check if the upper or lower paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed
ley or forwarding pulley is deformed. pulleys (see page 1-6-3).
Electrical problem with the following electro- See pages 1-5-45, 46, and 47.
magnetic clutches: paper feed clutches 1/2/
3/4, feed low clutches 1/2, feed high
clutches 1/2, feed clutches 3/4/5, deck feed
clutch and bypass paper feed clutch.
(2) Check if the surfaces of the upper and lower Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No secondary paper registration rollers are dirty with paper pow-
feed. der.
Electrical problem with the registration See page 1-5-44.

clutch.
(3) Width guide in a cassette installed incor- Check the width guide visually and correct
Skewed paper feed. rectly. or replace if necessary.
Deformed width guide in a cassette. Repair or replace if necessary .
Check if a pressure spring along the paper Repair or replace.

conveying path is deformed or out of place.
(4) Check if the scanner wire is loose. Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-6-
The scanner does not 22).
travel.
The scanner motor malfunctions. See page 1-5-42.
(5) Check if the lower paper feed pulley is worn. Replace the lower paper feed pulley if it is
Multiple sheets of paper worn (see page 1-6-3).
are fed at one time.
Check if the paper is curled. Change the paper.
(6) Check if the surfaces of the following rollers Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No refeed. are dirty with paper powder: duplex upper/
lower registration rollers, duplex upper/lower
conveying rollers and duplex upper/lower
eject rollers.
(7) Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.

Paper jams.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying Repair or replace if necessary.
path.
Check if the contact between the upper and Check visually and remedy if necessary.
lower registration rollers is correct.
Check if the contact between the upper and Check visually and remedy if necessary.
lower feed rollers is correct.
Check if the fixing unit upper or lower guide Repair or replace if necessary.
is deformed.
1-5-55
2BC/D

(7) Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or Clean or replace the press roller.
Paper jams. deformed.
Check if the contact between the heat roller Repair if any springs are off the separation
and its separation claws is correct. claws.
Check if the contact between the eject roller Check visually and remedy if necessary.
and pulley is correct.
The feedshift solenoid malfunctions. See page 1-5-47.
Check if the contact between the feedshift Check visually and remedy if necessary.
lower roller and feedshift pulley is correct.
(8) Check if the developing unit is extremely Clean the developing unit.
Toner drops on the pa- dirty.
per conveying path.
(9) Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears oper- Grease the bearings and gears.
Abnormal noise is ate smoothly.
heard.
Check if the following electromagnetic Correct.
clutches are installed correctly: paper feed
clutches 1/2/3/4, feed low clutches 1/2, feed
high clutches 1/2, feed clutches 3/4/5, deck
feed clutch and bypass paper feed clutch.
1-5-56
2BC/D
• DF
(1) The surfaces of the DF forwarding pulleys, Check and clean them with isopropyl alco-
No primary original DF original feed pulley or DF separation pul- hol if they are dirty.
feed. ley are dirty with paper powder.
Check if the DF original feed pulley or the If so, replace (see page 1-6-67).
DF forwarding pulley is deformed.
Electrical problem with the following clutch See pages 1-5-53 and 54.
or solenoid:
• Original feed solenoid
• Original feed clutch
(2) The DF registration pulley and the DF regis- Check visually and remedy if necessary.
No secondary original tration roller do not contact each other cor-
feed. rectly.
(3) Originals outside the specifications are used. Use only originals conforming to the speci-
Originals jam. fications.
The surfaces of the DF forwarding pulleys, Check and clean them with isopropyl alco-
DF original feed pulley or DF separation pul- hol if they are dirty.
ley are dirty with paper powder.
The DF original feed pulley and the DF Check visually and remedy if necessary.
separation pulley do not contact each other
correctly.
1-5-57
2BC/D
1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.
• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.
• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
• Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be
seriously damaged.
• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
* Capable of measuring RMS values.
• Prepare the following as test originals:
NTC (new test chart)
1-6-1
2BC/D
(2) Running a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the cursor up/down keys
The maintenance item is
or numeric keys.
selected.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter “001” using the cursor

up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
1-6-2
2BC/D
1-6-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, upper paper feed and lower paper feed pulleys
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys.
(1-1) Detaching and refitting the pulleys of drawers 1, 2, and 3
Procedure
• Removing the primary paper feed unit
1. Remove the screw holding the developing
duct cover and disconnect the connector, and
then remove the cover.
Connector
Developing duct cover
Figure 1-6-1
2. Remove the six screws holding the middle Middle right cover
right cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-2
3. Lift the right cover and remove it from the
main unit of the machine.
Right cover
Figure 1-6-3
1-6-3
2BC/D
4. Remove the screw holding the interlock cover

Interlock cover
and then the cover (only when detaching and
refitting the primary paper feed unit of drawer
1).
Figure 1-6-4
5. Remove the screw and then remove the

support plate and the confluence guide (only
when detaching and refitting the primary
paper feed unit of drawer 1 or 2).
6. Pull out the relevant drawer.
Support
plate
Confluence guide
Figure 1-6-5
7. Remove the three screws and the 8-pin Primary paper feed unit
connector and then remove the primary paper
feed unit from the right side of the main unit
of the machine.
Connector
Figure 1-6-6
1-6-4
2BC/D
• Removing the forwarding pulley

8. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the
direction of the arrow, and then remove it
from the primary paper feed unit. Forwarding pulley retainer
Figure 1-6-7
9. Remove the stop ring and pull the forwarding

pulley shaft in the direction of the arrow, and Forwarding pulley shaft
Stop ring
then remove the forwarding pulley.
* When fitting the forwarding pulley, ensure that
the gear section engages.
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-6-8
Bushing
• Removing the upper paper feed pulley
10. Remove the two screws and then remove the
paper feed clutch support plate and the
bushing.
Paper feed clutch support plate
Figure 1-6-9
1-6-5
2BC/D
11. Remove the two stop rings and disconnect

the connecter of the paper feed clutch.
12. Pull the upper paper feed shaft in the
Upper paper feed pulley Connector
direction of the arrow, and then remove the
upper paper feed pulley.
* When fitting the upper paper feed pulley, put
the end face with a silver ring to the front side
of the machine.
* When fitting the upper paper feed shaft,
ensure that the notch of the paper feed clutch
is inserted into the detent.
Stop rings Upper paper feed shaft
Figure 1-6-10
• Removing the lower paper feed pulley

13. Remove the stop ring on the rear of the
primary paper feed unit.
14. Pull the lower paper feed shaft in the direction
of the arrow, and then remove the lower
Lower paper feed shaft
paper feed pulley.
Lower paper feed pulley Stop ring
Figure 1-6-11
1-6-6
2BC/D
(1-2) Detaching and refitting the pulley of drawer 4
Procedure Deck conveying unit

• Removing the forwarding pulley
1. Pull out drawers 3 and 4 and then pull out the
deck conveying unit.
Figure 1-6-12
2. Remove the pin, raise the forwarding pulley

retainer in the direction of the arrow, and then
remove it from the deck conveying unit.
Pin
Forwarding pulley retainer
Figure 1-6-13
3. Remove the stop ring, pull the forwarding

pulley shaft in the direction of the arrow, and Forwarding pulley shaft
Stop ring
then remove the forwarding pulley.
* When fitting the forwarding pulley, ensure that
the gear section engages.
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-6-14
1-6-7
2BC/D
• Removing the upper paper feed pulley

4. Remove the four screws holding the deck Deck conveying unit
conveying unit and then the unit from the
machine.
Figure 1-6-15
5. Remove the stop ring and then the gear.

Stop ring
Gear
Figure 1-6-16
6. Remove the two stop rings and disconnect

Stop rings Connector
the connector, and then remove the wire of Upper paper feed shaft
the paper feed clutch from the wire saddle.
7. Pull the upper paper feed shaft in the
upper paper feed pulley.
* When fitting the upper paper feed pulley, put Wire saddle
the end face with a silver ring to the front side
of the machine.
* When fitting the upper paper feed shaft,
ensure that the notch of the paper feed clutch
is inserted into the detent.
Upper paper feed pulley
Figure 1-6-17
1-6-8
2BC/D
• Removing the lower paper feed pulley

8. Remove the two springs and tilt the lower Springs
paper feed pulley unit down in the direction of
the arrow.
* Remove the springs from the side of the
guide plate.
Lower paper feed pulley unit
Figure 1-6-18
9. Remove the stop ring and pull the lower

Lower paper feed shaft
paper feed pulley shaft in the direction of the
arrow, and then remove the lower paper feed
pulley.
Lower paper feed pulley Stop ring
Figure 1-6-19
1-6-9
2BC/D
(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the bypass forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys.
Procedure
• Removing the bypass paper feed unit
1. Remove the developing duct cover and Connector
middle right cover (see page 1-6-3).
2. Raise the bypass tray in the direction of the
arrow and lift it.
3. Disconnect the connectors of the bypass tray
and then remove the tray.
Bypass tray
Figure 1-6-20
4. Remove the five screws holding the bypass

paper feed unit and disconnect the connecter,
and then the unit.
Connector
Screws
Screws
Bypass paper feed unit
Figure 1-6-21
• Removing the bypass forwarding pulley Bypass forwarding pulley

5. Remove the stop ring form the bypass
forwarding pulley retainer.
6. Pull the bypass forwarding pulley shaft in the
bypass forwarding pulley.
Stop ring Bypass forwarding pulley shaft
Figure 1-6-22
1-6-10
2BC/D
• Removing the bypass upper paper feed pulley Stop ring

7. Remove the spring, stop ring and bushing Connector Spring
from the bypass forwarding pulley retainer.
8. Disconnect the connector of the bypass Bushing
paper feed clutch and then remove the wire
from the edging and the wire saddle.
9. While pressing the bypass solenoid lever,
remove the bypass forwarding pulley retainer.
Bypass solenoid lever Bypass forwarding

pulley retainer
Figure 1-6-23
10. Remove the stop ring, gear, spring pin and

bushing on the front of the bypass paper feed
unit.
Spring pin
Stop ring
Bushing
Gear
Figure 1-6-24
11. Pull the bypass paper feed shaft in the

bushing and bypass upper paper feed pulley.
* When fitting the bypass upper paper feed
pulley, put the blue end face to the front side
of the machine.
Bypass upper paper

feed pulley
Bushing
Bypass paper feed shaft
Figure 1-6-25
1-6-11
2BC/D
• Removing the bypass lower paper feed pulley

12. Remove the two screws from the bypass Bypass paper feed unit
paper feed unit and then remove the bypass
lower paper feed pulley unit.
Screws
Figure 1-6-26
13. Remove the two stop rings and pull the joint
shaft in the direction of the arrow, and then Bypass lower paper
feed pulley unit
remove the bypass lower paper feed pulley.
14. Refit all the removed parts. Bypass lower paper feed pulley
Stop ring
Stop ring Joint shaft
Figure 1-6-27
1-6-12
2BC/D
(3) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner brush

Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the registration cleaner brush.
Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
Registration cleaner brush
44).
2. Remove the two screws and then remove the
registration cleaner brush.
3. Replace the registration cleaner brush and
refit all the removed parts.
Figure 1-6-28
(4) Detaching and refitting the lower registration cleaner

Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the lower registration cleaner.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover, tilt the paper conveying
unit release lever down, and pull out the
paper conveying unit.
2. Remove the screw and pull the lower
registration cleaner toward you to remove it.
3. Replace the lower registration cleaner and
refit all the removed parts.
Lower registration
cleaner
Figure 1-6-29
1-6-13
2BC/D
(5) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter

Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter.
Procedure
1. Remove the screw holding the conveying duct
cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the two screws holding the middle
rear C cover and then the cover.
Middle rear C cover

Conveying duct cover
Figure 1-6-30
3. Replace the ozone filter and refit all the

removed parts.
Middle rear C cover
ozone filter
ozone filter
Figure 1-6-31
1-6-14
2BC/D-1
(6) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement

Perform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.
(6-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing

Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U066 U071
U034
(P. 1-6-36) (P. 1-6-70)
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
Leading edge registration (20 ± 1 mm)
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Correct image Output Output

Enter “034” using the numeric keys. example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-32
RCL ON: Leading edge registration

RCL ON (DUP) : Leading edge registration for
Select the items to be adjusted. duplex copying (second face)
Press the interrupt key. Press the start key
The new setting is stored

Press the start key
to output a test pattern.
For output example 1, increase

Is the leading edge No the value using the cursor up key.
registration correct? For output example 2, decrease
the value using the cursor down key.
Yes Setting range (initial setting)
RCL ON: –30.0 – +30.0 (5)
Press the stop/clear key to exit RCL ON (DUP): –30.0 – +30.0 (0)
maintenance mode. Changing the value by 1 moves the
leading edge by 0.1 mm.
End
1-6-15
2BC/D-1
(6-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leading
edge of the original during memory copying.
U053 U034 U065 U066

U407
(P. 1-4-20) (P. 1-6-15) (P. 1-6-34, 35) (P. 1-6-36)
Caution
Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy

Figure 1-6-33
Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.

Press the start key
and make a test copy.
For copy example 1, decrease the

Is the leading edge No value using the cursor down key.
registration correct? For copy example 2, increase the
value using the cursor up key.
Yes
Setting range: –2.0 – +2.0
Press the stop/clear key to Initilal setting: 0
exit maintenance mode. Changing the value by 1 moves
the leading edge by 0.1 mm.
End
1-6-16
2BC/D-1
(6-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing

Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original when
paper is fed from the drawer.
U067 U072
U034
(P. 1-6-37) (P. 1-6-69)
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
Center line of printing
Start
Correct image Output Output

Figure 1-6-34
LSU OUT: Center line adjustment data

Select the item to be adjusted. LSU OUT (DUP): Center line adjustment data for
duplex copying (second face)
Press the start key to output a test

pattern.
For output example 1, decrease

No the value using the cursor down key.
Is the image correct?
For output example 2, increase
the value using the cursor up key.
LSU OUT: –5.0 – +5.0 (–2.8)
Press the stop/clear key to exit LSU OUT (DUP): –2.0 – +2.0 (0)
maintenance mode. Changing the value by 1 moves the
center line by 0.1 mm.
End
1-6-17
2BC/D-1
(6-4) Adjusting the margins for printing

Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U403 U404
U402
(P. 1-6-38) (P. 1-6-72)
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in
maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Enter “402” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key. LEAD: Printer leading edge margin

A: Printer left margin
C: Printer right margin
TRAIL: Printer trailing edge margin
Select the items to be adjusted. TRAIL (DUP): Printer trailing edge margin for
duplex copying (second face)

Press the start key to output a test
pattern using A3/11" × 17" paper.
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the cursor up
No key makes the margin winder.
Are the margins correct?
Decreasing the value using the cursor
down key makes the margin narrower.
Yes
Setting range (initial setting)
LEAD: 0 – +10.0 (3.5)
Yes Proceed to A: –5.0 – +10.0 (2.5)
another mode? C: –5.0 – +10.0 (2.5)
TRAIL: –5.0 – +10.0 (6.4)
TRAIL (DUP): –5.0 – +10.0 (6.4)
No Changing the value by 1 moves the
margin by 0.1 mm for all.
Press the stop/clear key to
exit maintenance mode.
Printer leading edge margin
(6 ± 2.5 mm)
End
Ejection direction
(reference)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(6 ± 2.0 mm) (6 ± 2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin Printer trailing edge margin

(6 ± 2.5 mm) for duplex copying (6 ± 2.5 mm)
Normal copy mode Duplex copy mode
(A3/11" × 17") (second face, A3/11" × 17")
Figure 1-6-35
1-6-18
2BC/D-1
(6-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller
Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded.
Procedure
Start

Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Enter “051” using the numeric keys. Figure 1-6-36

• Amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller
DECK DATA : Drawer 1
Select the item to be adjusted. DECK DATA2 : Drawer 2
BYPASS DATA : Bypass tray
DUPLEX DATA : Duplex copying (second face)

Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the leading
edge of the image missing Yes
or varying randomly (copy Increase the value using the cursor up key.
example 1)?
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy Yes
Decrease the value using the cursor down key.
example 2)?
DECK DATA : –30 – +40 (–10)
No DECK DATA2 : –30 – +40 (3)
BYPASS DATA : –30 – +40 (25)
Press the stop/clear key to DUPLEX DATA : –30 – +40 (18)
exit maintenance mode. Changing the value by 1 moves the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.
The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack;
the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.
End
1-6-19
2BC/D-1
(6-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the vertical conveying
Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded.
Procedure
Original Copy Copy

Start example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-37

• Amount of slack in the paper of the vertical conveying
DUP LOOP ADJ : Duplex paper feeding (second face) of
Press the start key. A3, A5, 11" × 17", and 51/2" × 81/2" sizes
DUP LOOP ADJ2 : Duplex paper feeding (second face) of
B4, A4, B5, 81/2" × 14", and 11"× 81/2" sizes
Select the item to be adjusted. BYP LOOP ADJ : Paper feeding through the bypass

Press the start key
Is the leading
edge of the image missing Yes
or varying randomly (copy Increase the value using the cursor up key.
example 1)?
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy Yes
Decrease the value using the cursor down key.
example 2)?
DUP LOOP ADJ : 0 – +200 (70)
No DUP LOOP ADJ2 : 0 – +200 (70)
BYP LOOP ADJ : 0 – +200 (0)
Press the stop/clear key to Changing the value by 1 moves the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.
exit maintenance mode. The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
the smaller the value, the smaller
the amount of slack.
End
1-6-20
2BC/D
1-6-3 Optical section
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp

Follow the procedure below to replace the exposure lamp.
Procedure
1. Open the DF.
2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
right cover and then the cover.
Upper right
cover
Figure 1-6-38
3. While taking care not to touch the shading

plate or rear face of the contact glass, remove Exposure lamp
the contact glass.
4. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts at the
center of the machine.
* When moving the mirror 1 frame, do not
touch the exposure lamp nor inverter PCB.
5. Disconnect the exposure lamp connector
from the inverter PCB.
6. Remove the two screws holding the exposure
lamp and then the lamp.
7. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the
removed parts.
Connector
Figure 1-6-39
1-6-21
2BC/D
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires

Follow the procedure below when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
Caution
After replacing the scanner wire, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, perform the
adjustments (see pages 1-6-31 to 38).
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires
Procedure
1. Remove the DF.
2. Remove the contact glass.
DF
Figure 1-6-40
3. Remove the four screws holding the upper

rear cover and then the cover.
4. Remove the two screws holding the upper left
Upper left cover
Upper rear cover
Figure 1-6-41
1-6-22
2BC/D
5. Remove the two screws holding the slit glass

and then the glass.
Slit glass
Figure 1-6-42
6. Open the front cover and pull out the image Operation unit lower inner cover
formation unit.
7. Remove four screws holding the operation
unit lower inner cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-43
8. Remove the five screws and disconnect the Operation unit

three connectors, and then remove the
operation unit. Connectors
Connector
Figure 1-6-44
1-6-23
2BC/D
9. Remove the four screws holding the mirror 1

upper frame and then the frame.
10. Remove the two screws holding each of the
front and rear wire retainers and then the
retainers from the mirror 1 lower frame.
11. Remove the mirror 1 lower frame from the
scanner unit.
Mirror 1 upper frame
Mirror 1 lower frame

Front wire retainer
Rear wire retainer
Figure 1-6-45
12. Remove the round terminal of the scanner

wire from the scanner wire spring on the left
side of the scanner unit.
13. Remove the scanner wire.
Scanner wire springs
Figure 1-6-46
1-6-24
2BC/D
(2-2) Refitting the scanner wires
Caution
When fitting the scanner wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: 2AC12170
Machine rear: 2AC12420 (black)
Refitting requires the following tool: Frame securing tool (P/N: 2AC68230)
Procedure
• At the machine rear
1. Insert the two frame securing tools into the (Machine left) (Machine right)
positioning holes at the front and rear of the Front groove
Rear groove Scanner
scanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame in Wire guide wire pulley
position.
2. Secure the two frame securing tools at the
machine front and rear using the two screws Round Catch
terminal
for each.
3. Hook the round terminal on one end of the
scanner wire onto the left catch on the inside Round terminal
of the scanner unit. ................................. 1 Scanner
wire drum
4. Loop the scanner wire around the rear groove
in the scanner wire pulley on the mirror 2 Scanner wire spring
frame, winding from below to above. ....... 2
5. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in
the scanner wire pulley at the machine right, Figure 1-6-47
winding from above to below. .................. 3
6. Wind the scanner wire around the scanner

Locating ball Rear
wire drum four turns from the rear toward the
hole in the drum.
7. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire
into the hole in the scanner wire drum.
8. Wind the scanner wire a further five turns Scanner wire
from the locating ball toward the machine
front.
4 turns
5 turns
9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in
the scanner wire pulley at the machine left, Front
winding from below to above. .................. 4 Figure 1-6-48
10. Loop the scanner wire around the front
groove in the scanner wire pulley on the
mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above.
................................................................. 5
11. Run the scanner wire around the wire guide
at the machine left. .................................. 6
12. Hook the round terminal onto the scanner
wire spring. .............................................. 7
13. Hook the other end of the scanner wire spring
onto the catch at the machine left.
14. Repeat steps 2 to 13 for the scanner wire at
the machine front.
15. Remove the two screws from each of the
frame securing tools and then the tools.
16. Move the scanner from side to side to
correctly locate the wire in position.
1-6-25
2BC/D
17. Loosen the two screws securing the mirror 2

frame.
18. Insert the mirror 1 lower frame into the
scanner unit and seat it on the positioning
holes.
19. Insert the two frame securing tools into the
positioning holes in the front and rear of the
Frame securing tool
scanner unit and determine the positions of
the mirror 1 lower frame and mirror 2 frame.
20. While holding the scanner wire on the mirror
1 lower frame, secure the wire retainers at the Mirror 2 frame
front and rear of the mirror 1 lower frame Wire retainer
using the two screws for each.
21. Retighten the two screws securing the mirror
2 frame.
22. Remove the two screws holding each of the
two frame securing tools and then the tools.
Mirror 1 lower frame
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame Wire retainer
Mirror 1
lower frame
Figure 1-6-49
1-6-26
2BC/D
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit.
Caution
After replacing the laser scanner unit, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, proceed to
“(6) Adjusting scanner image lateral squareness (reference)”.
Procedure
1. Remove the DF, upper rear cover, middle rear
C cover, developing duct cover, upper right
cover, upper left cover and contact glass.
2. Remove the operation unit (see page 1-6-22).
3. Remove the three screws and then remove
the right scanner reinforcement.
Right scanner
reinforcement
Figure 1-6-50
4. Disconnect the two connectors CN14 and

Main PCB
CN15 on the main PCB.
CN14 CN15
Figure 1-6-51
5. Disconnect the two connectors CN1 and CN6

on the scanner drive PCB.
CN6 Scanner drive PCB
CN1
Figure 1-6-52
1-6-27
2BC/D
6. Remove the wire saddle located at the side of

the scanner drive PCB from the scanner unit.
Wire saddle
Figure 1-6-53
7. Remove the three screws holding the DF

connector mount and then the mount.
DF connector mount
Figure 1-6-54
8. Remove the four screws with rubber mounts

and then the scanner unit. Scanner unit
Figure 1-6-55
1-6-28
2BC/D
9. Remove the two screws holding the LSU

adjuster mount and then the mount.
10. Remove the three screws and disconnect the
three connectors, and then the laser scanner Laser scanner unit
unit. Connectors
11. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all
the removed parts.
Connector
LSU adjuster mount
Figure 1-6-56
1-6-29
2BC/D
(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)

Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU.
Caution
After replacing the ISU, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, perform the adjustments
(see pages 1-6-31 to 38).
ISU cover
ISU installation requires the following tools:
Two positioning pins (P/N 1856812)
Procedure
• Detaching the ISU
1. Remove the contact glass.
2. Remove the nine screws holding the ISU
Figure 1-6-57
3. Remove the four screws and disconnect the Connectors

two connectors, and then remove the ISU.
4. Replace the ISU.
ISU
Figure 1-6-58
• Refitting the ISU Positioning

5. Secure the ISU using the two positioning pin Connectors
pins.
6. Refit the ISU using four screws.
7. Remove the two positioning pins.
8. Connect the two connectors.
Positioning
ISU pin
Figure 1-6-59
1-6-30
2BC/D
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness is not obtained).
Caution
Before making the following adjustment, output a 1 dot-LINE PG pattern in maintenance item U089 to use as the original
for the adjustment.
Perform adjustment of straightness when proper straightness cannot be obtained even if you perform “Adjusting the
registration/vertical conveying slack amount (P.1-6-19, 20)” first and then check the straightness of copy images.
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Place the original
on the contact glass. Figure 1-6-60
Retighten the two screws and

Press the start key and make refit the contact glass.
a test copy at 100% magnification.
Remove the contact glass.

Loosen the two screws and
adjust the position of the
No mirror 2 frame.
Is the image correct? For copy example 1,
move the frame in the direction of
the white arrow ( ).
Yes For copy example 2,
move the frame in the direction of
the black arrow ( ).
End
Mirror 2 frame
Screws
Figure 1-6-61
1-6-31
2BC/D
(6) Adjusting scanner image lateral squareness (reference)

Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained).
Caution
Before making the following adjustment, open the front cover and pull out the image formation unit, and remove the
operation unit lower inner cover.
Perform “(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit” first and check for lateral squareness of the copy image. If
squareness is not obtained, perform “(6-2) Adjusting the position of ISU”.
(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit
Procedure
Start
Correct image Copy Copy

Figure 1-6-62
Retighten the three screws
and refit the contact glass.
Select “1dot-LINE”.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key and make

a copy at 100% magnification.
Remove the contact glass. Loosen the three
screws and adjust the position of the laser
scanner unit by rotating the LSU adjustment
shaft from the machine front using a straight
screwdriver.
No
Is the image correct? For output example 1, rotate the LSU
adjustment shaft in the direction of the
white arrow ( ).
For output example 2, rotate the LSU
Yes adjustment shaft in the direction of the
Press the stop/clear key to black arrow ( ).
End
LSU adjustment shaft
LSU adjustment shaft
Figure 1-6-63
1-6-32
2BC/D
(6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU
Caution
Before making the following adjustment, output a 1 dot-LINE PG pattern in maintenance item U089 to use as the original
for the adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Correct image Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Place the original
on the contact glass. Figure 1-6-64
Press the start key and make

a test copy at 100% magnification. Refit the contact glass.
Remove the contact glass and adjust

the lateral squareness of the ISU by
No
Is the image correct? rotating the pin.
For copy example 1, rotate the pin in
the direction of the black arrow ( ).
For copy example 2, rotate the pin in
Yes the direction of the white arrow ( ).
End
Pin
Figure 1-6-65
1-6-33
2BC/D
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction

Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.
U053 U065 U065 U070

(main scanning (auxiliary scanning
(P. 1-4-20) direction) direction) (P. 1-6-35) (P. 1-6-68)
Caution
Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Also, perform “(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction” (page 1-6-35) and “(10)
Adjusting the scanner center line” (page 1-6-37) after this adjustment.
Procedure
Start

Original Copy Copy
example example 2
Figure 1-6-66
Select “MAIN SCAN ADJ”
(main scanning direction).

The new setting
Place an original and press is stored.
the start key to make a test copy.
For copy example 1, increase the

No value using the cursor up key.
Is the image correct? For copy example 2, decrease the
value using the cursor down key.
Yes Setting range: –25 – +25

Initial setting: –6
Press the stop/clear key to Changing the value by 1 changes
exit maintenance mode. the magnification by 0.1%.
Increasing the value makes
the image wider, and decreasing it
makes the image narrower.
End
1-6-34
2BC/D
(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction

Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.
U053 U065 U065 U070

(main scanning (auxiliary scanning
(P. 1-4-20) direction) (P. 1-6-34) direction) (P. 1-6-68)
Caution
Procedure
Start
Enter “065” using the numeric keys. Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-67
Select “SUB SCAN ADJ”

(auxiliary scanning direction).

The new setting
Place an original and press is stored.
For copy example 1, increase the

value using the cursor up key.
No For copy example 2, decrease the
value using the cursor down key.

Initial setting: 0
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
End
1-6-35
2BC/D
(9) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration

Perform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U034 U071
U066
(P. 1-6-15) (P. 1-6-70)
Caution
Procedure
Scanner leading edge registration
Start

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-68
ADJUST DATA: Scanner leading edge

registration
Select the item to be adjusted.
ADJUST DATA2: Scanner leading edge
registration for rotate copying

The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press
For copy example 1, decrease

Is the scanner No the value using the cursor down key.
leading edge registration For copy example 2, increase
correct? the value using the cursor up key.
Yes
ADJUST DATA: –20 – +20 (–10)
Press the stop/clear key to ADJUST DATA2: –20 – +20 (0)
the leading edge by 0.17 mm.
End
1-6-36
2BC/D
(10) Adjusting the scanner center line

Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
U034 U072
U067
(P. 1-6-17) (P. 1-6-69)
Caution
Procedure
Scanner center line
Start
Original Copy Copy

Figure 1-6-69
ADJUST DATA:
Select the item to be adjusted. Scanner center line adjustment data
ADJUST DATA2:
Scanner center line adjustment data for rotate copying
The new setting

is stored.
Place an original and press
For copy example 1, increase

Is the scanner No the value using the cursor up key.
center line correct? For copy example 2, decrease
ADJUST DATA: –39 – +39 ( –30)
Press the stop/clear key to ADJUST DATA2: –7 – +7 (0)
the center line by 0.17 mm.
End
1-6-37
2BC/D-1
(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U402 U404
U403
(P. 1-6-18) (P. 1-6-72)
Caution
Procedure
Start

A MARGIN: Scanner left margin
B MARGIN: Scanner leading edge margin
Select the item to be adjusted. C MARGIN: Scanner right margin
D MARGIN: Scanner trailing edge margin
The new setting

is stored.
Press the start key
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the cursor
No up key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the
cursor down key makes the margin
Yes narrower.

Yes Scanner left margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)
Proceed to another mode? Scanner leading edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)
Scanner right margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)
Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (4.0)
No Changing the value by one moves
the margin by 0.1 mm for all.

Scanner leading edge margin (3 ± 1.5 mm)
End Ejection direction

(reference)
Scanner Scanner
left margin right margin
(2 ± 1.0 mm) (2 ± 1.0 mm)
Scanner trailing edge margin

(2 ± 1.0 mm)
Figure 1-6-70
1-6-38
2BC/D
1-6-4 Main charging section
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wire and main charger grid
Follow the procedure below when the charger wire or main charger grid is broken or to be replaced.
Precautions
• Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire.
• The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the charger housing.
• The cut end of the charger wire must not protrude more than 2 mm from under the charger wire retainer pin.
• Use a clean, undamaged tungsten charger wire.
• Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.
• Clean the main charger shield when replacing the charger wire.
* Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the main charger shield.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and pull out the image 2-pin connector
Main charger unit
formation unit (see page 1-6-44).
Pin
2. Disconnect the two 2-pin connectors for the
main charger cleaning motor and cleaning
lamp.
3. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the pin
and remove the main charger unit from the
2-pin
image formation unit. connector
Figure 1-6-71
4. Remove the screw holding the main charger

grid and then the grid.
5. Remove the grid wire cleaning pad and main
charger wire cleaning pad (see page 1-6-41).
Main charger grid
Figure 1-6-72
1-6-39
2BC/D
6. Remove the charger retainer pin and the charger spring, then remove the charger wire.
7. Wind the new tungsten wire at 4 and 6 turns around one end of the charger spring and trim the end of the wire.
* The length of the twists and the cut wire must be less than 2 mm.
8. Hook the other end of the charger spring onto the charger terminal of the main charger rear housing, then pass the
wire through the notches of the main charger rear housing as shown in the figure.
9. Hook the charger wire on the pulley of the main charger front housing as shown in the figure.
10. Pass the wire through the notch of the main charger rear housing.
11. Pass the charger wire through the V cut part of the charger retainer pin.
12. Pull the charger wire so that the length of the charger spring is 14 and 16 mm, then insert the charger retainer pin
into the projection of the main charger rear housing and fix the charger wire.
13. Cut off the excess wire under the charger retainer pin so less than 2 mm protrudes.
Charger wire
Charger retainer pin
V cut
Charger spring
Charger retainer pin Notches
Main charger
rear housing
Charger spring
Main charger
front housing Pulley
Notches
14 – 16 mm
Charger terminal
Figure 1-6-73
1-6-40
2BC/D
(2) Detaching and refitting the grid wire cleaning pad and main charger wire cleaning pad
Follow the procedure below to replace the grid wire cleaning pad and main charger wire cleaning pad.
Procedure
1. Remove the main charger grid (see page 1-6-
39). Grid wire cleaning pad
2. Open the hinge of the grid wire cleaning pad
in the direction of the arrow 1 to remove
from pin, then remove the grid wire cleaning
pad.
3. Remove the two claws each (sections
indicated by round marks in the figure), then
remove the main charger wire cleaning pads.
4. Refit all the removed parts. Hinge
Pin
Hinge
Charger wire cleaning pads
Figure 1-6-74
1-6-41
2BC/D
1-6-5 Drum section
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum

Follow the procedure below to replace the drum.
Cautions
• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum.
• Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.
Procedure
44).
2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-6-
39). Blade securing pin
3. Loosen the blade securing pin, slide the
blade release lever in the direction indicated
by the arrow and tighten the blade securing
pin.
Blade release lever
Figure 1-6-75
4. Remove the one screw each from the drum Drum front retainer Drum rear retainer
front and rear retainers and then the drum
from the image formation unit.
Drum
Figure 1-6-76
1-6-42
2BC/D
5. Remove the drum front and rear retainers

from the drum. Replace the drum.
* When installing the drum, orient correctly with
Drum rear retainer
the thinner end of the drum flange shaft at the
machine front and the thicker end at the
machine rear.
7. Enter the maintenance mode and run the
following modes.
U110: Clearing the drum count value
U111: Clearing the drum drive time Drum front retainer
U160: Applying toner to the cleaning blade
8. Pull out the image formation unit, return the
blade release lever to its original position, and
put the cleaning blade to the drum.
Drum
Figure 1-6-77
1-6-43
2BC/D
1-6-6 Developing section
(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit

Follow the procedure below to check, clean or replace the developing unit.
Procedure Image formation left cover

1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the screw holding the image
formation left cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-78
3. Remove the three screws and disconnect the Connector
connector, tilt the paper conveying unit Image formation unit
release lever down, and then pull out the
image formation unit.
Paper conveying release lever
Figure 1-6-79
4. Remove the two screws and open the image Image formation rail
formation rail in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 1-6-80
1-6-44
2BC/D-1
5. Disconnect the two connectors.

6. Raise the shutter a little and slide it toward Connector Sub toner hopper
the front side of the machine.
7. Turn the sub toner hopper to the right of the
machine.
Connector
Shutter
Figure 1-6-81
8. Remove the developing unit from the image
formation unit.
9. Check, clean or replace the developing unit Developing unit
and refit all the removed parts.
* When refitting the image formation unit, be
sure to reconnect the connector.
Figure 1-6-82
1-6-45
2BC/D-1
(2) Detaching and refitting the developing unit upper seal

Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the developing unit upper seal.
Procedure
44).
2. Remove the two screws holding the
developing unit upper seal and then the seal.
3. Clean or replace the developing unit upper
seal and refit all the removed parts.
* When attaching the developing unit upper
seal, fit both ends of the seal (round portions)
into the grooves of the developer housing.
Developing unit upper seal
Figure 1-6-83
(3) Adjusting the position of the magnetic brush (developing roller) (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the image is abnormally dark or light.
• Before starting this adjustment, the correct amount of developer is present.
Procedure
44).
2. Loosen the hexagonal socket head screw on
the front of developing sleeve using a
hexagonal wrench.
3. Turn the developing roller shaft using a
straight screwdriver and referring to a scale
until the distance between the top of the Hexagonal socket
head screw
magnetic brush and the outside of the
developing unit housing is 15 mm (reference).
4. Tighten the hexagonal socket head screw to
secure the developing roller shaft.
6. After adjustment, make a test copy to check
for performance. A: 15 mm
Magnetic brush
A
Developing roller shaft
Figure 1-6-84
1-6-46
2BC/D
(4) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference)

Perform the following adjustment if carrier or background appears on the copy image.
Procedure
44).
2. Remove the two screws holding the
developing unit upper seal and then the seal
(see page 1-6-46).
3. Measure the distance between the
developing roller and the doctor blade with a
thickness gauge as shown in Figure, and
adjust the doctor blade until the correct
distances are obtained at the center and ends
of the developing unit housing; the 0.50 mm
gauge should go into the gap and the 0.55
mm one should not.
* The smaller the distance, the lighter the
image; the larger the distance, the darker the
image.
5. After adjustment, make a test copy to check
for performance. Adjustment screw Adjustment screw
Adjustment screw
Figure 1-6-85
(5) Detaching and refitting the developing duct filter

Follow the procedure below to replace the developing duct filter.
Procedure
1. Remove the screw and disconnect the
connector, and then remove the developing
duct cover.
2. Replace the developing duct filter and refit all
the removed parts.
Developing
duct filter
Figure 1-6-86
1-6-47
2BC/D-1
1-6-7 Transfer and separation section
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wires and cleaning pads
Follow the procedure below when the charger wires and cleaning pads is broken or to be replaced.
Precautions
• Carry out replacement after running maintenance item U923 (Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning counter)
to clear the counter.
• Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire.
• The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the charger housing.
• The cut end of the charger wire must not protrude from under the charger wire retainer pin.
• Use a clean, undamaged tungsten charger wire.
• Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.
• Clean the transfer charger shield when replacing the charger wire.
* Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the transfer charger shield.
Procedure
Transfer charger unit Engagement portions
2. Remove the connector, widen the
engagement portions a little, and remove the
transfer unit from the paper conveying unit.
Connector
Engagement portions
Figure 1-6-87
1-6-48
2BC/D-1
3. Remove the transfer charger front and rear lids.

4. Remove the separation guide.
5. Replace the transfer charger cleaning pad and separation charger cleaning pad.
6. Remove the charger wire retainer pins, charger springs and then the charger wires.
Separation guide
Transfer Transfer charger

charger front lid
rear lid Charger
springs
Charger
wires Charger
pins
Transfer charger
cleaning pad
Separation charger
cleaning pad
Figure 1-6-88
7. Wind one end of the new wire at lease five turns around the end of the charger spring.
8. Hook the other end of the charger spring onto the catch on the transfer charger terminal on the rear of the transfer
charger housing.
9. Pass the charger wire through the notches in the front and rear of the transfer charger housing, and stretch it.
10. Insert the charger wire under the charger wire retainer pin into the hole at the front of the transfer charger housing.
* The charger wire must be adjusted so that the charger spring stretches to 12.5 ± 1.5 mm.
* Cut off the excess wire under the charger wire retainer pin.
11. Refit all removed parts.
Charger spring Transfer charger
front housing
12.5 ± 1.5 mm
Charger wire
retainer pin
Not more than 2 mm
Not more than 1 mm
Transfer
charger terminal
Charger wire
Transfer
charger terminal
Transfer charger Not more than 2 mm

rear housing
Figure 1-6-89
1-6-49
2BC/D
1-6-8 Cleaning section
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw and cleaning lower seal
Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claw and cleaning lower seal.
Procedure
1. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-42).
2. Remove the four screws and disconnect the
connector of the cleaning earth wire, and then
Cleaning unit
remove the cleaning unit.
Cleaning earth wire
Figure 1-6-90
3. Remove the two screws holding each of the Drum separation claw units
drum separation claw units and then the
units.
Figure 1-6-91
4. Remove the pulley, spring and drum Spring

separation claw from the drum separation
claw unit. Drum separation claw
pulley
Figure 1-6-92
1-6-50
2BC/D
5. Remove the two screws holding the cleaning

lower seal and then the seal.
* When removing the cleaning lower seal, take Cleaning lower seal
care not to lose the M3 retainer located on
the housing side.
6. Replace the drum separation claws and
cleaning lower seal and refit all the removed
parts.
M3 retainer
Figure 1-6-93
1-6-51
2BC/D
(2) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade

Follow the procedure below to replace the cleaning blade.
Procedure
1. Remove the cleaning unit (see page 1-6-50).
2. Remove the two screws holding the cleaning
Cleaning cover
Figure 1-6-94
3. Remove the retainer pin holding the cleaning

blade and then the blade.
Cleaning blade
4. Replace the cleaning blade and refit all the
removed parts.
* Do not apply the cleaning blade to the drum
and keep it released.
5. Enter the maintenance mode and run U160
“Applying toner to the cleaning blade.”
6. Pull out the image formation unit, return the
blade release lever to its original position, and
Retainer pin
put the cleaning blade to the drum.
Figure 1-6-95
(3) Detaching and refitting the thrust gear

Follow the procedure below to replace the thrust gear.
Procedure
2. Remove the E ring and then the thrust gear.
3. Replace the thrust gear and refit all the
removed parts. E ring
Thrust gear
Figure 1-6-96
1-6-52
2BC/D
(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning brush, front and rear cleaning seal and bushing brush
Follow the procedure below to replace the cleaning brush, front and rear cleaning seal and bushing brush.
Procedure
2. Remove the cleaning lower seal and cleaning
blade (see pages 1-6-50 and 52).
3. Remove the front and the rear cleaning seals
from the cleaning housing.
4. Remove the bushing sponge from the front of
the cleaning housing.
Bushing sponge
Front cleaning seal
Rear cleaning seal
Figure 1-6-97
5. Remove an E ring, a gear, and a bushing Gear

from the front and the rear of the cleaning
brush respectively.
Bushing
E ring
E ring
Bushing
Gear
Figure 1-6-98
6. Remove the cleaning brush from the cleaning

housing.
Cleaning brush
Figure 1-6-99
1-6-53
2BC/D
7. Replace the cleaning brush, front and rear

cleaning seal and bushing sponge. Refit all
the removed parts.
* Attach the front and rear cleaning seals within
the standard value range shown in the
illustration.
0.5 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0.5 mm
0 mm 0 mm
0.5 mm 0.5 mm
0.5 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0.5 mm
Front cleaning Rear cleaning

seal seal
Figure 1-6-100
1-6-54
2BC/D
1-6-9 Fixing section
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit

Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit.
Procedure
unit release lever down, and pull out the Fixing unit
3. Remove the two screws holding the fixing unit
and then the unit from the conveying unit. Eject cover
4. Check or replace the fixing unit and refit all
the removed parts.
Figure 1-6-101
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing heaters M and S

Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing heaters M and S.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the two screws holding the fixing
front cover and then the cover.
Fixing front cover
Figure 1-6-102
1-6-55
2BC/D
3. Remove the screw on the front of fixing unit. Screw
Figure 1-6-103
4. Disconnect the two connectors on the rear of

fixing unit and remove the screw holding the Connectors
heater retainer and then the retainer.
Screw Heater retainer

Figure 1-6-104
5. Pull out the fixing heater M and S from the
rear of fixing unit.
6. Replace the fixing heater M and S and all the
removed parts.
* When replacing the fixing heater M and S
alone, remove the screw from the junction
portion.
* When fitting the fixing heater M and S,
connect the connectors to those with the
corresponding colors respectively.
Fixing heater M and S
Figure 1-6-105
1-6-56
2BC/D
(3) Detaching and refitting the heat roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the one screw holding each on the
front and rear of fixing unit, and then open the
fixing unit.
Fixing unit
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-6-106
2. Loosen the one screw holding each of the

heat roller retainers on the front and rear of
fixing unit.
3. Remove the heat roller from the fixing unit.
Heat roller
Heat roller retainer
Heat roller retainer
Figure 1-6-107
1-6-57
2BC/D
4. Remove the circlip, bearing and bushing from Circlip

the front of the heat roller and then remove
the circlip, gear, bearing and bushing from the Bearing
rear.
5. Replace the heat roller and all the removed
parts.
Gear
Bearing Bushing
Heat roller
Bushing
Circlip
Figure 1-6-108
1-6-58
2BC/D
(4) Detaching and refitting the press roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-57).
2. Remove the screw holding the guide plate
and then the plate.
Guide plate
Figure 1-6-109
3. Remove the press roller from the fixing unit.
press roller
Figure 1-6-110
4. Remove the E ring on either the front or rear E ring

end of the press roller and pull out the press
roller shaft.
5. Replace the press roller and all the removed
parts.
Press roller
E ring
Press roller shaft

Figure 1-6-111
1-6-59
2BC/D
(5) Detaching and refitting the lower cleaning roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the lower cleaning roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the press roller (see page 1-6-59).
2. Remove the lower cleaning roller from the
fixing unit.
3. Remove the bushings on the front and rear
end of the lower cleaning roller.
4. Replace the lower cleaning roller and all the
removed parts.
Bushing
Lower cleaning roller
Bushing
Figure 1-6-112
1-6-60
2BC/D
(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor

Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit thermistor.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-55).
upper cover and then the cover.
Fixing upper cover
Figure 1-6-113
3. Remove the screw holding the fixing unit

thermistor and disconnect the connector, and
then remove the thermistor.
4. Check or replace the fixing unit thermistor
and all the removed parts. Fixing thermistor
Connector
Figure 1-6-114
1-6-61
2BC/D
(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing web roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing web roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-55).
upper cover and then the cover (see page 1- Fixing web roller unit
6-61).
web roller unit and then the unit.
Figure 1-6-115
4. Press the fixing web roller in the direction of

the arrow to remove it.
5. Replace the fixing web roller and all the
removed parts.
Fixing web roller
Figure 1-6-116
1-6-62
2BC/D
(8) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claw

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claw.
Procedure
paper conveying unit. Heat roller
separation claw unit
3. Remove the screw holding the thrust pin and
then the pin.
4. Remove the two screws holding the holder
and then the holder. Remove the heat roller
Thrust pin
separation claw unit.
Holder
Figure 1-6-117
5. Remove the spring from heat roller

separation claw.
6. Loosen the screw holding the retainer and
pull out the separation claw shaft.
7. Replace the heat roller separation claw and Separation claw shaft
all the removed parts.
Retainer Heat roller

separation claws
Figure 1-6-118
1-6-63
2BC/D
1-6-10 Duplex section
(1) Cleaning the duplex switchback rollers

Follow the procedure below to clean the duplex switchback rollers.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and pull out the duplex
unit.
2. Remove the four screws holding the duplex
unit and then the unit from the machine.
Duplex unit
Figure 1-6-119
3. Remove the four screws holding the duplex Stop ring

Duplex joint gear
4. Remove the stop ring and then the duplex
joint gear. Duplex upper entry guide
5. Remove the two screws holding the duplex
upper entry guide and then the guide.
Figure 1-6-120
6. Clean the duplex switchback rollers.

Duplex switchback rollers
Figure 1-6-121
1-6-64
2BC/D
(2) Adjusting the position of the duplex eject switching solenoid

Follow the procedure below after replacing the duplex eject switching solenoid or if paper jams frequently in the duplex
section.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and pull out the duplex
unit.
2. Remove the four screws holding the duplex
3. Loosen the screw securing the duplex eject
switching solenoid.
4. Adjust the position of the duplex eject
switching solenoid so that the gap between
the switchback feedshift guide and the duplex
refeed guide is between 2.5 and 3.0 mm
when the plunger of the duplex eject
switching solenoid is pushed (solenoid: on). Switchback feedshift guide
5. Tighten the screw of the duplex eject
switching solenoid. 2.5 – 3.0mm
Duplex
refeed guide
Plunger
Screw
Duplex eject switching solenoid
Figure 1-6-122
1-6-65
2BC/D
(3) Setting the switchback drive

Follow the procedure below if paper jams or the leading edge of paper is folded in the duplex section frequently during
duplex copying.
Procedure
Start

1FWD CL OFF: Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing
2FWD CL OFF2: Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing
(for 11" × 17" copy paper only)
Select the item to be adjusted. 3DUP CL OFF: Duplex reversing clutch-on timing
4REV CL OFF: Duplex reversing clutch-off timing

The new setting
is stored.
Press the start key
Is the on/off timing of No Change the setting using

the clutches correct? the up/down keys.
Yes
FWD CL OFF: 0 – 254 (160)
Press the stop/clear key to FWD CL OFF2: 0 – 254 (110)
exit maintenance mode. DUP CL OFF: 0 – 254 (50)
REV CL OFF: 0 – 254 (132)
Increasing the value makes the on/off
timing of the clutch later, and decreasing
End it make the timing earlier
OFF
Duplex forwarding clutch
ON
OFF
Duplex reverseing clutch ON
Figure 1-6-123
1-6-66
2BC/D-1
1-6-11 DF section
(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley or DF feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the DF original reversing cover.
original feed cover and then the cover.
• Detaching the DF forwarding pulley

3. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.
4. Pull out the forwarding shaft toward the rear
side of the machine and slide the bushing.
5. Remove the DF forwarding pulley from the
forwarding shaft.
• Detaching the DF feed pulley

6. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.
7. Remove the stop ring at the machine rear.
8. Pull out the front original feed shaft toward
the rear side of the machine and slide the
bushing.
9. Remove the DF feed pulley from the front
original feed shaft.
10. Clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley
and the DF feed pulley.
* When refitting the DF forwarding pulley and
DF feed pulley, ensure that the notches in the
pulleys are aligned with the projections on the
Front original
one-way clutches.
feed shaft
Bushing
One-way clutch Stop ring
DF feed pulley DF forwarding belt

Bushing
forwarding
One-way clutch shaft
DF forwarding pulley
Stop ring
bushing
Machine
rear
bushing
Stop ring
Machine
front
Figure 1-6-124
1-6-67
2BC/D-1
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley

Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the DF original reversing cover. Screws
2. Remove the DF front and rear covers.
original feed cover and then the cover.
Upper original
feed cover
Figure 1-6-124-1
4. Remove the four connectors and then

remove the wires from the two wire clamps.
Connectors
Wire clamps
Connectors
Figure 1-6-124-2
1-6-68
1-6-67-1
2BC/D-1
5. Remove the two screws holding the solenoid

bracket and then the bracket.
6. Remove the screw and then remove the feed Screw Feed guide pin
guide pin.
Solenoid bracket
Screws
Figure 1-6-124-3
7. Remove the E-ring and then the original feed

clutch.
8. Remove the E-ring and then remove the
bushing.
E-ring
E-ring
Original feed clutch
Bushing
Figure 1-6-124-4
1-6-67-2
1-6-69
2BC/D-1
9. Open the registration guide and remove the

guide.
Registration guide
feed guide plate and then the plate. Screw
Screw
Upper original feed

guide plate
Figure 1-6-124-5
11. Remove the two screws holding the original

feed lift and then the lift.
12. Remove the screw holding the separation
guide and then the guide.
Screw
Screw
Separation guide
Screw
Original feed lift
Figure 1-6-124-6
1-6-70
1-6-67-3
2BC/D-1
13. Remove the separation shaft from the

separation pulley arms.
14. Remove the stopper and torque limitter from
the separation shaft and then remove the DF
separation pulley.
15. Clean or replace the DF separation pulley.
Torque limitter
DF separation
pulley
Separation shaft
Stopper
Separation pulley
arms
Figure 1-6-124-7
1-6-67-4
1-6-71
2BC/D-1
(3) Adjusting the DF magnification

Adjust magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction if magnification is incorrect when the DF is used.
U053 U065 U065

(main scanning (auxiliary scanning U070
(P. 1-4-20) direction) (P.1-6-34) direction) (P.1-6-35)
Caution
Procedure
Main scanning
direction
Start
Auxiliary
scanning
Enter maintenance mode. direction

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-125

The new setting
is stored.
Place an original on the DF

No the value using the cursor up key.
Is the image correct? For copy example 2, decrease
Yes
Setting range: –25 – +25
Initial setting: –1
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
End
1-6-72
1-6-68
2BC/D-1
(4) Adjusting the DF original center line

Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when
the DF is used.
U034 U067
U072
(P. 1-6-17) (P. 1-6-36)
Caution
Procedure
Reference
Start
Original Copy Copy

Figure 1-6-126
DATA (1 sided mode): Center line in the 1 sided mode

DATA (front in 2 sided mode): Center line on the front
Select the item to be adjusted. side in the 2 sided mode
DATA (rear in 2 sided mode): Center line on the rear
side in the 2 sided mode
The new setting

is stored.

DATA (1 sided mode): –39 – +39 (–8)
Press the stop/clear key to DATA (front in 2 sided mode): –39 – +39 (–8)
exit maintenance mode. DATA (rear in 2 sided mode): –39 – +39 (–7)
Changing the value by 1 moves
the center line by 0.17 mm.
End
1-6-73
1-6-69
2BC/D-1
(5) Adjusting the scanning start position when the DF is used

Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image.
U034 U066
U071
(P. 1-6-15) (P. 1-6-37)
Caution
(5-1) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-127
Select “LEAD EDGE ADJ”.
The new setting

is stored.

initial setting: 10
Press the stop/clear key to Changing the value by 1 moves
exit maintenance mode. the leading edge by 0.19 mm.
Increasing backward and decreasing it moves
the image forward.
End
1-6-74
1-6-70
2BC/D-1
(5-2) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy

Figure 1-6-128
Select “TRAIL EDGE ADJ”.
The new setting

is stored.

initial setting: –15
Press the stop/clear key to Changing the value by 1 moves
exit maintenance mode. the trailing edge by 0.19 mm.
Increasing backward and decreasing it moves
the image forward.
End
1-6-75
1-6-71
2BC/D-1
(6) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF
Perform the following adjustment if margins are not correct.
U402 U403
U404
(P. 1-6-18) (P. 1-6-38)
Caution
Procedure
Start

A MARGIN: DF left margin
B MARGIN: DF leading edge margin
Select the item to be adjusted. C MARGIN: DF right margin
D MARGIN: DF trailing edge margin
The new setting

is stored.
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the cursor
No up key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the
cursor down key makes the margin
Yes narrower.
Yes DF left margin: 0 – +10.0 (1.5)
Proceed to another mode? DF leading edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (3.0)
DF right margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)
DF trailing edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (4.0)
No Changing the value by one moves
the margin by 0.1 mm for all.

DF leading edge margin (3 ± 2.5 mm)
End
Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin DF right margin
(2.5+1.5
–2.0 mm) (2.5+1.5
–2.0 mm)
DF trailing edge margin

(3 ± 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-6-129
1-6-76
1-6-72
2BC/D
1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:

Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)
NOTE
When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.
(For formatting, insert a Compact Flash and select a drive.)
For a desktop computer, connect a Compact Flash card reader/writer to it. For a notebook computer, use a PC card adapter
or a connection portion only for Compact Flash.
Procedure
1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the
power plug.
2. Remove the middle rear C cover.
3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the
copier.
* Insert it straight all the way into the machine
with the front side facing the rear of the
machine. If the main switch is turned of
when the CompactFlash is not properly
inserted, the PCB may be damaged.
4. Insert the power plug and turn the main
switch on.
* The Energy saver key and the Start key will
blink alternately and firmware upgrade
operation will start. (for approximately three
minutes)
Upgrading firmware starts for 3 minutes. Notch hole
Caution:
Never turn the main switch off during
upgrading.
5. “Completed” is displayed on the touch panel Compact Flash
when upgrading is complete.
6. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the Figure 1-7-1
power plug.
7. Remove Compact Flash from the copier and
refit the middle rear C cover.
8. Insert the power plug and turn the main
switch on.
1-7-1
2BC/D
1-7-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)
The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.
• High voltage transformer PCB: VR101, VR102, VR201, VR301, VR302, VR401, VR402, VR403
• Inverter PCB: VR1
1-7-2
2BC/D
2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed system of this copier includes drawers 1 and 2 that hold 500 sheets of paper each, drawer 3 that holds
1,000 sheets, drawer 4 that holds 1,500 sheets, and the bypass table.
The paper feed section consists of the primary paper feed and secondary paper feed subsections. Primary paper feed
conveys paper from one of the four drawers or the bypass table to the upper and lower registration rollers, at which point
secondary paper feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer/conveying sections in sync with the image printing
timing.
(1) Drawers 1 and 2 paper feed

Drawers 1 and 2 consist of the lift mechanism with the drawer operating plate for making paper come into contact with
the forwarding pulley and the paper feed mechanism with the forwarding pulley for pulling out paper from the drawer, the
upper paper feed pulley and so on.
Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section (1)
1 Upper paper feed pulley # Left feed guide plate

2 Lower paper feed pulley $ Confluence guide
3 Forwarding pulley % Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3)
4 Upper paper feed housing ^ Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4)
5 Lower paper feed housing & Lift operating plate
6 Paper switch 1 (PSW1) * Drawer operating plate
7 Paper switch 2 (PSW2) ( Drawer 1
8 Lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) ) Drawer 2
9 Lift limit switch 2 (LILSW2) ⁄ Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U)
0 Right feed pulley ¤ Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L)
! Vertical paper conveying roller B ‹ Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U)
@ Vertical paper conveying roller C › Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L)
2-1-1
2BC/D
(1-1) Detecting the paper level

The mechanism of paper level detection is same for drawers 1 and 2, so only drawer 1 is explained here.
The drawer operating plate for making paper in the drawer come into contact with the forwarding pulley is activated by
raising the lift operating plate. The lift operating plate is attached on the lift shaft to which the upper lift motor (LM-U) is
connected. When the drawer is set to the copier or the lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) is turned off as the paper on the lift is
used for copying, the upper lift motor (LM-U) will operate until the leading edge of the paper on the drawer operating
plate turns lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) on. The tilting up angle of the lift operating plate (lift motor drive shaft angle) is
therefore small when the paper level is low, and large when the paper level is high. The upper lift motor (LM-U) includes
a circuit that converts the tilting up angle into 2-bit digital data by dividing the angle into four levels and outputs the data
as paper level detection signals (UPLESW1, UPLESW2). The engine PCB (EPCB) judges the amount of paper
remaining with four levels of full, 3/4, 1/2, and 1/4 based of the UPLESW1 and UPLESW2 signals and judges also
exhaustion of paper when paper switch 1 (PSW1) is not turned on even if the lift limit switch (LILSW1) is turned on. The
PCB, therefore, detects five levels of the amount of paper remaining in total.
Lift limit switch 1

Paper switch 1
Drawer 1
Drawer operating plate
Lift operating plate
Lift shaft (lift motor upper drive shaft)

Paper level detection
Amount of
Lift motor upper drive output signal level
paper
shaft angle
UPLESW1 UPLESW2 remaining
57.17 to 80.0° H L 1/4
41.35 to 57.17° L L 1/2

28.54 to 41.35° L H 3/4
0 to 28.54° H H Full
Figure 2-1-2 Paper level detection
UPLESW1
CN17-3
UPLESW2
CN17-1 LILSW1
LM-U REM
CN17-5
PSW1
CN7-9
LILSW1
CN7-6 PSW1
EPCB LM-U
UPLESW1
CN17-8
UPLESW2
CN17-6 LILSW2
LM-L REM
CN17-10
PSW2
CN7-25
LILSW2
CN7-22 PSW2
LM-L
Figure 2-1-3 Paper level detection section block diagram
2-1-2
2BC/D
Figure 2-1-4 Paper feed section (2)
1 Lower registration roller

2 Upper registration roller
3 Front registration guide
4 Upper registration guide
5 Registration switch (RSW)
6 Lower feed roller
7 Upper feed roller
8 Upper right feed guide
9 Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1)
0 Upper left feed guide
! Lower right feed guide
@ Vertical paper conveying roller A
# Right feed pulley
$ Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2)
2-1-3
2BC/D
EPCB
RCL
CN18-A6 RSW
PFSW1
CN3-B2
FCL1-H
CN18-A1
CN18-A4 FCL1-L
FCL2-L
CN20-4
FCL2-H
CN18-A8
CN18-B1
PFSW2
CN20-7
CN18-B3
FCL3
CN20-10
PFSW3
CN7-11
PFCL1
CN7-9 Drawer 1
LILSW1
CN7-6
PSW1
CN7-14 PWSW-U
PLSW-U
CN7-1,2,3
CN18-B5 FCL4
CN20-13
PFSW4
CN7-27
PFCL2
CN7-25 Drawer 2
LILSW2
CN7-22
PSW2
CN7-16 PWSW-L
PLSW-L
CN7-17, 18, 19
Figure 2-1-5 Paper feed section block diagram (paper feed section of drawers 1 and 2)
2-1-4
2BC/D
Start key: On
PFSW4: ON
PFSW3: ON
PFSW2: ON
PFSW1: ON
RSW: ON
Image ready
Secondary paper
feed start
RSW: OFF
ESW: OFF
PFSW4
PFSW3
PFSW2
PFSW1
RSW
ESW 50 ms
163 ms
PFCL2
50 ms 58 ms
FCL4
128 ms 58 ms
FCL3
128 ms
FCL2-H
56 ms 70 ms
FCL1-H
10 ms 58 ms
FCL1-L
166 ms 86 ms
RCL
380 ms
PFM
Drawer 2, paper size: A4
Timing chart 2-1-1 Drawer 2 paper feed
a When the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns on and thereby machine drive starts.
b 50 ms after the start key is pressed, paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turns on and the forwarding pulley and upper and
lower paper feed pulleys of drawer 2 rotate to start primary paper feed. 50 ms later, feed clutch 4 (FCL4) turns on and
paper is fed to the vertical paper conveying section.
c 128 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed
switch 3 (PFSW3) turns on, feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) turns on. 56 ms after paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) turns on,
feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on and paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turns on.
163 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) off, paper feed clutch 2 (PFSW2) turns off. 58 ms after
paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns off, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns off.
d The paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on to complete the primary paper feed. 70 ms later, feed high clutch 2
(FCL2-H) and feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turn off.
e 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed. 10
ms later, feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turns on.
f 86 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns off to complete the
secondary paper feed.
g When the paper is ejected, the eject switch (ESW) turns off. 380 ms later, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns off to
complete the paper feed.
2-1-5
2BC/D
(2) Drawers 3 and 4 paper feed

Drawer 3 located in the right of the deck holds 1,000 sheets of paper and drawer 4 located in the left of the deck holds
1,500 sheets of paper.
Figure 2-1-6 Drawers 3 and 4 (deck)
1 Right feed pulley * Deck left paper conveying roller

2 Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) ( Deck lower paper feed guide
3 Left feed guide ) Deck upper paper feed guide
4 Vertical paper conveying roller E ⁄ Deck left paper conveying stay
5 Deck upper confluence guide ¤ Deck lift plate
6 Lower paper feed pulley ‹ Deck base A
7 Confluence guide › Deck base B
8 Lower paper feed housing fi Deck right paper level switch 1 (DPLSW1-R)
9 Forwarding pulley fl Deck right paper level switch 2 (DPLSW2-R)
0 Upper paper feed pulley ‡ Deck right paper level switch 3 (DPLSW3-R)
! Deck lower paper conveying guide ° Deck left paper level switch 1 (DPLSW1-L)
@ Deck right paper conveying roller · Deck left paper level switch 2 (DPLSW2-L)
# Deck upper paper conveying pulley ‚ Deck left paper level switch 3 (DPLSW3-L)
$ Deck upper paper conveying pulley Œ Deck right switch (DSW-R)
% Deck upper paper conveying guide „ Deck lift limit switch 2 (DLILSW2)
^ Deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) ´ Deck left switch (DSW-L)
& Deck paper switch 1 (DPSW1) ‰ Deck paper switch 2 (DPSW2)
2-1-6
2BC/D
(2-1) Drawer 3 paper feed

Drawer 3 consists of the paper lifting mechanism with a lift for lifting paper in the drawer and the paper feed mechanism
with a forwarding pulley for pulling out paper from the drawer, an upper paper feed pulley, and so on.
EPCB
RCL
CN18-A6 RSW
PFSW1
CN3-B2
FCL1-H
CN18-A1
CN18-A4 FCL1-L
FCL2-L
CN20-4
FCL2-H
CN18-A8
CN18-B1
CN20-7
PFSW2
CN18-B3
FCL3
CN20-10
PFSW3
CN18-B5 FCL4
CN20-13
PFSW4
CN20-16
PFSW5
CN18-B7 FCL5
CN20-19
CN8-7 DPSW1 PFSW6
CN8-5
CN8-2 DLILSW1 PFCL3
Drawer 3
Figure 2-1-7 Drawer 3 block diagram
2-1-7
2BC/D
Start key: On
PFSW6: ON
PFSW5: ON
PFSW4: ON
PFSW3: ON
PFSW2: ON
PFSW1: ON
RSW: ON
Image ready
Secondary paper
feed start
RSW: OFF
ESW: OFF
PFSW6
PFSW5
PFSW4
PFSW3
PFSW2
PFSW1
RSW
ESW 50 ms 163 ms
PFCL3 58 ms
50 ms
FCL5 58 ms
128 ms
FCL4 58 ms
128 ms
FCL3
128 ms 70 ms
FCL2-H
56 ms
FCL1-H 58 ms
10 ms
FCL1-L
166 ms 86 ms
RCL 380 ms
PFM
100 ms
DDM
a When the start key is pressed, the deck drive motor (DDM) turns on and 100 ms later the paper feed motor (PFM)
turns on, thereby starting machine drive.
lower paper feed pulleys of drawer 3 rotate to start primary paper feed. 50 ms later, feed clutch 5 (FCL5) turns on and
paper is fed to the vertical paper conveying section.
c 128 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) on and then turns paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) on, feed
clutch 4 (FCL4) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turns on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on. 128 ms
after paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns on, feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) turns on. 56 ms after paper feed switch 2
(PFSW2) turns on, feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on and paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turns on.
58 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) off and then turns paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) off, feed
clutch 5 (FCL5) turns off. 58 ms after paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turns off, feed clutch 4 (FCL4) turns off. 58 ms
after paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns off, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns off.
d The paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on to complete the primary paper feed. 70 ms later, feed high clutch 2
(FCL2-H) and feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turn off.
g 380 ms after the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the deck drive motor (DDM) and the paper feed motor (PFM)
turn off to complete the paper feed.
2-1-8
2BC/D
(2-2) Drawer 4 paper feed

Drawer 4 consists of the paper lifting mechanism with a deck lift and the paper feed mechanism with a forwarding pulley
for pulling out paper from the drawer, an upper paper feed pulley, and so on. Also a paper conveying section for
conveying paper horizontally is provided.
EPCB
RCL
CN18-A6 RSW
PFSW1
CN3-B2
FCL1-H
CN18-A1
CN18-A4 FCL1-L
FCL2-L
CN20-4
FCL2-H
CN18-A8
CN18-B1
CN20-7
PFSW2
CN18-B3
FCL3
CN20-10
PFSW3
CN18-B5 FCL4
CN20-13
PFSW4
CN20-16
PFSW5
CN26-12
PFCL4 DPCSW2
CN26-17
DPSW2
CN26-8 DLILSW-L
CN26-5 DPCSW1
DFCL
CN26-14
CN26-2
Drawer 4
Figure 2-1-8 Drawer 4 block diagram
2-1-9
2BC/D
Start key: On
DPCSW2: ON
DPCSW1: ON
PFSW5: ON
PFSW4: ON
PFSW3: ON
PFSW2: ON
PFSW1: ON
RSW: ON
Image ready
Secondary paper
feed start
PFSW1: OFF
RSW: OFF
ESW: OFF
DPCSW2
DPCSW1
PFSW5
PFSW4
PFSW3
PFSW2
PFSW1
RSW
ESW 50 ms
190 ms
PFCL4
125 ms
50 ms
DFCL
58 ms
163 ms
FCL5
58 ms
128 ms
FCL4 58 ms
128 ms
FCL3
128 ms
FCL2-H
56 ms 70 ms
FCL1-H 58 ms
10 ms
FCL1-L
86 ms
166 ms
RCL
380 ms
PFM
100 ms
DDM
a When the start key is pressed, the deck drive motor (DDM) turns on and 100 ms later the paper feed motor (PFM)
turns on, thereby starting paper feed.
lower paper feed pulleys of drawer 4 rotate to start primary paper feed. 50 ms later, the deck feed clutch (DFCL) turns
on and paper is fed through the horizontal paper conveying section.
c 163 ms after the paper turns deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2) on and then turns deck paper conveying
switch 1 (DPCSW1) on, feed clutch 5 (FCL5) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) turns on, feed
clutch 4 (FCL4) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turns on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on. 128 ms
after paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns on, feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) turns on. 56 ms after paper feed switch 2
(PFSW2) turns on, feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on and the paper is conveyed to the position where paper feed
switch 1 (PFSW1) turns on.
125 ms after the paper turns deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) off, the deck feed clutch (DFCL) turns off. 58
ms after paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) turns off, feed clutch 5 (FCL5) turns off. 58 ms after paper feed switch 4
(PFSW4) turns off, feed clutch 4 (FCL4) turns off.
d The paper advances and turns the registration switch (RSW) on to complete the primary paper feed. 70 ms later, feed
high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) and feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turn off.
g 380 ms after the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the deck drive motor (DDM) and the paper feed motor (PFM)
turn off to complete the paper feed.
2-1-10
2BC/D
(2-3) Raising and lowering the lift

The mechanism of paper lifting with the deck lift is same for drawers 3 and 4, so only drawer 3 is explained here.
The deck lift is suspended with wire at four points, and the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) drives the lift by winding up the
wire. The stop control of the deck lift at the upper limit is performed with deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1).
When paper is loaded on the deck lift and the drawer is set in the copier, the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) turns on to
start winding up the wire. The deck lift rises until the leading edge of the paper turns deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) on
and then stops. When deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) is turned off as the paper on the lift is used for copying, the deck
lift is raised until the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) turns on again and the leading edge of the paper turns deck lift limit
switch 1 (DLILSW1) on.
When the drawer is pulled out from the copier for loading paper or other purposes, the lift drive shaft is released from the
coupler of the deck right lift motor (DLM-R), allowing the lift to descend under its own weight. The damper mounted via a
gear to the lift drive shaft buffers the impact of the descending lift.
Wire Wire
Deck right lift motor

Deck lift limit switch 1
Deck lift
Coupler
Deck paper switch 1
Wire
Lift drive shaft

Wire
Damper
Figure 2-1-9 Raising and lowering the lift
CN8-16 CN8-18
CN26-8 EPCB CN8-5
CN26-17 CN8-2
DPSW2
DLILSW2
DPSW1
DLILSW1
DLM-L DLM-R
Figure 2-1-10 Lift block diagram
2-1-11
2BC/D
(2-4) Detecting the paper level

* The mechanism of paper level detection is same for drawers 3 and 4, so only drawer 3 is explained here.
When the drawer is pulled out from the copier and then pushed in again or when paper on the lift is used for copying, the
deck right lift motor (DLM-R) drives until the leading edge of the paper on the lift turns deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1)
on. The rising level of the lift, therefore, depends on the amount of paper remaining. When the amount of paper
remaining is large, the level is low, and when small, the level is high. At the rear portion of the deck, deck right paper
level switches 1, 2, and 3 (DLPSW1-R, DLPSW2-R, DLPSW3-R) are mounted at three levels and turn on or off based on
the shielding plate mounted to the lift. The engine PCB (EPCB) detects the level below which the actuator turns the
switches on (or no switch on) when the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) rises and judges the rising level of the lift (paper
level) with four levels. The PCB judges also exhaustion of paper when deck paper switch 1 (DPSW1) is not turned on
even if deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) is turned on. The PCB, therefore, detects five levels of paper remaining in total.
Deck right paper level switch 1

Actuator
Deck right lift motor
Lift
Deck paper switch 1
Deck lift limit switch 1
Figure 2-1-11 Detecting the paper level
CN8-16 CN8-18
CN20-22 CN20-31
CN20-25 EPCB CN20-34
CN20-28 CN20-37
CN26-6 CN8-2
DLILSW2
DPLSW1-L
DLILSW1
DPLSW2-L
DPLSW1-R
DPLSW3-L
DPLSW2-R
DPLSW3-R
DLM-L DLM-R
Figure 2-1-12 Paper level detection system block diagram
2-1-12
2BC/D
(3) Paper feed from the bypass table

The bypass table holds up to 100 sheets of paper at one time.
the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on, unlocking the bypass stopper and lowering the bypass forwarding pulley until it
comes into contact with the paper. This conveys paper placed on the bypass table to the bypass upper and lower paper
feed pulleys, is primary paper fed by the rotation of the bypass forwarding pulley and is conveyed to the bypass upper
and lower paper feed pulleys.
Also during paper feed, the bypass lower paper feed pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the
torque limiter.
Figure 2-1-13 Bypass paper feed section
1 Upper bypass guide 8 Bypass lift guide

2 Bypass upper paper feed pulley 9 Lower bypass housing
3 Bypass paper switch (BYPPSW) 0 Bypass lower paper feed pulley
4 Bypass forwarding pulley ! Bypass solenoid (BYPSOL)
5 Bypass table @ Bypass tray switch (BYPTSW)
6 Bypass paper size length switch (BYPPLSW) # Bypass stopper
7 Bypass paper size width switch (BYPPWSW)
EPCB
CN9-B3 BYP
CN9-B8 SOL BYPPLSW
CN9-B5
BYP
CN18-A6 RCL PSW
BYP
PFCL
CN3-B2 BYP BYPTSW
CN18-A1 RSW PWSW
FCL1-H PFSW1
CN18-A4
FCL1-L
CN20-4
CN9-A6, A7, A8
CN9-A5
CN9-A2
Figure 2-1-14 Bypass paper feed section block diagram
2-1-13
2BC/D
Start key: On
RSW: ON
Image ready
Secondary paper
feed start
PFSW1: OFF
RSW: OFF
ESW: OFF
ESW
PFSW1
RSW
300 ms
100 ms
BYPPFCL
100 ms
90 ms
BYPSOL
10 ms 58 ms
FCL1-L
166 ms 86 ms
RCL
380 ms
PFM
Bypass, paper size: A4
Timing chart 2-1-4 Paper feed from the bypass
a When the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns on, thereby starting paper feed.
b 100 ms after the start key is pressed, the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on. The bypass stopper is unlocked and
the bypass forwarding pulley lowers to forward the paper.
c 300 ms after the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on and the
bypass forwarding pulley and bypass upper and lower paper feed pulleys rotate to start primary paper feed. 90 ms
later, feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turns on.
d 90 ms after the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on, the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns off to lower the bypass lift
guide to return to the paper feed standby position.
e 100 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) and feed low
clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turn off to complete the primary paper feed.
f 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed. 10
ms later, feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on.
g 86 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns off to complete the
e 380 ms after the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns off to complete the paper
feed.
2-1-14
2BC/D
2-1-2 Main charging section

The main charging section consists of the main charger unit, drum, drum surface potential sensor (DSPS), and so on.
The drum is electrically charged to form an image.
The drum surface potential sensor (DSPS) reads the drum surface potential and outputs data for surface potential
correction to the engine PCB (EPCB).
The main charger unit has the main charger cleaning motor (MCCM), main charger cleaning pad, and so on for
automatic cleaning of the charger wire.
1 Main charger base

2 Main charger shield
3 Main charger grid
4 Main charger wire
(Tungsten wire)
5 Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM)
6 Drum
7 Drum surface potential sensor (DSPS)
Figure 2-1-15 Main charging section
1 Main charger rear housing

2 Main charger wire (Tungsten wire)
3 Main charger front housing
4 Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM)
5 Main charger base
6 Main charger grid
7 Grid cleaning pad
8 Main charger cleaning pads
Figure 2-1-16 Main charger unit
2-1-15
2BC/D
DSPS
CN14-9
MCCM FWD REM
CN4-5
MCCM REV REM
CN4-6
HVTPCB MCCM
CN12-10 G CONT
CN1-10
MC ALM Main charger
CN12-11 CN1-11 wire
MC REM
CN12-12 CN1-12
Grid
Drum DSPS
EPCB
Figure 2-1-17 Main charging section block diagram

Start key: On
(Output off trigger)

ESW: OFF
ESW
500 ms
250 ms
IFM
100 ms Potential
100 ms stage
MC REM dropping
Timing chart 2-1-5 Main charging
a 250 ms after the start key is pressed, the image formation motor (IFM) turns on to start machine drive.
b 100 ms after the image formation motor (IFM) turns on, the MC REM signal turns on, high voltage is applied to the
main charger from the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) and main charging starts.
c The potential stage dropping control of main charging is triggered when the eject switch (ESW) turns off.
d 500 ms after the end of potential stage dropping control of main charging, the image formation motor (IFM) turns off.
2-1-16
2BC/D
2-1-3 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unit
for printing.
Figure 2-1-18 Optical section
1 Mirror 1 frame ! Scanner motor (SM)

2 Mirror 2 frame @ Scanner home position switch
3 Mirror 1 (SHPSW)
4 Mirror 2 # Original detection switch (ODSW)
5 Mirror 3 $ Original size detection sensor 1
6 Exposure lamp (EL) (OSDS1)
7 Image scanning unit % Original size detection sensor 2
8 Lens (OSDS2)*
9 Laser scanner unit (LSU) ^ ISU cover
0 CCD PCB (CCDPCB)
*: For inch models only.
2-1-17
2BC/D
(1) Original scanning

The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the image
scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
The mirror 1 and 2 frame travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side.
The speed of the mirror 2 frame is half the speed of the mirror 1 frame. When the DF is used, the mirror 1 and 2 frame
stop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning.
Original
SHPSW SM
EL CCDPCB OSDS1 OSDS2 ODSW
CN4-2
CN1-3 CN7-3
CN7-6
CN1-14 CN5-2
CN2-1, 3, 4, 6
SMPCB
CN1-15
CN1-16
CN1-2
CN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN2-1 CN1-5 CN3-2
INPCB
CN2-4 CN1-6 CN3-1
SM ENABLE
EL ON REM
SM CWB
SM RET
SM CLK
SHPSW
OSDS2
OSDS1
ODSW
CN14
CN7 CN15
LSU CN8
CN9
MPCB
CN10-15
CN10-14
CN10-13
CN10-12
CN10-11
CN10-10
CN10-3
CN10-2
CN10-1
Drum CN1 CN1 EPCB
Figure 2-1-19 Optical section block diagram
2-1-18
2BC/D
Start key
410 P
Fwd. rotation
SM 414 P
Rev. rotation
9921 P 110 P
SHPSW
FVSYNC signal
Manual copy density control, copy paper: A3/11" × 17", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 2-1-6 Scanner operation
a When the start key is pressed, the scanner motor (SM) reverses for 410 pulses and then rotates forward.
b 414 pulses after the scanner motor rotates forward, the FVSYNC signal turns on for 9921 pulses for scanning.
c The scanner motor (SM) reverses to return the scanner to the home position.
d 110 pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) turns off, and the
scanner stops at its home position.
(2) Image printing

The image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as image
printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a
latent image on the drum surface.
• Laser scanner unit
BD sensor mirror
Collimator lenses
Lens 3 Beam spritter
Oject mirror
Laser diodes (LD)

Cylindrical correcting lens
Glass dust filter
LD control PCB
Lens 1
Polygon mirror
BD sensor Polygon motor (PM)
Lens 2
Motor drive PCB
Figure 2-1-20 Laser scanner unit (1)
2-1-19
2BC/D
Drum
Figure 2-1-21 Laser scanner unit (2)
1 Laser diodes: Generate the laser beams that form the latent image on the drum.
2 Collimator lenses: Collimate the diffused laser beams emitted from the laser diodes into cylindrical beams.
3 Beam splitter: Refracts the laser beam emitted from one of the laser diodes so that it becomes parallel to the other
laser beam, and sends those two beams to lens 1.
4 Polygon mirror: 6-faced mirror that rotates at approximately 34251.969 rpm. Each face reflects the laser beams
toward the drum in the horizontal (main) scan direction. The motion of the beams across the drum forms one scan
line.
5 Lenses 1, 2, 3 and 4: Maintain scanning speed across the drum and beam diameters constant. These lenses also
correct the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror so that the focal plane of the laser beams are always on the drum.
6 Object mirror: Reflects the laser beams onto the drum surface.
7 BD sensor mirror: Directs a laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the horizontal sync signal.
8 Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror.
9 BD sensor: Detects the laser beam reflected by BD sensor mirror, and sends the detection signal to the main PCB
(MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) uses this signal to determine the horizontal scanning signal timing.
0 Glass dust filter: Prevents dust from entering the unit.
The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-22.

Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction is
provided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.
The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-23. Electrical
charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.
The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.
Main
scanning
direction
70 µ m
Auxilary
scanning
direction
65 µ m
: laser beam is on
Figure 2-1-22 Figure 2-1-23
2-1-20
2BC/D
2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner hopper unit.
The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and the
developing spirals that agitate the developer.
The toner hopper unit consists of the toner conveying spiral, toner draw spiral, and hopper agitation spring, turns on/off
the toner feed motor according to the toner sensor output voltage, and supplies toner in the toner hopper to the
developing unit. (The toner hopper unit is attached to the developing unit side (machine front.
Developing unit
Toner hopper unit
Developing
unit
1 Doctor blade 9 Toner feed motor (TFM)

2 Developing magnet 0 Toner agitation motor (TAM)
3 Left developing spiral ! Toner level detection sensor (TLDS)
4 Middle developing spiral @ Toner draw spiral
5 Right developing spiral # Toner conveying spiral
6 Toner sensor (TNS) $ Toner feed spiral
7 Developing housing % Toner feed case
8 Developing unit upper seal
Figure 2-1-24 Developing section
2-1-21
2BC/D
(1) Formation of magnetic brush

The developing magnet consists of a magnet roller with five poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller around
the magnet roller entrains developer, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller that is used
for developing. The height of the magnet brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the
position of the poles on the magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade. A developing bias voltage generated by
the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing magnet to provide image contrast.
Doctor blade
Developing magnet
A: 0.53 ± 0.05mm (between the doctor blade and the developing magnet)
S2
74.5
85.5 Poles on the developing magnet
N3
N1: 830 × 10-4
N1 N2: 630 × 10-4
N3: 450 × 10-4
59 S1: 860 × 10-4
S2: 700 × 10-4
S1 43.5
N2
Figure 2-1-25 Forming a magnetic brush
2-1-22
2BC/D
CN4-18
Toner hopper unit
TFM
CN4-1, 2
TDLS
TAM
CN4-3, 4
Drum EPCB
TNS
OUT
CN4-8
TONER CONTROL
CN4-10
Developing HVTPCB
bias DB CONT
CN1-8 CN12-8
DB REM
CN1-9 CN12-9
Figure 2-1-26 Developing section block diagram

Start key: On
IFM 150 ms
600 ms
DB REM
Timing chart 2-1-7 Operation of developing bias
a 150 ms after the start key is pressed, the DB REM signal turns on to apply the developing bias to the developing
roller.
b 600 ms after the image forming motor (IFM) turns off, the DB REM signal turns off.
2-1-23
2BC/D
(2) Toner density control

To maintain the toner density of the developer constant, the toner sensor (TNS) and the toner level sensor (TLDS) detect
the toner density and toner level in the toner hopper respectively. Based on the detection result, toner is fed by turning
the toner feed motor (TFM) and toner agitation motor (TAM) on and off.
(2-1) Toner empty detection by the toner sensor

Toner density control is performed using as the reference the toner control level (FIRST TARGET) set automatically
when maintenance item U130 is run after loading developer.
Toner sensor
Toner request message
output voltage (V)
Toner being fed message (toner replenishment for toner hopper)
5 min
Toner empty detection level
Toner empty reset level
Toner control level

(FIRST TARGET in U130)
Copying
Figure 2-1-27 Toner density control
a When the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner control level, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to feed
toner.
b When the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner empty detection level, the toner being fed message appears
and forced toner feed is conducted for up to 5 minutes.
c When the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner empty reset level, the toner being fed message disappears.
d When the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner control level, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns off and toner
feed ends.
e If the toner sensor output voltage does not fall to the toner empty detection level after 5-minute's forced toner feed, the
toner request message appears and copies are made based on the conditions set in maintenance item U258.
When toner is replenished into the toner hopper and the toner level sensor (TLDS) turns on, the toner feed motor
(TFM) turns on to feed toner. The toner being fed message appears.
f When the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner empty reset level, the toner being fed message disappears.
g When the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner control level, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns off, and the
toner feed ends.
2-1-24
2BC/D
(2-2) Controlling the toner feed motor and toner agitation motor
The toner feed motor (TFM) and toner agitation motor (TAM) are turned on and off based on the toner sensor output
voltage as follows:
• Under normal conditions

When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control level
Toner feed motor (TFM): Turned on for 0.5 s and turned off for 1.5 s
Toner agitation motor (TAM): Turned on for 1 s and turned off for 1 s
When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control level plus 20
Toner agitation motor (TAM): Turned on for 0.5 s and turned off for 0.5 s
Toner feed motor (TFM): Continuously turned on
Toner agitation motor (TAM): Continuously turned on
• During toner feed

When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner empty detection level (toner feed performed when the level
of toner in the toner hopper drops abruptly)
Toner feed motor (TFM): Continuously turned on
Toner agitation motor (TAM): Continuously turned on
Toner feed motor (TFM): Turned on for 1 s and turned off for 1 s
(2-3) Toner empty detection by the toner level sensor

When the setting of maintenance item U136 is "ON," the toner level sensor (TLDS) detects toner empty in the toner
hopper.
1 .When the toner in the toner hopper is exhausted and the toner level sensor (TLDS) turns off, toner empty is detected
and the toner request message appears.
2 .When the number of copies made after the toner level sensor (TLDS) has turned off reaches the limit set in
maintenance item U258, the toner request message and a message indicating that copying is disabled appear.
3 .When toner is replenished into the toner hopper and the toner level sensor (TLDS) turns on, the toner empty
detection is reset and toner feed motor (TFM) starts toner feed.
2-1-25
2BC/D
(2-4) Toner control level absolute humidity correction

The results of toner density detection vary with the temperature and humidity due to their influence on the toner sensor
output characteristic. Therefore, the toner control level is corrected based on the absolute humidity level detected by the
humidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB).
Toner control level (V)
3.5
0
0 1.4 3.1 11.4 22.7 35.8
Absolute humidity (g/m3)
The above correction is for when “TARGET” of U154 is 154.
Figure 2-1-28 Toner control level absolute humidity correction
2-1-26
2BC/D
2-1-5 Transfer/separation and conveying sections

The transfer/separation section consists of the transfer charger unit and the drum separation claw. The transfer charger
unit consists of the transfer charger for transferring the toner image on the drum onto paper and the separation charger
for separating the paper from the drum. The transfer charger performs transfer charging by applying a high voltage
generated by the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) to both ends of the tungsten wire. The separation charger,
when an alternating voltage is applied from the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB), discharges it and neutralizes
the residual charge on the paper for which transfer is complete. The paper is therefore separated from the drum by its
own weight. The drum separation claw is used as auxiliary measures for separating securely the paper that has been
separated from the drum.
The paper conveying section consists of the paper conveying belt assembly, the paper conveying motor (PCM), and so
on. The paper that passes through the transfer/separation section is conveyed to the fixing section with the paper
conveying belt. Holes are provided on the paper conveying belt and the paper conveying fan motor (PCFM) attracts the
paper from under the paper conveying section.
Figure 2-1-29 Transfer/separation and conveying sections
1 Lower front transfer guide 7 Paper conveying belt

2 Transfer charger wire 8 Paper conveying roller
3 Separation charger wire 9 Paper conveying roller
4 Separation guide 0 Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM)
5 Drum separation claw ! Transfer charger shield
6 Transfer charger cleaning motor (TCCM)
PCFM REM
3-B4
Drum
EPCB HVTPCB
TC REM
12-3 CN1-3
TC CONT CN1-4
12-4 TCCM
SC REM
12-5 CN1-5 SC TC
SC CONT PCFM
12-6 CN1-6
SC/TC ALM
12-7 CN1-7
TCCM REV REM

CN3-B6
TCCM FWD REM
CN3-B7
Figure 2-1-30 Transfer/separation and conveying sections block diagram
2-1-27
2BC/D
Start key: On
Image ready
Secondary paper
feed start
RSW: OFF
RSW
ESW
166 ms 86 ms
RCL
PFM
344 ms
155 ms
TC REM
220 ms
SC REM
Timing chart 2-1-8 Transfer/separation operation
a When the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns on, which starts paper feed.
b 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed.
c 155 ms and 220 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, the TC REM signal and the SC REM signal turn on
respectively and the transfer charging and the separation charging start respectively.
d 344 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the TC REM and SC REM signals turn off to complete
transfer charging and separation charging.
2-1-28
2BC/D
2-1-6 Cleaning section

The copier employs a blade cleaning method with a cleaning brush. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade
and the cleaning brush which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer, the cleaning brush scraper that
removes toner from the cleaning brush, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner to the waste toner box.
After the transfer process is completed, residual toner on the drum surface is removed first by the rotation of the cleaning
brush and then by the cleaning blade.
The pre-cleaning lamps 1 and 2 (PCL1, PCL2) are provided on the front and rear ends of the drum respectively. The
LED light irradiates the drum ends to improve the cleaning performance on the drum ends.
Figure 2-1-31 Cleaning section
1 Cleaning blade 5 Cleaning spiral

2 Cleaning cover 6 Cleaning brush
3 Cleaning housing 7 Pre-cleaning lamps 1 and 2 (PCL1, PCL2)
4 Cleaning brush scraper 8 Cleaning blade pressure plate
EPCB
Drum
PCL2 REM PCL2

CN4-15
PCL1 REM
CN4-13
PCL1
Figure 2-1-32 Cleaning section
2-1-29
2BC/D
2-1-7 Charge erasing section

The main component of the charge erasing section is the cleaning lamp (CL).
The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of 45 LEDs (red) and removes residual charge from the drum surface.
Cleaning lamp
Figure 2-1-33 Charge erasing section
EPCB CL
CL REM
CN4-11
Drum
Figure 2-1-34 Charge erasing section block diagram

Start key: ON
IFM 150 ms
600 ms
CL
Timing chart 2-1-9 Charge erasing operation
a 150 ms after the start key is pressed, the cleaning lamp (CL) lights to remove the residual charge from the drum
surface.
b 600 ms after the image formation motor (IFM) turns off, the cleaning lamp (CL) turns off.
2-1-30
2BC/D
2-1-8 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in the figure.
When the paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer process, it passes through the gap between the press roller
and the heat roller, which is heated by fixing heaters M and S (FH-M and FH-S), where pressure is applied by the
pressure springs so that toner on the paper is melted and fused onto the paper.
When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller and the press roller by their separation
claws and is ejected out of the fixing section by the rotation of the fixing eject pulley and roller.
The fixing web roller in contact with the heat roller cleans the surface of the heat roller.
Figure 2-1-35 Fixing section
1 Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) 9 Lower fixing eject guide

2 Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) 0 Upper fixing eject guide
3 Fixing stay ! Heat roller separation claw
4 Lower front fixing guide @ Heat roller
5 Fixing housing # Fixing web roller
6 Lower cleaning roller $ Cleaning pressure roller
7 Press roller % Fixing heater S (FH-S)
8 Press roller separation claw ^ Fixing heater M (FH-M)
2-1-31
2BC/D
AC power source CN12-1

Phase FH-1
COM TB2 Noise control
LIVE TB1 filter circuit CN12-2 FH-2
CN9-2
FTS
CN9-1
PSPCB
TB3 PRY
MPCB EPCB
FH-M REM
Z CROSS SIG CN2-8 CN2-5
CN17-7 CN2-7 FH-S REM
CN2-9 CN2-6
CN1 CN1
Figure 2-1-36 Fixing section block diagram
Aging end
Copying enabled
fixing temperature 165°C/329°F
fixing temperature 185°C/365°F

MSW: ON
Primary stabilization
Secondary stabilization
2s
MSW
PRY
FH-M REM
3s
FH-S REM
PCM REM
PCM 250 ms
DB REM 150 ms 600 ms
CL REM
Timing chart 2-1-10 Fixing temperature control
a 2 s after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the power relay (PRY) turns on.
b 1 s after the power relay (PRY) turns on, fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on to heat the heat roller.
c When the fixing temperature reaches the primary stabilization temperature (165°C/329°F), the paper conveying motor
(PCM) turns on. 150 ms later, the DB REM signal and the cleaning lamp (CL) turn on, and 250 ms later, the paper
conveying motor (PCM) turns on to start aging.
e When the fixing temperature reaches the secondary stabilization temperature (185°C/365°F), fixing heater M (FH-M)
turns on and off to maintain the fixing control temperature at 185°C/365°F.
d 3 s after copying is enabled, the paper conveying motor (PCM) turns off. 600 ms later, the DB REM signal and the
cleaning lamp turn off and the aging ends.
2-1-32
2BC/D
2-1-9 Feedshift and eject sections

The feedshift and eject sections switch the paper path based on the copy mode and eject paper or convey the paper to
the duplex section.
For duplex copy mode, the paper for which copying on the rear side has been completed is conveyed to the duplex
section by the feedshift section operation. After the conveyed paper is inverted, it is fed again for front side copying.
1 Upper feedshift guide

2 Upper eject guide
3 Upper eject pulley
4 Eject roller
5 Feedshift guide
6 Lower left feedshift eject guide
7 Feedshift switch (FSSW)
8 Lower right feedshift roller
9 Lower right feedshift guide
0 Upper left feedshift roller
! Lower feedshift guide
@ Eject switch (ESW)
# Left middle feedshift guide
$ Right switchback guide
% Left switchback guide
^ Right switchback roller
& Left switchback roller
* Upper right switchback guide
( Face down eject switch
(FDESW)
) Eject pulley
⁄ Lower fixing eject roller
¤ Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
Figure 2-1-37 Feedshift and eject sections
EPCB
CN3-A2
FDESW
CN19-B6 ESW
CN3-A7
FSSOL
CN3-A8
FSSW
CN3-A5
Figure 2-1-38 Feedshift and eject sections block diagram
2-1-33
2BC/D
2-1-10 Duplex section
As paper is conveyed from the feedshift section into the duplex section, the switchback feedshift guide shifts the paper
path to switch-back the paper for refeeding or reverse side ejection. The paper is then conveyed to the feedshift and
eject section.
Figure 2-1-39 Duplex section
1 Duplex upper registration roller # Switchback feedshift guide

2 Duplex upper conveying roller $ Duplex refeed guide
3 Duplex upper eject roller % Duplex feedshift switch
4 Duplex upper confluence guide (DUPFSSW)
5 Duplex lower confluence guide ^ Refeed pulley
6 Duplex lower eject roller & Duplex upper entry guide
7 Duplex eject switch (DUPESW) * Duplex switchback pulley
8 Duplex lower conveying roller ( Duplex switchback roller
9 Duplex paper conveying switch 2 ) Duplex jam detection switch
(DUPPCSW2) (DUPJSW)
0 Refeed roller ⁄ Duplex pressure release solenoid
! Duplex lower registration roller (DUPPRSOL)
@ Duplex paper conveying switch 1 ¤ Duplex eject switching solenoid
(DUPPCSW1) (DUPESSOL)
2-1-34
2BC/D
DUPFSSW
DUPPRSOL
DUPJSW
DUPREVCL
DUPFWDCL
DUPESSOL DUPPCSW2
DUPESW
DUPPCSW1
DUPPRSOL P
DUPPRSOL A
DUPESSOL P
DUPESSOL A
CN6-3
CN6-7
CN6-8
CN6-4
CN6-12
CN6-11
CN6-5
CN6-2
CN6-9
CN6-10
CN6-6
EPCB
Figure 2-1-40 Duplex section block diagram
2-1-35
2BC/D
Secondary paper
feed start
ESW: On
DUPFSSW: On
ESW: Off
DUPFSSW: Off
DUPJSW: On
ESW: Off
ESW
DUPJSW
DUPFSSW
RCL
500 ms 90 ms
FSSOL
30 ms
DUPPRSOL
730 ms
DUPESSOL
DUPFWDCL
100 ms 120 ms
DUPREVCL
50 ms
Timing chart 2-1-11 Duplex copying operation
a When copying onto the reverse side, 500 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, the feedshift solenoid
(FSSOL) turns on, operating the conveying shift guide to switch the paper path to the duplex unit.
b When the eject switch (ESW) turns on, the duplex eject switching solenoid (DUPESSOL) turns on to operate the
switchback feedshift guide.
c When the duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) turns on, the duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) turns on, rotating
the duplex switchback roller in the forward direction to convey paper to the duplex section.
d 90 ms after the eject switch (ESW) turns off, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns off.
e 100 ms after the duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) turns off, the duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) turns off.
f 50 ms after the duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) turns off, the duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL) turns on
to rotate the duplex switchback roller in the reverse direction.
g 30 ms after the paper enters the duplex section and the duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW) turns on, the duplex
pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL) turns on and the duplex switchback pulley lowers. The paper is then
switched back by the duplex switchback pulley and duplex switchback roller and re-fed by the refeed roller.
h 120 ms after the duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL) turns on, the duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL)
turns off and the duplex switchback roller stops.
i 730 ms after the duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW) turns on, the duplex pressure release solenoid
(DUPPRSOL) turns off.
j When copying onto the front face is complete and the eject switch (ESW) turns off, the duplex eject switching
solenoid (DUPESSOL) turns off.
2-1-36
2BC/D
2-1-11 DF
(1) Original feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts shown in Figure. An original placed on the original table is conveyed to the
original switchback section or the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-41 Original feed section
1 Original table 9 DF registration roller

2 DF forwarding pulleys 0 DF registration guide
3 DF original feed pulley ! Original set switch (OSSW)
4 DF separation pulley @ Original feed switch (OFSW)
5 DF original feed upper guide # Original feed clutch (OFCL)
6 DF original feed lower guide $ Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)
7 Original stopper % Original feed lift
8 DF registration pulley
OFCL OSSW
OFSW
OFM
OFSOL
CN5-B12 -
CN5-B1 -
CN5-B13
CN6-B5
CN5-A5
CN6-B2
CN5-B6
DFDPCB
Figure 2-1-42 Original feed section block diagram
2-1-37
2BC/D
(1-1) Original feed timing
10 ms 150 ms
OFSOL A
150 ms
OFSOL R 200 ms
OFCL
Fwd. rotation
OFM Off
Rev. rotation 298 P* 20 ms
OFSW
OSBSW
OCM
DFTSW
*Burst of OFM pulses
Timing chart 2-1-12 Original feed (in simple-sided original mode)
a The OFSOL A signal goes high for 10 ms and then turns off for 200 ms. It goes high again for 150 ms and the original
feed solenoid (OFSOL) turns on, raising the original feed lift to convey the original forward.
b 298 OFM pulses after the leading edge of the original turns the original feed switch (OFSW) on, the original feed
clutch (OFCL) and original feed motor (OFM) turn off. 20 ms later, the rotation of the motor switches to the reverse
direction and secondary original feed is performed by rotation of the DF registration roller.
c Simultaneously as the trailing edge of the original turns the original feed switch (OFSW) off, the original feed motor
(OFM) turns off.
d After ejection of the original, as the original conveying motor (OCM) turns off, the OFSOL R signal turns on for 150
ms and the original feed solenoid (OFSOL) turns off.
2-1-38
2BC/D
(2) Original switchback section

The original switchback section consists of the parts shown in Figure. The original from the original feed section or
original conveying section is reversed and conveyed to the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-43 Original switchback section
1 Switchback pulley
2 Switchback roller
3 Switchback feedshift guide
4 Left switchback guide
5 Switchback guide
6 Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
7 Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL)
8 Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL)
SBPSOL SBFSSOL
OSBSW
CN5-A2 -
CN5-A3
CN6-A5
CN5-B8
DFDPCB
Figure 2-1-44 Original switchback section block diagram
2-1-39
2BC/D
(2-1) Operation of original switchback

In the double-sided original mode, the switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns on, changing the position of the
switchback feedshift guide. This switches the path of the original to the original switchback section to where the original
is fed.
The switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) then turns off, allowing the switchback feedshift guide to return to the
original position by which the path of the original is switched back to the original conveying section. The now reversed
original is carried to the original conveying section and the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, releasing
the switchback pulley to prevent an original jam in the original switchback section.
Switchback
pulley
Switchback feedshift guide
Figure 2-1-45
2-1-40
2BC/D
(3) Original conveying section

The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in Figure. Synchronized with the copier scanning operation,
the original is conveyed across the slit glass and ejected when scanning is complete.
In the double-sided original mode, the eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) turns on, moving the eject feedshift guide to
switch the path of the original. When the scanning of the first face (reverse face) of the original is complete, the original is
conveyed to the original switchback section again.
Figure 2-1-46 Original conveying section
1 Upper original conveying pulley 9 Original conveying guide

2 Upper original conveying roller 0 Eject feedshift guide
3 Lower original conveying roller ! Upper eject guide
4 Front scanning pulley @ Lower eject guide
5 Middle original conveying roller # Slit glass (copier)
6 Middle original conveying pulley $ DF timing switch (DFTSW)
7 Eject pulley % Eject feedshift solenoid
8 Eject roller (EFSSOL)
OCM
EFSSOL
DFTSW
CN5-A8 -
CN5-A13
CN6-B14
CN5-A7
DFDPCB
Figure 2-1-47 Original conveying section block diagram
2-1-41
2BC/D
(3-1) Original switchback/conveying timing
Scanning speed
Fwd. rotation 100 ms
OFM Off
Rev. rotation 298 P*1 30 ms
OFSW 20 ms
SBFSSOL
135 P*1
SBPSOL A 78 P*2
SBPSOL R
OSBSW
Scanning speed
OCM
EFSSOL
DFTSW
*1 Burst of OFM pulses

*2 Burst of OCM pulses
Timing chart 2-1-13 Reversing the first face of the original
a During primary original feed, when the original feed switch (OFSW) turns on, the switchback feedshift solenoid
(SBFSSOL) also turns on, changing the position of the switchback feedshift guide. This switches the path of the
original to the original switchback section.
b 298 OFM pulses plus 20 ms after the original feed switch (OFSW) turns on, the rotation of the original feed motor
(OFM) switches to the reverse direction and the original is conveyed to the switchback section by the rotation of the
switchback roller.
c Simultaneously as the original feed switch (OFSW) turns off, the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns on to
operate the switchback pulley.
d When the trailing edge of the original turns the original switchback switch (OSBSW) off, the switchback feedshift
solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns off, the switchback feedshift guide returns to the original position.
e 135 OFM pulses after the original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off. 100
ms later, the original feed motor (OFM) rotates forward, switching the rotational direction of the switchback roller. The
original in the original switchback section is then reversed and conveyed to the original conveying section.
f Simultaneously as the original feed motor (OFM) starts rotating forward, the original conveying motor (OCM) turns on
to convey the original onto the slit glass. The eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) simultaneously turns on, changing
the position of the eject feedshift guide. This switches the path of the original to the original switchback section.
g When the original is conveyed onto the slit glass, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns on. 78 OCM pulses later, the
switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL).
h 30 ms after the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off.
2-1-42
2BC/D
Scanning request signal: On

Scanning speed
Fwd. rotation
OFM
Rev. rotation 327 P*1 100 ms
OFSW
100 ms
SBFSSOL 135 P*1
SBPSOL 30 ms
362 P*1 78 P*2
SBPSOL 2252 P*2 + 30 ms
OSBSW
Scanning speed
30 ms
OCM
EFSSOL
DFTSW
*1 Burst of OFM pulses

*2 Burst of OCM pulses
Timing chart 2-1-14 Reversing of the second face of the original and ejection
a 362 OFM pulses after the scanning of the first face (reverse face) of the original completes and the DF timing switch
(DFTSW) turns off, the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns on, operationg the switchback pulley.
b When the trailing edge of the original turns the original switchback switch (OSBSW) off, the eject feedshift solenoid
(EFSSOL) turns off and the eject feedshift guide returns to the original position, switching the path of the original to
the eject section. Simultaneously,
the switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns off and the switchback feedshift guide returns to the original
position.
c 30 ms after the original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off, the original conveying motor (OCM) turns off.
d 135 OFM pulses after the original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off.
e 100 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the motor starts rotating forward, switching the rotational
direction of the switchback roller. The original in the original switchback section is then reversed and conveyed to the
original conveying section.
f 327 OFM pulses plus 100 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the motor starts rotating forward again and
the original conveying motor (OCM) turns on simultaneously, conveying the original onto the slit glass.
g 78 OFM pulses after the original is conveyed onto the slit glass and the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns on, the
switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off.
h 30 ms after the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off.
i When the scanning request signal turns on, scanning of the second face (front face) of the original starts.
j 2252 OCM pulses plus 30 ms after scanning of the second face (front face) of the original completes and the DF
timing switch (DFTSW) turns off, the original conveying motor (OCM) turns off, completing the ejection of the original.
2-1-43
;;
2BC/D
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PCBs
9 7 8
5
10
;;
4
;;
6
3
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PCBs
1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs and electrical components.
2. Engine PCB (EPCB) ..................................... Controls electrical components and optional devices.
3. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ........................ Generates 24 V DC, +12 V DC, 3.4 V DC and 5 V DC; controls fixing
heaters M and S.
4. High voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) .... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer.
5. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) ................................... Reads the image off originals.
6. Humidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB) ................ Detects absolute humidity.
7. Operation unit left PCB (OPCB-L) ................ Controls touch panel and LCD indication.
8. Operation unit right PCB (OPCB-R) ............. Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
9. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.
10. Scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) ....................... Controls the scanning section.
2-2-1
;;;;
2BC/D
(2) Switches and sensors
;;
;;;;;
; ;
41
49 50
42
2
1
53
;;;
;; ;
52 4 5
51
7
6
17 15
8 9
16
29 10
30
;;;;
;;;
28
26 27 18 11
22
3
47 45 43 19
12
23
48
46
13
25
36 21 39
40 24 20
32 14
37 Machine front
33
31
38 34
Machine inside
35
44 Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.

2. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.
3. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the right cover is opened.
4. Bypass paper switch (BYPPSW) ................. Detects the presence of paper on the bypass tray.
5. Bypass paper size length switch
(BYPPLSW) ................................................. Detects the length of paper on the bypass tray.
6. Bypass paper size width switch
(BYPPWSW) ................................................ Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray.
7. Bypass tray switch (BYPTSW) ..................... Detects a multi-bypass extension is pulled.
8. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
9. Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) ...................... Detects a paper misfeed in the converging section.
10. Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) ...................... Controls feed high/low clutch 1 and detects a paper misfeed.
11. Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) ...................... Controls feed high/low clutch 2 and detects a paper misfeed.
12. Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) ...................... Controls feed clutch 3 and detects a paper misfeed.
15. Eject switch (ESW) ....................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.
16. Feed shift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the feed shift section.
2-2-2
2BC/D
17. Face down eject switch (FDESW) ............... Detects a paper misfeed in the face down eject section.
18. Lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) ........................... Detects the drawer 1 lift reaching the upper limit.
19. Lift limit switch 2 (LILSW2) ........................... Detects the drawer 2 lift reaching the upper limit.
20. Deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) ................ Detects the drawer 3 lift reaching the upper limit.
21. Deck lift limit switch 2 (DLILSW2) ................ Detects the drawer 4 lift reaching the upper limit.
22. Paper switch 1 (PSW1) ................................ Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 1.
23. Paper switch 2 (PSW2) ................................ Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 2.
24. Deck paper switch 1 (DPSW1) ..................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 3.
25. Deck paper switch 2 (DPSW2) ..................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 4.
26. Duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) .............................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex paper conveying section.
27. Duplex paper conveying switch 2
(DUPPCSW2) .............................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex paper conveying section.
28. Duplex eject switch (DUPESW) .................... Detects a paper misfeed in the switch back eject section.
29. Duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW) ...... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex tray section.
30. Duplex feed shift switch (DUPFSSW) .......... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex feed shift section.
31. Deck right switch (DSW-R) ........................... Detects the presence of drawer 3.
32. Deck left switch (DSW-L) .............................. Detects the presence of drawer 4.
33. Deck right paper level switch 1
(DPLSW1-R) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 3.
36. Deck left paper level switch 1
(DPLSW1-L) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 4.
39. Deck paper conveying switch 1
(DPCSW1) ................................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the deck paper conveying section.
40. Deck paper conveying switch 2
(DPCSW2) ................................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the deck paper conveying section.
41. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) ..... Detects the optical system in the home position.
42. Original detection switch (ODSW) ................ Operates the original size detection sensor.
43. Waste toner detection sensor (WTDS) ......... Detects the waste toner over flow in the waste toner box.
44. Waste toner box switch (WTBSW) ............... Detects the weight of the waste toner box.
45. Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U) .......... Detects the width of paper in the drawer 1.
46. Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L) ........... Detects the width of paper in the drawer 2.
47. Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U) .......... Detects the length of paper in the drawer 1.
48. Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L) .......... Detects the length of paper in the drawer 2.
49. Original size detection sensor 1
(OSDS1) ...................................................... Detects the size of the original.
50. Original size detection sensor 2
(OSDS2)*1 ................................................... Detects the size of the original.
51. Toner level detection sensor (TLDS) ............ Detects the toner level in the toner hopper.
52. Toner sensor (TNS) ...................................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
53. Drum surface potential sensor (DSPS) ........ Detects the drum surface potential.
*1: For inch models only.
2-2-3
;
2BC/D
(3) Motors
;;;
5
18 17
13 1
16
19 2 6
14
15 3
;;
9
20
21
10
4
Machine front
12 11 Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Image formation motor (IFM) ....................... Drives image formation section.

2. Paper conveying motor (PCM) ..................... Drives paper conveying section and fixing section.
3. Paper feed motor (PFM) ............................... Drives paper feed section.
4. Deck drive motor (DDM) ............................... Drives deck paper feed section.
5. Scanner motor (SM) ..................................... Drives the optical system.
6. Image formation fan motor (IFFM) ............... Cools the image formation section.
7. Toner feed motor (TFM) ................................ Replenishes toner.
8. Toner agitation motor (TAM) ......................... Agitates toner.
9. Upper lift motor (LM-U) ................................ Drives drawer 1 lift.
10. Lower lift motor (LM-L) ................................. Drives drawer 2 lift.
11. Deck right lift motor (DLM-R) ........................ Drives drawer 3 lift.
12. Deck left lift motor (DLM-L) .......................... Drives drawer 4 lift.
13. Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM) ......... Cleans main charger wire and grid.
14. Transfer charger cleaning motor (TCCM) ..... Cleans transfer charger wire.
15. Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM) ............. Attracts paper towards the conveying belt.
16. Cooling fan motor (CFM) ............................. Cools the machine interior.
17. Eject fan motor 1 (EFM1) ............................ Cools the machine interior (around the fixing unit).
18. Eject fan motor 2 (EFM2) ............................ Cools the machine interior (around the fixing unit).
19. Fixing fan motor (FFM) ................................. Cools the machine interior (around the fixing unit).
20. HDD fan motor (HDDFM) ............................. Cools the machine interior (Hard disk drive).
21. Power supply fan motor (PSFM) .................. Cools the machine interior (around the power supply unit).
2-2-4
2BC/D
(4) Clutches and solenoids
;; ;
;
19
18
20
3
4
2
5
1
7
6
17
;;;
21 10
16 15
8
11
13
9
14 12
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-4 Clutches and Solenoids
1. Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) ......... Primary paper feed from the bypass tray.
2. Registration clutch (RCL) ............................. Secondary paper feed.
3. Feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) ........................ Controls the drive of upper feed roller.
4. Feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) .......................... Controls the drive of upper feed roller.
5. Feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) ........................ Controls the drive of lower feed roller.
6. Feed low clutch 2 (FCL2-L) .......................... Controls the drive of lower feed roller.
7. Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) .................................... Controls the drive of vertical conveying roller A.
8. Feed clutch 4 (FCL4) .................................... Controls the drive of vertical conveying roller B.
9. Feed clutch 5 (FCL5) .................................... Controls the drive of vertical conveying roller C and D.
10. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ........................ Primary paper feed from the drawer 1.
14. Deck feed clutch (DFCL) .............................. Controls the drive of deck feed roller.
15. Duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) ...... Conveys paper forward.
16. Duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL) ......... Conveys paper in the reverse direction.
17. Bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) ......................... Operates the bypass forwarding pulley.
18. Feed shift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feed shift guide.
19. Fixing web solenoid (FWEBSOL) ................ Drives the fixing web roller.
20. Duplex pressure release solenoid
(DUPPRSOL) ............................................... Operates the duplex switch back pulley.
21. Duplex eject switching solenoid
(DUPESSOL) ............................................... Operates the switch back feedshift guide.
2-2-5
;
;;
2BC/D
(5) Other electrical components
;;
1
13
5
12
2
76 9
3,4
8
; ;;
10
;;
14
Machine front
Machine inside
11
Machine rear
15 16
Figure 2-2-5 Other electrical components
1. Exposure lamp (EL) ...................................... Exposes originals.

2. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.
3. Pre-cleaning lamp 1 (PCL1) .........................
4. Pre-cleaning lamp 2 (PCL2) .........................
5. Laser scanner unit (LSU)
• Polygon motor (PM) ................................... Drives the polygon mirror.
• Laser diode (LD) ........................................ Generates the laser beam.
6. Fixing heater M (FH-M) ................................ Heats the heat roller.
7. Fixing heater S (FH-S) ................................. Heats the heat roller.
8. Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) ......................... Prevents overheating in the fixing section.
9. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
10. Hard disk drive (HDD) .................................. Enables printing, special purpose copying and Box management
function.
11. Power relay (PRY) ........................................ Turns the AC power and 24 V DC power supplies to the fixing section on
and off.
12. Total counter (TC) ......................................... Displays the total number of copies produced.
13. Scanner dehumidify heater (SH)* ................ Dehumidifies the scanner unit.
14. Dehumidify heater (DH1) ............................. Dehumidifies the drawer 1 and 2 section.
15. Dehumidify heater (DH2) ............................. Dehumidifies the drawer 3 section.
16. Dehumidify heater (DH3) ............................. Dehumidifies the drawer 4 section.
*: Option
2-2-6
2BC/D
(6) DF PCBs
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-6 DF PCBs
1. DF driver PCB (DFDPCB) ........................... Controls electrical components of the DF.

2. Original set LED PCB (OSLEDPCB) ........... Indicates presence of originals on the DF or an original jam.
2-2-7
2BC/D
(7) DF switches and sensors
6
5
y;
;
4
3
2
Machine front
8
Machine inside Machine rear

7
Figure 2-2-7 DF switches and sensors
1. DF safety switch 1 (DFSSW1) ..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF is opened; resets original misfeed
detection.
2. DF safety switch 2 (DFSSW2) ..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF original switchback cover is
opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. Original set switch (OSSW) ......................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. Original feed switch (OFSW) ....................... Detects primary original feed end timing.
5. Original switchback switch (OSBSW) .......... Detects an original misfeed in the original switchback section.
6. DF timing switch (DFTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
7. Original size length switch (OSLSW) ........... Detects the length of the original.
8. Original size width switch (OSWSW) ........... Detects the width of the original.
2-2-8
2BC/D
(8) DF motors
;;
1
;;
2
Figure 2-2-8 DF motors
1. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the original feed and switchback sections.
2. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying section.
2-2-9
2BC/D
(9) DF clutches and solenoids
;;
5
4
2 3
1
Figure 2-2-9 DF clutches and solenoids
1. Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) ................... Operates the paper feed lift.
2. Switchback feedshift solenoid
(SBFSSOL) .................................................. Operates the switchback feedshift guide.
3. Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) .............. Operates the eject feedshift guide.
4. Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) .... Operates the switchback pulley.
5. Original feed clutch (OFCL) ......................... Controls the drive of the DF original feed pulley.
2-2-10
2BC/D
2-3-1 Power source PCB
Power source PCB
AC input
Noise D1
Noise Transformer
filter filter
circuit circuit
F1 L1 L2 Rectifier
circuit C22
MSW Q3 Q4
R34
Zero-cross
circuit R35
PC3
A PC1
L4 PWM control
B PC2 circuit IC1
TR1 PT1
FH-S Z CROSS SIG

TR2 PT2
FH-M
FH-S REM
FH-M REM
DH
TR3 PT3
DH3 DH2 DH1 SLEEP SIG

D13 D14 Q5 24 V DC
24 V DC
D12 output
circuit GND
IC2
L6
A 5.2 V PSFM 5.2 V DC

DC
output GND
circuit
IC3 12 V DC 12 V DC
Over-
output
voltage/ GND
circuit IC5
over-
B current
detection 3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC
circuit
output GND
circuit IC4
Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram
2-3-1
2BC/D
The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator which converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC, 5.2 V DC, 3.3 V
DC and 12 V DC. It includes the components shown in Figure 2-3-1; noise filter circuits, a rectifier circuit, a PWM control
circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5.2 V DC output circuit, a 3.3 V DC output circuit, a 12 V DC output circuit, a fixing heater
control circuit, an overvoltage/overcurrent detection circuit.
The noise filter circuit, consisting mainly of noise filter circuits L1 and L2 in the power source section and capacitors,
attenuates external noise from the AC input and prevents switching noise generated by the power source circuit from
leaving the machine via the AC line. Choke coil L4 prevents the noise generated in the heater circuit when the heater turns
on from leaving the machine via the AC line.
The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input which has passed through the noise filter circuits L1 and L2 using the
diode bridge D1.
In the PWM control circuit, PWM controller IC1 turns FETs Q1 and Q2 on and off to convert DC voltage full-wave rectified via
diode bridge D1 and smoothed by electrolytic capacitor C22 to a high-frequency voltage, which is applied to the primary coil
of the transformer.
The 24 V DC output circuit smooths the current induced on the secondary coil of the transformer via diodes D12, D13 and
D14 and smoothing choke coil L6, providing a more stable 24 V DC through 24 V DC control circuit including IC2. It also
monitors the 24 V DC output status, which is fed back to PWM controller IC1 in the PWM control circuit via photocoupler
PC2. PWM controller IC1 controls the switching duty width of switching FETs Q3 and Q4 based on the output voltage status,
producing a stable 24 V DC output.
The 5.2 V DC output circuit receives 24 V DC from the 24 V DC control circuit and outputs a stable 5.2 V DC via DC/DC
converter controller IC3.
The 3.3 V DC output circuit receives 5.2 V DC from the 5.2 V DC control circuit and outputs a stable 3.3 V DC via regulator
IC IC4.
The 12 V DC output circuit receives 24 V DC from the 24 V DC control circuit and outputs a stable 12 V DC via DC/DC
converter controller IC5.
Abnormal rise of voltage for all DC outputs and overcurrent in 5.2 V DC and 12 V DC outputs are monitored by the
overvoltage/overcurrent detection circuit, and if any abnormal rise is detected, alarm signals are fed back to the PWM
control circuit IC1 via photocoupler PC1 instantly, by which means power supply is limited to the stand-by level. Overload of
the 24 V DC output is monitored by resistors R34 and R35 as the total sum of all DC output power. If any abnormal condition
is detected, the power supply is latched off. To recover the power supply, remove the cause of abnormality and turn the AC
input off and back on.
The fixing heater control circuit sends a zero-crossing signal from the zero-crossing circuit via the photocoupler PC3 to the
main PCB (MPCB). These signals are in turn converted into signals to control the on/off timing and phases, which are then
input to the power source PCB (PSPCB) as FH-M REM and FH-S REM signals. The phototriacs PT1 and PT2 are turned on
by these signals, and current flows through triacs TR1 and TR2 to turn the fixing heaters FH-M and FH-S on.
2-3-2
2BC/D
2-3-3
CN12
CN4
Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram

1 1 2
CN8
9
10 CN5 1 CN7 8
1 CN2
5 CN6
1
1 7 3
12 1
9 CN9
10 CN1 CN11 1
5
1
1
1
11
CN13 CN10
CN3
2BC/D
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

TB TB1 LIVE I Local voltage 120 V AC or 220-240 V AC
Connected TB2 COM I Local voltage 120 V AC or 220-240 V AC
to the AC TB3 LIVE OUT O Local voltage 120 V AC or 220-240 V AC via MSW
power plug
and power
relay.
CN1 2 24V O 24 V DC DC power source to PRY

Connected 3 24V O 24 V DC DC power source to PRY
to the 4 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for EPCB
power relay 5 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for MPCB
, engine 6 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for SDPCB
PCB, main 7 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for SDPCB
PCB, and 8 G(24V) - - Ground for EPCB
scanner 9 G(R24V) - - Ground for EPCB
drive PCB. 10 G(R24V) - - Ground for EPCB
CN2 2 P.G - - Ground for MPCB

Connected 3 P.G - - Ground for SDPCB
to the main 4 P.G - - Ground for SDPCB
PCB, 5 DH I 0 V/5.2 V DC DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*: On/Off
scanner 6 SLEEP SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Sleep mode signal: On/Off
drive PCB. 7 Z CROSS SIG O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse)
8 FH-M REM I 0 V/5.2 V DC FH-M: On/Off
9 FH-S REM I 0 V/5.2 V DC SH-M: On/Off
CN3 1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*

Connected 2 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*
to the 3 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*
finisher*, 4 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*
side deck*, 5 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for side deck*
DF driver 6 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for side deck*
PCB, and 7 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F202) for DFDPCB
operation 8 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F202) for DFDPCB
unit right 9 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for OPCB-R
PCB.
CN4 1 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*

Connected 2 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*
to the 3 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*
finisher*, 4 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*
side deck*, 7 P.G - Ground Ground for DFDPCB
and DF 8 P.G - Ground Ground for DFDPCB
driver PCB. 9 P.G - Ground Ground for side deck*
10 P.G - Ground Ground for side deck*
CN5 1 3.4V O 3.3 V DC Power supply for MPCB

Connected 2 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply (via fuse F301) for DFDPCB
to the main 3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply (via fuse F301) for DFDPCB
PCB, DF 4 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply (via fuse F301) for side deck*
driver PCB, 5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for TAMPCB*
tandem 6 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for SDPCB
printer 7 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB
PCB*, 8 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for EPCB
scanner 9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for EPCB
drive PCB, 10 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB
engine PCB 11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB
and side 12 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB
deck*.
*: Optional
2-3-4
2BC/D

CN6 1 S.G(3.4V) - Ground Ground for MPCB
Connected 2 S.G - Ground Ground for DFDPCB
to the main 3 S.G - Ground Ground for side deck*
PCB, DF 4 S.G - Ground Ground for SDPCB
driver PCB, 5 G(5V) - Ground Ground for MPCB
Tandem 6 S.G - Ground Ground for TAMPCB*
printer 7 G(5V) - Ground Ground for EPCB
PCB*, 8 S.G - Ground Ground for MPCB
engine 9 S.G - Ground Ground for MPCB
PCB, and 10 S.G - Ground Ground for MPCB
side deck*. 11 G(5V) - Ground Ground for MPCB
CN7 1 12V O 12 V DC Power supply for HDD

Connected 2 S.G(12V) - Ground Ground for HDD
to the hard 3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for HDD
disk drive. 4 S.G - Ground Ground for HDD
CN8 1 LIVE OUT O 120 V AC or AC power source to MSW

Connected 220-240 V AC
to the main 3 - I 120 V AC or AC power source via MSW
switch. 220-240 V AC
5 LIVE IN I 120 V AC or AC power source via MSW
220-240 V AC
CN9 1 NEUTRAL OUT O 120 V AC or AC power source to PRY

Connected 220-240 V AC
to the 2 - I 120 V AC or AC power source via PRY
power relay. 220-240 V AC
CN10 1 - O 120 V/0 V AC or FH-M: On/Off

Connected 220-240 V/0 V AC
to the fixing 2 - O 120 V/0 V AC or FH-S: On/Off
heater M 220-240 V/0 V AC
and fixing
heater S.
CN11 1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PSFM

Connected 2 P.G - Ground Ground for PSFM
to the
power
source fan
motor.
CN12 1 - O 120 V/0 V AC or DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*: On/Off

Connected 220-240 V/0 V AC
to the 4 - O 120 V AC AC power source for DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*
dehumiditify 220-240 V AC
heaters.
*: Optional
2-3-5
2BC/D
2-3-2 Main PCB
PCI BUS (32 bit)

(D0:D31) NSPCB*
SDRAM INT CODEC2 (CN4)
8M byte × 2 CPU INT5
INT CODEC1
(A2:A23) INT4
8.29 MHz INT MCP
INT3
(D0:D15) INT HDD
INT2
LCD controller MACK_MMI
INT1
INT0
OPCB-L xD0 (D0:D15)
(CN10,11) Buffer
Compact
A/D flash
slot
INT C (CN6)
Flash INT3
(DBB8:DBB15) (DBB0:DBB15) 24V OFF
memory INT4
MACK MAIN
8 Mbit × 2 XIO 5 (DBB0:DBB15) Flash
jig
(CD0:CD15) (DBB8:DBB15) (CN20)
(DBB0:DBB31)
CODEC1 (MD0:MD31)
DIMM*
(CD16:CD31) Dual port
(CN24)
CODEC2 RAM
(DD0:DD15) MIP 2BC

HDD 27.5 MHz CK, VS, MRE
(CN2) CK, VS, MRE Fax
MCPD(7:0)
CK, VS MRE
PCB*
TVS, THS
CK, MRE,
MCI(7:0)
VS, HS
UART
LVDS CK, VS, MRE
OUTPUT (2CH) TOD(7:0)
LVDS INPUT (BD)
TAMPCB*
LSU MIP 2BC CK, VS, MRE (CN5)
(CN8, 9) TID (7:0)
26 MHz
33.892 MHz
8 bit × 4CH PRID (7:0)
S/H PRIPPCB*
A/D CK, VS, MRE
SI/F (CN3)
LVDS LVDS xD0 Finisher*

UART
xD1 (CN1)
INT4 ZERO CROSS
CPU INT3
CCDPCB Image data 12 MHz INT0
(OS1, 2, 3, 4) TA4 From PSPCB
(CN14, 15) TA3 DF CMOT CLK
TA1 DF
INT1 AN0
(CN12)
SCAN MOT CLK

Backup SRAM Flash memory DF SIZE
256 kbit 8 Mbit SP SENSE
FIX TH SENSE
Flash memory SRAM Analog ET TH2
2 Mbit 256 kbit × 2 switch HUM SENSE
TONER SENSE
INTXIO 4
Buffer
From MIP 2BC
Terminal
CL UART I/F
(CN30)
INTXIO 1 INTXIO 3 UART

XIO 1 XIO 4 XIO 3 XIO 2 Side deck*
24 V OFF
PCM MOT CLK
Decorder (CN13)
IFM MOT CLK
INT0-3
PSOUT
To XIO 5 HPSW
DF TIMMIG SW
TMOT CLK
DF REV SW
AC CONT
TC CONT DF FD SW
D/A
TONER CONT S MOT Vref (Ladder)
DB CONT (Ladder) DF CMOT Vref (Ladder)
GRID CONT (Ladder)
EPCB (CN1)
*: Optional
Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram
2-3-6
2BC/D
CN4 B1 CN15 CN14 CN10 B2

B49 B17
B2 B1
11
B50 B16
A49 A1 A1 A17
1
A50 A2 12 1 A2 A16
2 12
1 CN11 13 1
CN18
2 CN19 20
7
1
19
CN6
CN8 6 1
B2
B1
A2
A1
13
CN9
CN3
B1 CN23 B25
4
B2 B26
1
A1 A25
CN7
A2 A26
1
B20
B19
A20
A19
A19
A20
B19
B20
A2
A1
B2
B1 CN20
CN30
4 2
3 1
CN5
100
A1
B2
99
49
50
A1
A2
B1
B2
A30
A29
B30
B29
CN33
A39
A40
B39
B40
CN24
A1
A2
B1
B2
51
52
CN16
1
2
12
2 1
CN34 A49
40 11
39 10
8 2
31
1
A50
B49
B50
1 1
CN17 1 CN2 CN13 2 CN12 32
Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-7
2BC/D

CN7 1 CLOCK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) PM rotation control clock
Connected 2 G(5V) - Ground Ground for PM control PCB (LSU)
to the 3 START O 0 V/5.2 V DC PM: On/Off
polygon 4 READY I 0 V/5.2 V DC PM rotation status: Stabilized/Not stabilized
motor
control PCB
(LSU).
CN8 1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for BD sensor PCB (LSU)

Connected 2 BD- I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronized signal (-)
to the BD 3 BD+ I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronized signal (+)
sensor PCB 4 G(5V) - Ground Ground for BD sensor PCB (LSU)
(LSU). 5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for BD sensor PCB (LSU)
6 BDREF I 0 V/5.2 V DC BD sensor PCB (LSU) control signal
CN9 1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for LD control PCB (LSU)

Connected 2 /VD2- O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal
to the LD 3 /VD2+ O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal
control PCB 4 /VD1- O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal
(LSU). 6 /VD1+ O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal
7 /EN O 0 V/5.2 V DC LD output enable signal: Enable/Not enable
8 G(5V) - Ground Ground for LD control PCB (LSU)
9 /ADJUST2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC LD power adjust signal (2)
10 G(5V) - Ground Ground for RSW
11 /ADJUST1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC LD power adjust signal (1)
12 G(5V) - Ground Ground for LD control PCB (LSU)
13 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LD control PCB (LSU)
CN10 A1 BUZZER O 0 V/5.2 V DC Buzzer: On/Off

Connected A2 X1 I 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltage
to the A3 Y1 I 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltage
operation A4 X2 O 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltage
unit left A5 Y2 O 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltage
PCB and A6 LCD FRAME O - LCD control signal
operation A7 LCD LOAD O - LCD control signal
unit right A8 LCD CP O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD drive clock
PCB. A9 LCD VSS(S.G) - ground Ground for LCD (OPCB-L)
A10 LCD VDD(5V) O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LCD (OPCB-L)
A11 LCD VSS(S.G) - - Ground for LCD (OPCB-L)
A12 LCD DISP OFF O 0 V/5.2 V DC LCD: On/Off
A13 LCD D0 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD display data (0)
A17 VEE OFF O 0 V/C V DC LCD power supply control signal
B1 NC - - Not used
B2 NC - - Not used
B3 LAMP OFF O 0 V/5.2 V DC LCD back light: On/Off
B4 S.GND - Ground Ground for OPCB-R
B5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for OPCB-R
B6 DIG LED 8 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 8
B7 DIG LED 7 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 7
B8 SCAN 8 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 8
B11 DIG KEY 9 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 9
2-3-8
2BC/D

CN11 1 DIG LED 6 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 6
Connected 2 DIG LED 5 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 5
to the 3 DIG LED 4 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 4
operation 4 DIG LED 3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 3
unit left 5 DIG LED 2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 2
PCB. 6 DIG LED 1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 1
7 SCAN 4 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 4
11 DIG KEY 3 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 3
CN12 1 OSLED (RED) O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSLED (red): On/Off

Connected 2 OSLED (GN) O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSLED (green): On/Off
to the DF 3 SBPSOL (RET) O 0 V/24 V DC SBPSOL (release): On/Off
driver PCB. 4 SBPSOL (ACT) O 0 V/24 V DC SBPSOL (latch-on): On/Off
5 OFCL O 0 V/24 V DC OFCL: On/Off
6 EFSSOL O 0 V/24 V DC EFSSOL: On/Off
7 OFSOL (RET) O 0 V/24 V DC OFSOL (release): On/Off
8 SBFSSOL O 0 V/24 V DC SBFSSOL: On/Off
9 OFM ENABLE O 0 V/5.2 V DC OFM (enable): On/Off
10 OFSOL (ACT) O 0 V/24 V DC OFSOL (latch-on): On/Off
11 OFM CLK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) OFM drive clock pulse
12 OFM RET O 0 V/5.2 V DC OFM control signal: On/Off
13 OCM ENABLE O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM (enable): On/Off
14 OFM CWB O 0 V/5.2 V DC OFM rotational direction switching signal
15 OCM CWB O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM rotational direction switching signal
16 OCM CLK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) OCM drive clock pulse
17 OCM M3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM drive control signal (M3)
18 CMOT Vref O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM drive control signal
21 OSBSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSBSW: On/Off
22 OFSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC OFSW: On/Off
23 SET SW I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSLSW: On/Off
24 DF SHORT I 0 V/5.2 V DC DF set status: Installed/Not installed
25 SZ DET I 0 V/5.2 V DC Original size detection signal
26 DFSSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DFSSW2: On/Off
27 DFSSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DFSSW1: On/Off
28 SZ SW A I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSWSW: On/Off
29 DFTSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DFTSW: On/Off
30 S.GND - - Ground for DFDPCB
31 NC - - Not used
32 NC - - Not used
CN13 1 RESET O 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck*: Reset/Normal

Connected 2 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* set status: Installed/Not installed
to the side 3 TxD O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmit signal
deck*. 4 S.GND - - Ground for serial communication
5 RxD I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication receive signal
6 S.GND - - Ground for serial communication
7 READY I 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* ready signal
8 FEED O 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* control signal
9 FEED SW I 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* control signal
10 FEED REQUEST O 0 V/3.3 V DC Side deck* control signal
*: Optional
2-3-9
2BC/D

CN14 1 CLP- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
Connected 2 CLP+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
to the CCD 3 RS+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
PCB. 4 RS- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
5 CLK- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
6 CLK+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
7 SHIFT+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
8 SHIFT- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for CCDPCB
CN15 1 OS2+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal

Connected 2 OS2- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
to the CCD 3 OS1+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
PCB. 4 OS1- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
5 OS3+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
6 OS3- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
7 OS4+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
8 OS4- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal
9 N.C - - Not used
10 +12V O +12 V DC Power supply for CCDPCB
11 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground for CCDPCB
12 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground for CCDPCB
CN17 1 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB

Connected 2 SLEEP SIG O 0 V/5.2 V DC PSPCB sleep mode: On/Off
to the 3 S.G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
power 4 S.G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
source 5 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
PCB. 6 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
7 Z CROSS SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Zero cross signal
8 DH REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*: On/Off
CN18 1 24V I 24 V DC Power supply from PSPCB

Connected 2 P.G - Ground Ground from PSPCB
to the 3 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
power 4 S.G - Ground Ground from PSPCB
source 5 3.4V I 3.3 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
PCB. 6 S.G(3.4V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
2-3-10
2BC/D
2-3-3 Engine PCB
Engine PCB
Buffer IC
Motors
Clutches and Main PCB

solenoids
Switches and
sensors
Figure 2-3-5 Engine PCB block diagram
The engine PCB (EPCB) transmits the status of each switch or sensor to the main PCB (MPCB). It also transmits drive
control signals from the main PCB (MPCB) through buffer ICs to motors and clutches.
2-3-11
2BC/D
2-3-12
12
13
11 11 CN6 1
10 22 12 2 CN28 B1 B39 CN27 B1
CN26 21 B2 B40 B2
1
1 A1 A39 A1
16
2 A2 A40 A2
CN8
B1
A9
18 32
17 31
CN10
1
15 1
1
16 2
B8 18 U24
B9
CN7
A1
4
CN3
CN14 9
CN9 A2
B9
A1
1
A8
A9
6
2
1
CN25
B2
B1
14
1
2
CN12
CN5
1
7
CN4
20
19
CN2
14
13 13
Figure 2-3-6 Engine PCB silk-screen diagram

A10
1
6
A1
B10 B1
CN22 40 A8 A2
CN11
22 39 A9 CN18 A1
21 1
19 CN19
CN24
8 5 20 22 CN20 2 A2
1
1
21 B2 B8 A1
19
4 1 20 B1 B9 B7
A8 B8
CN13 A7
B1
B2
2BC/D

CN2 1 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
Connected 2 G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
to the 3 G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
power 4 G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
source 5 FH-M REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC FH-M: On/Off
PCB. 6 FH-S REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC SH-M: On/Off
7 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
CN3 A1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for ESW

Connected A2 ESW SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC ESW: On/Off
to the paper A3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for ESW
conveying A4 G(5V) - Ground Ground for FSSW
unit. A5 FSSW SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC FSSW: On/Off
A6 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for FSSW
A7 FSSOL A O 0 V/24 V DC FSSOL (A): On/Off
A8 FSSOL P O 0 V/24 V DC FSSOL (P): On/Off
A9 24V - 24 V DC Power supply for FSSOL
B1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for RSW
B2 RSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC RSW: On/Off
B3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for RSW
B4 PCFM O 0 V/24 V DC PCFM: On/Off
B5 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCFM
B6 TCCM REV O 0 V/12 V DC TCCM reverse rotation: On/Off
B7 TCCM FWD O 0 V/12 V DC TCCM forward rotation: On/Off
B8 FFM O 0 V/24 V DC FFM: On/Off
B9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FFM
CN4 1 TFM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off

Connected (pseudo)
to the 2 TFM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off
image (pseudo)
formation 3 TAM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off
unit. (pseudo)
4 TAM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off
(pseudo)
5 MCCM FWD O 0 V/12 V DC MCCM forward rotation: On/Off
6 MCCM REV O 0 V/12 V DC MCCM reverse rotation: On/Off
7 G(5V) - - Ground for TNS
8 OUT O 0V to 5 V DC TNS control voltage
9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for TNS
10 TNS I 0V to 5 V DC TNS sensing voltage
11 CL O 0 V/24 V DC CL: On/Off
12 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for CL
13 PCL1 O 0 V/24 V DC PCL1: On/Off
14 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCL1
15 PCL2 O 0 V/24 V DC PCL2: On/Off
16 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCL2
17 G(5V) - Ground Ground for TLDS
18 TLDS I 0V to 5 V DC TLDS sensing voltage
19 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for TLDS
20 NC - - Not used
CN5 1 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPESSOL

Connected 2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPPRSOL
to the 3 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPFWDCL
duplex unit. 4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPREVCL
5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DUPJSW, DUPFSSW,
DUPPCSW1, DUPPCSW2, and DUPESW
6 S.G - Ground Ground for DUPJSW, DUPFSSW,
DUPPCSW1, DUPPCSW2, and DUPESW
2-3-13
2BC/D

CN6 1 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Duplex unit set status: Installed/Not installed
Connected 2 DUPJSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPJSW: On/Off
to the 3 DUFSSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUFSSW: On/Off
duplex unit. 4 DUPPCSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPPCSW1: On/Off
5 DUPPCSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPPCSW2: On/Off
6 DUPESW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPESW: On/Off
7 DUPESSOL P O 0 V/24 V DC DUPESSOL (P): On/Off
8 DUPESSOL A O 0 V/24 V DC DUPESSOL (A): On/Off
9 DUPPRSOL P O 0 V/24 V DC DUPPRSOL (P): On/Off
10 DUPPRSOL A O 0 V/24 V DC DUPPRSOL (A): On/Off
11 DUPFWDCL O 0 V/24 V DC DUPFWDCL: On/Off
12 DUPREVCL O 0 V/24 V DC DUPREVCL: On/Off
CN7 1 PWSW-U DIG0 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-U (0): On/Off

Connected 2 PWSW-U DIG1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-U (1): On/Off
to the upper 3 PWSW-U DIG2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-U (2): On/Off
paper width 4 S.GND - Ground Ground for PWSW-U
switch, 5 S.GND - Ground Ground for LILSW1
lower paper 6 LILSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC LILSW1: On/Off
width 7 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LILSW1
switch, lift 8 S.GND - Ground Ground for PSW1
limit switch 9 PSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PSW1: On/Off
1, lift limit 10 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PSW1
switch 2, 11 PFCL1 O 0 V/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
paper 12 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFCL1
switch 1, 13 S.GND - Ground Ground for PLSW-U
paper 14 PLSW-U I 0 V/5.2 V DC PLSW-U: On/Off
switch 2, 15 S.GND - Ground Ground for PLSW-L
paper feed 16 PLSW-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC PLSW-L: On/Off
clutch 1, 17 PWSW-L DIG0 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-L (0): On/Off
paper feed 18 PWSW-L DIG1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-L (1): On/Off
clutch 2, 19 PWSW-L DIG2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-L (2): On/Off
and main 20 S.GND - Ground Ground for PWSW-L
switch. 21 S.GND - Ground Ground for LILSW2
22 LILSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC LILSW2: On/Off
23 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LILSW2
24 S.GND - Ground Ground for PSW2
25 PSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PSW2: On/Off
26 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PSW2
27 PFCL2 O 0 V/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off
28 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFCL2
30 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for MSW
31 MSW OFF REM O 0 V/24 V DC MSW: Off/Normal
CN8 1 S.GND - Ground Ground for DLILSW1

Connected 2 DLILSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DLILSW1: On/Off
to the deck 3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DLILSW1
lift limit 4 S.GND - Ground Ground for DPSW1
switch 1, 5 DPSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPSW1: On/Off
deck paper 6 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPSW1
switch, 7 PFCL3 O 0 V/24 V DC PFCL3: On/Off
paper feed 8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFCL3
clutch 3, 9 S.GND - Ground Ground for DSW-L
deck left 10 DSW-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC DSW-L: On/Off
switch, 11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DSW-L
deck right 12 S.GND - Ground Ground for DSW-R
switch, 13 DSW-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DSW-R: On/Off
deck left lift 14 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DSW-R
motor, and 15 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DLM-L
deck right 16 DLM-L O 0 V/24 V DC DLM-L: On/Off
lift motor. 17 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DLM-R
18 DLM-R O 0 V/24 V DC DLM-R: On/Off
2-3-14
2BC/D

CN9 A1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for BYPPLSW
Connected A2 BYPPLSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPLSW: On/Off
to the A3 G(5V) - - Ground for BYPPLSW
bypass A4 G(5V) - - Ground for BYPTSW
paper A5 BYPTSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPTSW: On/Off
switch, A6 BYPPWSW DIG0 I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPWSW (0): On/Off
bypass tray A7 BYPPWSW DIG1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPWSW (1): On/Off
switch, A8 BYPPWSW DIG2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPWSW (2): On/Off
bypass A9 S.GND - Ground Ground for BYPPWSW
solenoid, B1 NC - - Not used
bypass B2 NC - - Not used
paper feed B3 BYPSOL O 0 V/24 V DC BYPSOL: On/Off
clutch, and B4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for BYPSOL
bypass B5 BYPPFCL O 0 V/24 V DC BYPPFCL: On/Off
paper B6 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for BYPPFCL
switch. B7 G(5V) - - Ground for BYPPSW
B8 BYPPSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPSW: On/Off
B9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for BYPPSW
CN10 1 OSDS1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS1: On/Off

Connected 2 OSDS2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS2*: On/Off
to the 3 ODSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC ODSW: On/Off
scanner 4 SM Vref O 0 V to 5 V DC SM current control voltage
drive PCB. 5 SM M1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M1)
6 SM M2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M2)
7 SM M3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M3)
8 NC - - -
9 NC - - -
10 SM CLK I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) SM drive control clock
11 SM CWB O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM rotation direction switching signal
12 SM RET O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive control signal
13 SM ENABLE O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive : Enable/Not enable
14 EL ON REM O 5.2 V DC EL: On/Off
15 SHPSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC SHPSW: On/Off
16 G(5V) - Ground Ground for SDPCB
CN11 1 R24V I 24 V DC DC power source via PRY

Connected 2 R24V I 24 V DC DC power source via PRY
to the 3 G(R24V) - - Ground from PSPCB
power relay 4 G(R24V) - - Ground from PSPCB
and power 5 G(24V) - - Ground from PSPCB
source 6 24V I 24 V DC DC power source from PSPCB
PCB.
CN12 1 PTC ALM I 5.2 V/0 V DC PTC output status: Normal/Abnormal

Connected 2 PTC REM O 0 V/24 V DC PTC: On/Off
to the high 3 TC REM O 0 V/24 V DC TC: On/Off
voltage 4 TC CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC TC output control voltage
transformer 5 SC REM O 0 V/24 V DC SC: On/Off
PCB. 6 SC CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC SC output control voltage
7 SC/TC ALM I 24 V/0 V DC SC and TC output status: Normal/Abnormal
8 DB CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC DB output control voltage
9 DB REM O 0 V/24 V DC DB: On/Off
10 G CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC Main charger grid control voltage
11 MC ALM I 24 V/0 V DC MC output status: Normal/Abnormal
12 MC REM O 0 V/24 V DC MC: On/Off
13 GND(24V) - Ground Ground for HVTPCB
14 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for HVTPCB
*: Inch model only.

2-3-15
2BC/D

CN13 2 SSW2 I 24 V/0 V DC SSW2: On/Off
Connected 3 SSW1 I 24 V/0 V DC SSW1: On/Off
to the 6 24V O 24 V DC DC power source to PRY
safety 5 PRY REM O 0 V/24 V DC PRY: On/Off
switch 1, 7 24V SOURCE O 24 V DC DC power source to SSW2
safety 8 24V SOURCE O 24 V DC DC power source to SSW1
switch 2,
and power
source
PCB.
CN14 1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for HDDFM

Connected 2 HDDFM O 0 V/24 V DC HDDFM: On/Off
to the HDD 3 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FWEBSOL
fan motor, 4 FWEBSOL O 0 V/24 V DC FWEBSOL: On/Off
fixing web 5 NC - - Not used
solenoid, 6 NC - - Not used
drum 7 P.G - Ground Ground for DSPS
surface 8 S.G - Ground Ground for DSPS
potential 9 DSPS I 0 V to 24 V DC DSPS sensing voltage
sensor, 10 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DSPS
image 11 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for IFFM
formation 12 IFFM O 0 V/24 V DC IFFM: On/Off
fan motor, 13 G(24V) - Ground Ground for PM (LSU)
and 14 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PM (LSU)
polygon
motor
(LSU).
CN15 A1 CLOCK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) IFM drive control clock

Connected A2 LOCK ALM I 5.2 V/0 V DC IFM rotation status: Normal/Lock
to the A3 IFM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC IFM : On/Off
image A4 5V O 5.2 V DC Power source for IFM
formation A5 S.G - Ground Ground for IFM
motor and A6 P.G - Ground Ground for IFM
paper A7 P.G - Ground Ground for IFM
conveying A8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for IFM
motor. A9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for IFM
B1 CLOCK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) PCM drive control clock
B2 LOCK ALM I 5.2 V/0 V DC PCM rotation status: Normal/Lock
B3 PCM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC PCM : On/Off
B4 5V O 5.2 V DC Power source for PCM
B5 S.G - Ground Ground for PCM
B6 P.G - Ground Ground for PCM
B7 P.G - Ground Ground for PCM
B8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCM
B9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCM
CN16 1 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFM

Connected 2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DDM
to the paper 3 P.G - Ground Ground for PFM
feed motor, 4 P.G - Ground Ground for DDM
deck drive 5 PFM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC PFM: On/Off
motor, and 6 DDM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC DDM: On/Off
waste toner 7 LOCK DRIVE I 5.2 V/0 V DC PFM rotation status: Normal/Lock
detection 8 LOCK DRIVE I 5.2 V/0 V DC DDM rotation status: Normal/Lock
sensor. 9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for WTDS
10 WTDS I 0 V/5.2 V DC WTDS: On/Off
11 S.GND - Ground Ground for WTDS
12 NC - - Not used
2-3-16
2BC/D

CN17 1 UPLESW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Upper drawer paper level signal (2): Low/High
Connected 2 COM(G) - Ground Ground for LM-U
to the upper 3 UPLESW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Upper drawer paper level signal (1): Low/High
lift motor 4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for LM-U
and lower 5 LM-U O 0 V/24 V DC LM-U: On/Off
lift motor. 6 UPLESW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Lower drawer paper level signal (2): Low/High
7 COM(G) - Ground Ground for LM-L
8 UPLESW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Upper drawer paper level signal (1): Low/High
9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for LM-L
10 LM-L O 0 V/24 V DC LM-L: On/Off
YC18 A1 FCL1-H O 0 V/24 V DC FCL1-H: On/Off

Connect to A2 NC - - Not used
the feed A3 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL1-H
high clutch A4 FCL1-L O 0 V/24 V DC FCL1-L: On/Off
1, feed low A5 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL1-L
clutch 1, A6 RCL O 0 V/24 V DC RCL: On/Off
registration A7 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for RCL
clutch, feed A8 FCL2-H O 0 V/24 V DC FCL2-H: On/Off
high clutch A9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL2-H
2, feed low B1 FCL2-L O 0 V/24 V DC FCL2-L: On/Off
clutch 2, B2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL2-L
feed clutch B3 FCL3 O 0 V/24 V DC FCL3: On/Off
3, feed B4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL3
clutch 4, B5 FCL4 O 0 V/24 V DC FCL4: On/Off
and feed B6 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL4
clutch 5. B7 FCL5 O 0 V/24 V DC FCL5: On/Off
B8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL5
B9 NC - - Not used
CN19 A1 TC O 0 V/24 V DC TC count: On/Off

Connected A2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for TC
to the total A3 CFM O 0 V/24 V DC CFM: On/Off
counter, A4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for CFM
cooling fan A5 EFM1 O 0 V/24 V DC EFM1: On/Off
motor, eject A6 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for EFM1
fan motor 1, A7 EFM2 O 0 V/24 V DC EFM2: On/Off
eject fan A8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for EFM2
motor 2, B1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for HUMPCB
humidity B2 HUMS SIG I 0 V to 5 V DC HUMPCB sensing humidity voltage
sensor B3 S.G(TH) - Ground Ground for HUMPCB
PCB, and B4 TH I 0 V to 5 V DC HUMPCB sensing temperature voltage
face down B5 GND(5V) - Ground Ground for FDESW
eject B6 FDESW I 0 V/5.2 V DC FDESW: On/Off
switch. B7 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for FDESW
B8 NC - - Not used
2-3-17
2BC/D

YC20 1 NC - - Not used
Connected 2 NC - - Not used
to the paper 3 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW1
feed switch 4 PFSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW1: On/Off
1, paper 5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW1
feed switch 6 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW2
2, paper 7 PFSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW2: On/Off
feed switch 8 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW2
3, paper 9 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW3
feed switch 10 PFSW3 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW3: On/Off
4, paper 11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW3
feed switch 12 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW4
5, paper 13 PFSW4 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW4: On/Off
feed switch 14 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW4
6, deck left 15 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW5
paper level 16 PFSW5 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW5: On/Off
switch 1, 17 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW5
deck left 18 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW6
paper level 19 PFSW6 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW6: On/Off
switch 2, 20 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW6
deck left 21 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW1-L
paper level 22 DPLSW1-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW1-L: On/Off
switch 3, 23 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW1-L
deck right 24 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW2-L
deck right 27 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW3-L
deck right 30 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW1-R
paper level 31 DPLSW1-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW1-R: On/Off
switch 3, 32 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW1-R
and waste 33 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW2-R
toner box 34 DPLSW2-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW2-R: On/Off
switch. 35 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW2-R
36 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW3-R
37 DPLSW3-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW3-R: On/Off
38 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW3-R
39 G(5V) - - Ground for WTBSW
40 WTBSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC WTBSW: On/Off
CN24 1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for finisher*

Connected 2 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Finisher* setting status: Installed/Not installed
to the 3 RESET O 0 V/5.2 V DC Finisher* reset signal: Reset/Normal
finisher*, 4 G(5V) - - Ground for finisher*
key 5 TxD O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmit signal
counter*, 6 G(5V) - Ground Ground for serial communication signal
and key 7 RxD I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication receive signal
card*. 8 G(5V) - Ground Ground for serial communication signal
9 E5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for finisher*
10 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for key card* or key counter*
11 COUNT REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC Key card* or key counter* count: On/Off
12 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Key card* or key counter* setting status:
Installed/Not installed
13 SET G - Ground Ground for key card* or key counter*
CN25 1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for FTH

Connected 2 FTH SIG I 0 V to 5 V DC FTH sensing voltage
to the fixing 3 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Fixing unit setting status: Installed/Not installed
thermistor. 4 S.GND - Ground Ground for fixing unit
*: Optional
2-3-18
2BC/D
2-3-4 Scanner drive PCB
Scanner drive PCB
SM Vref
SM A
SM M1
SM _A
SM M2
Stepping SM B SM
SM M3
motor SM _B
SM M4 driver IC
Main PCB SM CLK
SM CWB
SM ENABLE
INPCB EL
Driver
Switches
and
sensors
Figure 2-3-7 Scanner drive PCB block diagram
The scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) drives the scanner motor (SM), turns the exposure lamp (EL) on and off, and relays
signals from the scanner home position switch (SHPSW), the original size detection sensor 1 (OSDS1), the original size
detection sensor 2 (OSDS2*) and the original detection switch (ODSW).
The scanner motor (SM) is driven by turning the output for motor phase switch over on and off (SM A, SM _A, SM B, SM _B).
It is activated by the stepping motor driver IC processing the currently set reference signal (SM Vref), drive mode signals
(SM M1 to M3, SM CWB), phase switch over clock (SM CLK), and drive/stop signals (SM ENABLE) from the main PCB
(MPCB).
*: Inch model only.
2-3-19
2BC/D
CN1 CN7
1 16
1 6
1
CN4
CN5
3
3
6
6
CN6
CN2
1
1
Figure 2-3-8 Scanner drive PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-20
2BC/D

CN1 1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for SDPCB
Connected 2 SHPSW O 0 V/5.2 V DC SHPSW: On/Off
to the 3 EL ON REM I 5.2 V DC EL: On/Off
engine 4 SM ENABLE I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive enable signal: Enable/Not enable
PCB. 5 SM RET I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive control signal
6 SM CWB I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM rotation direction switching signal
7 SM CLK I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) SM drive control clock
8 NC - - -
9 NC - - -
10 SM M3 I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M3)
13 SM Vref I 0V to 5 V DC SM current control voltage
14 ODSW O 0 V/5.2 V DC ODSW: On/Off
15 OSDS2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS2*: On/Off
16 OSDS1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS1: On/Off
CN2 1 SM _B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase _B

Connected 2 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for SM
to the 3 SM B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase B
scanner 4 SM A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase A
motor. 5 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for SM
6 SM _A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase _A
CN3 1 EL ON O 0 V/24 V DC EL: On/Off

Connected 2 EL ON O 0 V/24 V DC EL: On/Off
to the 3 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for INPCB
INPCB. 4 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for INPCB
5 G(24V) - Ground Ground for INPCB
6 G(24V) - Ground Ground for INPCB
CN4 1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for SHPSW

Connected 2 SHPSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC SHPSW: On/Off
to the 3 GND - - Ground for SHPSW
scanner
home
position
switch.
CN5 1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for ODSW

Connected 2 ODSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC ODSW: On/Off
to the 3 GND - - Ground for ODSW
original
detection
switch.
CN6 1 G(24V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB

Connected 2 24V I 24 V DC Power source from PSPCB
to the 3 G(24V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
power 4 24V I 24 V DC Power source from PSPCB
source 5 G(5.1V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
PCB. 6 5.1V I 5.2 V DC Power source from PSPCB
CN7 1 S.G - Ground Ground for OSDS1

Connected 2 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for OSDS1
to the 3 OSDS1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS1: On/Off
original size 4 S.G - Ground Ground for OSDS2*
detection 5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for OSDS2*
sensors 1 6 OSDS2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS2C: On/Off
and 2*.
*: Inch model only.

2-3-21
2BC/D
2-3-5 CCD PCB
CCD PCB
Main PCB
Clock Clock
driver IC1
generation
IC2
Emitter
follower IC4
circuit
CCD IC3 Emitter

follower IC5
circuit Image
processing
Emitter circuit
follower IC6
circuit
Emitter
follower IC7
circuit
Figure 2-3-9 CCD PCB block diagram
The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) receives clock signals SHIFT+, SHIFT-, CLK+, CLK-, RS+, RS-, CLP+, and CLP- from the main
PCB (MPCB), and based on these signals, generates the CCD drive signal to drive CCD IC3.
When clock signals are input, the CCD IC3 outputs analog signals according to the set density of the image, which are
transmitted to the main PCB (MPCB) via the emitter follower circuits and differential amplifiers IC4, IC5, IC6 and IC7.
2-3-22
2BC/D
CN1
1 11 1 12
CN2
Figure 2-3-10 CCD PCB silk-screen diagram

CN1 1 CLP- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
Connected 2 CLP+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
to the main 3 RS+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
PCB. 4 RS- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
5 CLK- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
6 CLK+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
7 SHIFT+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
8 SHIFT- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal
9 5V I 5.2 V DC Power source from MPCB
CN2 1 OS2+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal

Connected 2 OS2- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
to the main 3 OS1+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
PCB. 4 OS1- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
5 OS3+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
6 OS3- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
7 OS4+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
8 OS4- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal
9 N.C - - Not used
10 +12V I +12 V DC Power source from MPCB
11 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground from MPCB
12 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground from MPCB
2-3-23
Timing chart No. 1 From the main switch turned on to machine stabilization
Primary stabilization fixing Secondary stabilization fixing

MSW: On temperature 165°C/329°F temperature 185°C/365°F Copying enabled Aging end
2s
MSW
PRY CN13-5
FH-M REM CN2-5
FH-S REM CN2-6

3s
20 s
MCCM FWD REM CN4-5
1s
20 s
MCCM REV REM CN4-6
PCM REM CN15-B3

250 ms
300 ms
IFM CN15-A3
150 ms
600 ms
DB REM CN12-9
CL REM CN4-11
PCL1 REM CN4-13

PCL2 REM CN4-15
100 ms
MC REM CN12-12
CFM REM CN19-A3

2BC/D
2-4-1
Timing chart No. 2 Scanner operation
2-4-2
2BC/D
Scanner initialization (SHPSW: On)
Fwd. rotation
SM CN2-1, 2, Off
3, 4, 5, 6
Rev. rotation
SHPSW CN4-2
43 P 154 P
Scanner initialization (SHPSW: Off)
Fwd. rotation
SM CN2-1, 2, Off
3, 4, 5, 6
Rev. rotation
SHPSW CN4-2
76 P 43 P 154 P
Original scanning operation (A3/11" × 17" original, magnification ratio 100%, manual copy density control)
Fwd. rotation
SM CN2-1, 2, Off
3, 4, 5, 6
Rev. rotation
SHPSW CN4-2
FVSYNC signal
410 P 414 P 9921 P 110 P

Timing chart No. 3 Original feed operation 1: Feeding an A4/11" × 81/2" original in single-sided original mode
Copier signal wait condition
OFSOL A CN12-10
OFSOL R CN12-7
OFCL CN12-5
298 P
OFM CN12-9,11,12,14
5099 P
OCM CN12-13,15,16,18
OFSW CN12-22
OSBSW CN12-21
DFTSW CN12-29
Secondary original feed start

DF start Primary original feed end
2BC/D
2-4-3
Timing chart No. 4 Original feed operation 2: Feeding two A4/11" × 81/2" originals successively in single-sided original mode
2-4-4
2BC/D
Copier signal wait condition
OFSOL A CN12-10
OFSOL R CN12-7
OFCL CN12-5
298 P
OFM CN12-9,11,12,14 298 P
5099 P
OCM CN12-13,15,16,18
OFSW CN12-22
OSBSW CN12-21
DFTSW CN12-29
Secondary original
feed start
Primary original Start of primary feed
feed end for next original
DF start
Timing chart No. 5 Original feed operation 3: Feeding two A4R/81/2" × 11" originals successively in double-sided original mode
Start of primary feed

for next original
OFSOL A CN12-10
OFSOL R CN12-7
OFCL CN12-5 100 ms
135 P 135 P 135 P 135 P

OFM CN12-9,11,12,14
Copier signal
OCM CN12-13,15,16,18 wait condition
OFSW CN12-22
OSBSW CN12-21
DFTSW CN12-29
SBFSSOL CN12-8
EFSSOL CN12-6
SBPSOL A CN12-4
SBPSOL R CN12-3
Switchback
operation start
Switchback Secondary original Primary original Secondary original Secondary original feed start
operation start feed start (reverse face) feed end feed start (reverse (front face)
Primary original Secondary original face)
feed end feed start (front face)
DF start Switchback Switchback Switchback Switchback
operation end operation end operation end operation end
2BC/D
2-4-5
Timing chart No. 6 Continuous copying onto two sheets of A4/11" × 81/2" copy paper from the bypass table
2-4-6
2BC/D
Start key: On Image ready Image ready Output off trigger

Secondary paper feed start Secondary paper feed start
ESW 3-A2
PFSW1 20-4
RSW 3-B2
300 ms 300 ms
100 ms 100 ms
BYPPFCL 9-B5
100 ms
90 ms
90 ms
BYPSOL 9-B3
10 ms 10 ms 58 ms
58 ms
FCL1-L 18-A4
166 ms 86 ms 86 ms
RCL 18-A6
380 ms
PFM 16-5
250 ms 500 ms
IFM 15-A3
600 ms
250 ms
PCM 15-B3
100 ms
100 ms Potential
stage
MC REM 12-12 dropping
155 ms 155 ms
344 ms 344 ms
TC REM 12-3
220 ms 220 ms
SC REM 12-5
150 ms
DB REM 12-9
CL 4-11
PCL1 4-13
PCL2 4-15
Timing chart No. 7 Continuous copying onto two sheets of A4/11" × 81/2" copy paper from the drawer 1
Start key: On Image ready Image ready Output off trigger
Secondary paper feed start Secondary paper feed start
PFSW3 20-10
PFSW2 20-7
PFSW1 20-4
RSW 3-B2
ESW 3-A2
50 ms
163 ms 163 ms
PFCL1 7-11
58 ms 58 ms
50 ms 50 ms
FCL3 18-B3
128 ms 128 ms
FCL2-H 18-A8
56 ms 70 ms 56 ms
FCL1-H 18-A1
10 ms 58 ms 10 ms 58 ms
FCL1-L 18-A4
166 ms 86 ms 86 ms
RCL 18-A6
380 ms
PFM 16-5
500 ms
250 ms
IFM 15-A3
250 ms 600 ms
PCM 15-B3
100 ms Potential
100 ms
stage
155 ms 155 ms
344 ms 344 ms
TC REM 12-3
220 ms 220 ms
SC REM 12-5 150 ms
DB REM 12-9
CL 4-11
PCL1 4-13
PCL2 4-15
2BC/D
2-4-7
Timing chart No. 8 Copying onto a sheet of A4/11" × 81/2" copy paper from the drawer 2
Output off trigger
2-4-8
Start key: On Image ready
2BC/D
Secondary paper feed start
PFSW4 20-13
PFSW3 20-10
PFSW2 20-7
PFSW1 20-4
RSW 3-B2
ESW 3-A2 50 ms
163 ms
PFCL2 7-27
50 ms 58 ms
FCL4 18-B5
128 ms 58 ms
FCL3 18-B3
128 ms
FCL2-H 18-A8
56 ms 70 ms
FCL1-H 18-A1
10 ms 58 ms
FCL1-L 18-A4
166 ms 86 ms
RCL 18-A6
380 ms
PFM 16-5
500 ms
250 ms
IFM 15-A3
600 ms
250 ms
PCM 15-B3 100 ms Potential
100 ms
stage
155 ms 344 ms
TC REM 12-3
220 ms
SC REM 12-5
150 ms
DB REM 12-9
CL 4-11
PCL1 4-13
PCL2 4-15
Start key: On Image ready Output off trigger
PFSW6 20-19
PFSW5 20-16
PFSW4 20-13
PFSW3 20-10
PFSW2 20-7
PFSW1 20-4
RSW 3-B2
ESW 3-A2 50 ms 163 ms
PFCL3 8-7 58 ms
50 ms
FCL5 18-B7 58 ms
128 ms
FCL4 18-B5
58 ms
128 ms
FCL3 18-B3
128 ms 70 ms
FCL2-H 18-A8
56 ms
FCL1-H 18-A1 58 ms
10 ms
FCL1-L 18-A4
166 ms 86 ms
RCL 18-A6
380 ms
PFM 16-5
100 ms
DDM 16-6
500 ms
250 ms
IFM 15-A3 600 ms
250 ms
PCM 15-B3 Potential
100 ms 100 ms stage
155 ms 344 ms
TC REM 12-3
220 ms
SC REM 12-5 150 ms
DB REM 12-9
CL 4-11
PCL1 4-13
PCL2 4-15
2BC/D
2-4-9
Start key: On Image ready Output off trigger
2BC/D
2-4-10
DPCSW2 26-5
DPCSW1 26-2
PFSW5 20-16
PFSW4 20-13
PFSW3 20-10
PFSW2 20-7
PFSW1 20-4
RSW 3-B2
ESW 3-A2 50 ms
PFCL4 26-12 190 ms
125 ms
50 ms
DFCL 26-14
58 ms
163 ms
FCL5 18-B7
58 ms
128 ms
FCL4 18-B5
58 ms
128 ms
FCL3 18-B3
128 ms
FCL2-H 18-A8
56 ms 70 ms
FCL1-H 18-A1 58 ms
FCL1-L 18-A4 10 ms
86 ms
166 ms
RCL 18-A6
380 ms
PFM 16-5
100 ms
DDM 16-6
500ms
250 ms
IFM 15-A3
600ms
250 ms
PCM 15-B3 Potential
100 ms
100ms stage
155 ms
344 ms
TC REM 12-3
220 ms
SC REM 12-5 150 ms
DB REM 12-9
CL 4-11
PCL1 4-13
PCL2 4-15
Chart of image adjustment procedures
Adjust- Maintenance mode
ing Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting the lateral square- Adjusting the position of the laser –– –– U089 1-6-32
ness (printing adjustment) scanner unit (printing adjustment) (1 dot-LINE)
1
Adjusting the magnification Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 POLYGON U053 test 1-4-20
in the main scanning di- MOTOR pattern
2 rection (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the magnification Image formation motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN MOTOR U053 test 1-4-20
in the auxiliary scanning di- pattern
3 rection (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the center line of Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSUOUT U034 test 1-6-17 The center line of the bypass
the bypass table (printing pattern table is used as the reference
4 adjustment) in the adjustment of the center
lines for other paper sources.
Adjusting the leading edge Registration clutch turning on timing U034 RCL ON U034 test 1-6-15 To make an adjustment for
registration (printing adjust- (secondary paper feed start timing) pattern duplex copying, select “RCL
5 ment) ON (DUP)”.
Adjusting the leading edge LSU illumination start timing U402 LEAD U402 test 1-6-18
margin (printing adjustment) pattern
6
Adjusting the trailing edge LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test 1-6-18 To make an adjustment for
margin (printing adjustment) pattern duplex copying, select “TRAIL
7 (DUP)”.
Adjusting the left and right LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A/C U402 test 1-6-18
margins (printing adjust- pattern
8 ment)
2BC/D
2-4-11
Adjust- Maintenance mode
ing Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
2BC/D
order Item No. Mode
2-4-12
Adjusting the lateral square- Adjusting the position of the ISU (scann- –– –– U089 1-6-33
ness (scanning adjustment) ing adjustment) (1 dot-LINE)
9
Adjusting magnification of Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN ADJ Test chart 1-6-34 No adjustment for copying
the scanner in the main using the DF.
0 scanning direction
(scanning adjustment)
Adjusting magnification of Original scanning speed U065 SUB SCAN ADJ Test chart 1-6-35 U065: For copying an original
the scanner in the auxiliary U070 –– 1-6-70 placed on the contact glass.
! scanning direction U070: For copying originals
(scanning adjustment) from the DF.
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data (image U067 ADJUST DATA Test chart 1-6-37 U067: For copying an original
(scanning adjustment) adjustment) U072 –– 1-6-69 placed on the contact glass.
@ U072: For copying originals
from the DF.
Adjusting the leading edge Original scan start timing U066 ADJUST DATA Test chart 1-6-36 U066: For copying an original
registration (scanning ad- U071 LEAD EDGE ADJ 1-6-70 placed on the contact glass.
# justment) U071: For copying originals
from the DF.
Adjusting the leading edge Adjusting the original scan data (image U403 B MARGIN Test chart 1-6-38 U403: For copying an original
margin (scanning adjust- adjustment) U404 B MARGIN 1-6-72 placed on the contact glass.
$ ment) U404: For copying originals
from the DF.
Adjusting the trailing edge Adjusting the original scan data (image U403 D MARGIN Test chart 1-6-38 U403: For copying an original
margin (scanning adjust- adjustment) U404 D MARGIN 1-6-72 placed on the contact glass.
% ment) U404: For copying originals
from the DF.
Adjusting the left and right Adjusting the original scan data (image U403 A MARGIN/ Test chart 1-6-38 U403: For copying an original
margins (scanning adjust- adjustment) C MARGIN placed on the contact glass.
^ ment) U404 A MARGIN/ 1-6-72 U404: For copying originals
C MARGIN from the DF.
When maintenance item U092 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2A068020), the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the main scanning direction (U065)
• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (U065)
• Adjusting margins for reading an original on the contact glass (U403)
When maintenance item U074 (Adjusting the DF automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2AC68241), the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the DF magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DF leading timing (U071)
• Adjusting the DF original center line (U072)
• Adjusting margins for DF original reading (U404)
Image quality
Item Specifications
100% magnification Copier: ±0.8%
Using DF: ±1.5%
Enlargement/reduction Copier: ±1.0%
Using DF: ±1.5%
Lateral squareness (copier mode) Copier: ±1.5 mm/375 mm
Using DF: ±2.5 mm/375 mm
Lateral squareness (printer mode) ±1.0 mm/375 mm
Margins (copier mode) A: 2.0 +2.0
–1.5 mm
B: 3.0 ± 2.5 mm
C: 2.0 +2.0
–1.5 mm
D: 3.0 ± 2.5mm
Margins (printer mode) A: 0.5 mm or more
B: 3.0 ± 2.5 mm
C: 0.5 mm or more
D: 3.0 ± 2.5 mm
Leading edge registration Drawer: ±2.5 mm
Bypass: ±2.5 mm
Duplex copying: ±2.5 mm
Skewed paper feed (left-right difference) Drawer: 1.5 mm or less
Bypass: 1.5 mm or less
Duplex copying: 2.0 mm or less
Lateral image shifting Drawer: ±2.0 mm
Bypass: ±2.0 mm
Duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
2BC/D-1
2-4-13
2BC/D-1
Maintenance parts list

Maintenance part name
Part No. Fig. No. Ref. No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Primary paper feed unit PARTS,ASS’Y PRIMARY PAPER FEED,SP 2BC93010 7 1
Forwarding pulley PULLEY,LEADING FEED 2BC06810 6,7 57,35
Upper paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2BC06900 6,7 9,4
Lower paper feed pulley LOWER PULLEY,PAPER FEED 33906060 6,7 43,15
Bypass forwarding pulley PULLEY,LEADING FEED 33906470 27 49
Bypass upper paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY,BYPASS 61706770 27 45
Bypass lower paper feed pulley LOWER PULLEY,PAPER FEED 33906060 27 69
Registration cleaner brush PARTS,REGISTRATION CLEANER,SP 2BC93180 8 (33,35)
Lower registration cleaner PARTS,LOWER REGISTRATION CLEANER,SP 2BC93190 17 (17,18)
Paper conveying belt BELT,CONVEYING 2BC16130 17 7
Middle paper conveying belt BELT B,CONVEYING MIDDLE 2BC16480 17 6
Ozone filter FILTER,OZONE 2BC16350 1 14
Transfer unit PARTS,ASS'Y TRANSFER CHARGER,SP 2BC93020 20 3
Charger wire TUNGSTEN WIRE(OX) SP (50M) 74669000 20 24
Cleaning pad CLEANING PAD ASS'Y 33900940 20 15
Slit glass CONTACT GLASS,ADF 35911450 11 3
Contact glass CONTACT GLASS 35912010 11 9
Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2AC12140 10 49
Mirror 2 MIRROR B 2AC12150 10 53
Reflector REFLECTOR,SCANNER 2AC12130 10 26
Exposure lamp LAMP,SCANNER 2BC12150 10 27
Original size detection sensor SENSOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION 35927290 10 36
Developing unit PARTS,ASS'Y DEVELOPING,SP 2BC93040 13 –
Lower developing cover LOWER COVER,DEVELOPING 2BC14120 13 4
Developing unit upper seal UPPER SEAL,DEVELOPING 2BC14150 13 6
Developing duct DUCT,DEVELOPING 2BC14130 22 71
Developing duct filter FILTER,DEVELOPING DUCT 2AC14560 22 74
Sub hopper coupling COUPLING,SUB HOPPER 33915540 30 3
Drum SET,DRUM 2BC82020 8 24
Main charger unit PARTS,ASS'Y MAIN CHARGER,SP 2BC93030 9 –
Charger wire cleaning pad MC CLEANING PAD ASS’Y 2A068220 9 15
Grid wire cleaning pad GRID CLEANING PAD ASS’Y 36768081 9 23
Charger wire WIRE,MAIN CHARGER 2A068240 9 14
Main charger grid GRID ASS'Y 2A068171 9 26
Cleaning lamp LAMP,CLEANING LAMP 2AR27031 9 18
Pre-cleaning lamp LAMP PCL 2BC27090 8 2
Cleaning unit PARTS,CLEANING ASS'Y,SP 2BC93050 14 1
Cleaning lower seal LOWER SEAL,CLEANING 2BC18070 14 39
Cleaning brush BRUSH,CLEANING 2BC18190 14 22
Front cleaning seal PART,FRONT CLEANING SEAL 2BC93160 14 (37,52,53)
Rear cleaning seal PART,REAR CLEANING SEAL 2BC93170 14 (38,53,54)
Cleaning blade BLADE,CLEANING 2BC18460 14 55
Thrust gear GEAR 45B,THRUST 2BC18680 14 32
Blade side front sponge FRONT SPONGE,BLADE SIDE 2BC18340 14 7
Blade side rear sponge REAR SPONGE,BLADE SIDE 2BC18350 14 8
Bushing sponge SPONGE,BRUSH BUSHING 2BC18700 14 50
Drum separation claw unit PARTS,ASS'Y SEPARATION CLAW(SP) 2BC93130 14 40
Waste toner box DISPOSAL TANK ASS'Y 2BC60010 15 11
Fixing unit PARTS 120,ASS'Y FIXING,SP 2BC93070 19 –
Fixing unit PARTS 230,ASS'Y FIXING,SP 2BC93080 19 –
Heat roller ROLLER,HEAT 2BC20530 19 24
Press roller PRESS ROLLER 2BC20260 19 16
Press roller separation claw CLAW,PRESS ROLLER 36720493 19 54
Fixing unit thermistor THERMISTOR,FIXING 2BC20430 19 42
Fixing web roller FELT,CLEANING 2A020330 19 65
Lower cleaning roller LOWER ROLLER,CLEANING 2A020340 19 6
Fixing heater M HEATER M,FIXING(120) 2BC20290 19 46
HEATER M,FIXING(220 - 240) 2BC20310 19 46
Fixing heater S HEATER S,FIXING(120) 2BC20300 19 47
HEATER S,FIXING(220 - 240) 2BC20320 19 47
Heat roller separation claw unit PARTS,ASS'Y FIXING EJECT GUIDE,SP 2BC93090 26 38
Heat roller separation claw SEPARATION CLAW B 61720750 19 41
2-4-14
2BC/D-1
Maintenance part name

Part No. Fig. No. Ref. No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Duplex pressure release solenoid* SOLENOID,STOPPER 18327130 24 32
DF forwarding pulley PULLEY,LEADING FEED 3BC07010 34 5
DF feed pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 3BC07020 34 6
DF separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 3BC07020 34 27
DF registration roller ROLLER,REGISTRATION 3BC08050 36 56
Front reading pulley FRONT PULLEY,READING 3AL08480 36 7
DF registration pulley PULLEY B,REGISTRATION 3BC08220 35 12
Original feed switch SWITCH L,FEED 63227150 34 17
Lower original conveying roller LOWER ROLLER,CONVEYING 3AL08112 36 32
Upper original conveying roller UPPER ROLLER,CONVEYING 3AL08161 36 30
Upper original conveying pulley UPPER PULLEY,CONVEYING 3AL08140 31 5
Original conveying guide GUIDE,CONVEYING 3AL08033 36 1
Original conveying pulley cover COVER,CONVEYING PULLEY 3AL08302 36 4
Middle original conveying roller INNER ROLLER,CONVEYING 3BC08150 36 19
Middle original conveying pulley INNER PULLEY,CONVEYING 3AL08100 36 52
Eject pulley PULLEY,EJECT 3AL08170 35 11
Switchback roller ROLLER,LOOP 3AL10020 35 6
Eject pulley PULLEY,EJECT 3AL08170 35 20
Eject roller ROLLER,EJECT 3AL08130 36 39
Original size length switch filter FILTER CF SENSOR 78706241 33 16
Original holder mat MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER 3AL04060 31 16
Original holder sheet SHEET,ORIGINAL HOLDER 3AL08401 36 10
Original size indicator sponge SPONGE,ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR 35912531 11 4
Drum drive grounding plate GROUND PLATE,DRUM DRIVE 2AC08160 22 41
Ozone filter FILTER,MAIN 2BC23020 1 39
* Duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL) is attached in MOUNT, SWITCHBACK RELEASE SOLENOID
(P/N : 2A017210). Refer to P.2-2-5 and the Parts List for the position.
2-4-14-1
2-4-15
2BC/D-1
2-4-16
2BC/D-1
Periodic maintenance procedures
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Test copy and Perform at the maximum Test copy Every service
test print copy size
Run maintenance item U923 (Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning counter) to clear the count value. (Refer to
page 1-4-71.)
Maintenance
part/location
Paper feed Primary paper feed unit Clean or replace Every service 1-6-3
section Forwarding pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-3
Replace after feeding 150,000
sheets (drawers 1 and 2) or
300,000 sheets (paper deck).
Upper paper feed pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-3
Lower paper feed pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-3
Bypass forwarding pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-10
sheets.
Bypass upper paper feed Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-10
sheets.
Bypass lower paper feed Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-10
sheets.
Registration cleaner Clean or replace Every service Vacuum. 1-6-13
brush Replace if it does not touch the
registration roller.
Lower registration cleaner Clean or replace Every service Vacuum. 1-6-13
brush Replace if it does not touch the
registration roller.
Rollers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Clutches Clean Every service Check the leading edge
registration and paper feed
conditions.
Paper conveying belt Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Middle paper conveying Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
belt
Ozone filter Replace Every service 1-6-14
Transfer unit Clean Every service Clean with a wet cloth and then 1-6-48
a dry cloth.
Charger wire Replace Every service 1-6-48
Cleaning pad Replace Every service 1-6-48
Guides Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-15
2-4-17
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
part/location
Optical section Slit glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Contact glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Mirror 1 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Lens Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Reflector Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Exposure lamp Check and replace Every service Replace if an image problem 1-6-21
occurs or after the exposure
lamp has been lit for 1,000 hours.
Optical rail Grease Every service Check noise and shifting and
then apply scanner rail grease
PG671.
Original size detection Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
sensor
Maintenance
part/location
Developing Developing unit Replace Every service 1-6-44
section Lower developing Clean Every service Vacuum.
cover
Developing unit Clean Every service Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth. 1-6-46
upper seal Check and replace Replace if deformation, waviness
or break of the seal is found.
Seals and sponges Clean Every service Check for vacuum and breakage.
Gears Check Every service Check noise and the levels of
wear.
Grease Every service Apply grease TMP1-200G.
Developing duct Clean Every service Vacuum.
Developing duct filter Replace Every service 1-6-47
Sub hopper coupling Check and Grease Every service Check noise and Apply grease
TMP1-200G.
Maintenance
part/location
Image formation Drum Replace Every service 1-6-42
section Main charger unit Clean Every service Clean the shield with a wet cloth 1-6-39
and then a dry cloth.
Charger wire cleaning Replace Every service 1-6-41
pad
Grid wire cleaning pad Replace Every service 1-6-41
Charger wire Replace Every service 1-6-39
Main charger grid Clean or replace Every service Clean the shield with a wet cloth 1-6-39
and then a dry cloth. Replace if
damage or folds are serious.
Cleaning lamp Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Pre-cleaning lamp Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
2-4-18
2-4-16
2BC/D
Maintenance
part/location
Cleaning Cleaning unit Replace Every service 1-6-50
section Cleaning lower seal Replace Every service 1-6-50
Cleaning brush Replace Every service 1-6-53
Front cleaning seal Replace Every service 1-6-53
Rear cleaning rear seal Replace Every service 1-6-53
Cleaning blade Replace Every service 1-6-52
Thrust gear Check and replace Every service Replace if breakage or the like 1-6-52
is found.
Blade side front sponge Check and replace Every service Replace if cushioning characteristics
are lost.When replacing, a front
cleaning sponge (2BC1839) is needed.
Blade side rear sponge Check and replace Every service Replace if cushioning characteristics
are lost.When replacing, a rear
cleaning sponge (2BC1840) is needed.
Bushing sponge Replace Every service 1-6-53
Drum separation claw unit Replace Every service 1-6-50
Waste toner box Replace Every service
Maintenance
part/location
Fixing section Fixing unit Replace Every service 1-6-55
Heat roller Replace Every service 1-6-57
Press roller Replace Every service 1-6-59
Press roller separation Clean Every service
claw
Fixing unit thermistor Check and clean Every service Clean with alcohol; check the 1-6-61
level of wear on contacting
surfaces.
Fixing web roller Replace Every service 1-6-62
Lower cleaning roller Replace Every service 1-6-60
Fixing heater M Check Every service Check for decrease of quantity of 1-6-55
light.
Fixing heater S Check Every service Check for decrease of quantity of 1-6-55
light.
Heat roller separation Replace Every service 1-6-63
claw unit
Heat roller separation Replace Every service 1-6-63
claw
Maintenance
part/location
Eject section Rollers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Eject pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-17
2-4-19
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
part/location
Feedshift and Duplex pressure release Check or replace Every service Replace after feeding 500,000
duplex sections solenoid sheets.
Rollers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Bushes Check and grease Every service Check for unusual noise at the
roller section. If unusual noise
occurs, apply grease 1.
Maintenance
part/location
DF section DF forwarding pulley Replace or clean Every 100,000 counts Clean with alcohol when visiting 1-6-67
the user.
DF feed pulley Replace or clean Every 100,000 counts Clean with alcohol when visiting 1-6-67
the user.
DF separation pulley Replace or clean Every 100,000 counts Clean with alcohol when visiting 1-6-67-1
the user.
DF registration roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Front reading pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
DF registration pulley Check or clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth
if it is dirty.
Original feed switch Check or clean Every service Clean with airbrush or a dry cloth.
Lower original conveying Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
roller
Upper original conveying Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
roller
Upper original conveying Check or clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth
pulley if it is dirty.
Original conveying guide Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original conveying pulley Clean Every service Clean the opposite side of the DF
cover timing switch with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Middle original conveying Clean Every 400,000 counts Clean with alcohol (Remove the
roller front, rear and right covers and
original conveying pulley mount
plate).
Middle original conveying Clean Every 400,000 counts Clean with alcohol (Remove the
pulley front, rear and right covers and
original conveying pulley mount
plate).
Eject pulley Check or clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth
if it is dirty.
Original size length switch Clean Every service Clean with alcohol. Filter
Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol.
Original holder mat Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original holder sheet Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original size indicator Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
sponge
Maintenance
part/location
Covers Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-20
2-4-18
2BC/D-1
Maintenance
part/location
Other Drum drive grounding Check and grease Every service Apply conductive grease
plate GE-334C.
Ozone filter Replace Every service
• Run the following maintenance modes.

Method Maintenance item contents Page
U126 Setting of effective potential correction 1-4-33

U130 Initial setting for the developer 1-4-34
U160 Applying toner to the cleaning blade 1-4-38
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count 1-4-32
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time 1-4-33
U909 Checking/clearing the fixing web count 1-4-69
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box maintenance count value 1-4-70
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count 1-4-52
2-4-18-1
2-4-21
2BC/D-1
2-4-22
2BC/D
Optional devices supplied parts list
Multi finisher
Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.
Main tray Main tray 3B804140
Finisher connecting plate Finisher connecting plate 3B803010
Stapler cartridge Stapler cartridge 3B827020
M4 × 12 binding screw M4 × 12 binding screw B1304120
Hexagonal nut Hexagonal nut C1054070
Pin Pin 33920500
Sub tray Sub tray 3B804180
Paper insertion aid guide plate Paper insertion aid guide plate 3B816900
M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw B3314100
Connecting sponge Connecting sponge 3B803020
Simple finisher
Main tray Main tray 3B804140
Finisher connecting plate Finisher connecting plate 3B803010
Stapler cartridge Stapler cartridge 3B827020
M4 × 12 binding screw M4 × 12 binding screw B1304120
Hexagonal nut Hexagonal nut C1054070
Pin Pin 33920500
Paper insertion aid guide plate Paper insertion aid guide plate 3B816900
M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw B3314100
Connecting sponge Connecting sponge 3B803020
Side deck
Upper merge guide Upper merge guide 2BD60010
Lower merge guide Lower merge guide 2BD60020
Interlock switch backstop Interlock switch backstop 3BF19720
M4 × 6 TP-A chromate screw M4×6 TP-A chromate screw B4004060
M4 × 12 flat head screw M4×12 flat head screw B200412
M3 × 6 TP-A bronze screw M3×6 TP-A bronze screw B4303060
M4 × 8 TP-P tight screw M4×8 TP-P tight screw B4044080
Network scanner kit
Core Core 2AV274400
Clamp Clamp M25051900
Tandem kit
Interface PCB Interface PCB 3BS28010
Interface cable Interface cable 3BS27010
M4 × 6 bronze binding screw M4×6 bronze binding screw B1304060
M2.6 × 5 brass binding screw M2.6×5 brass binding screw B1600050
Assembly relay PCB Assembly relay PCB 2BC60020
2-4-19
2-4-23
2BC/D
Functions and settings combination chart

: Combination is possible
Function selected second ---: Combination is NOT possible
Function selected first 01: Auto exposure adjustment is not available for
the photo mode. The text+photo mode, the
Image quality (text mode) text mode, or manual exposure adjustment will
Image quality (photo mode) 01 be selected.
Image quality (text+photo mode) 02: Only the auto magnification selection mode is
available. That mode will be selected.
Copy exposure (manual exposure adjustment)
03: Only same size (100% [1:1]) copying in the
Copy exposure (auto exposure adjustment) 01 auto paper selection mode is available. That
Auto paper selection mode (Same size: 100% [1:1]) 02 02 02 02 02 mode will be selected.
Auto paper selection mode (enlargement/reduction) 02 02 03 02 02 02 04: The margin mode and the booklet/stitching
mode, or book to booklet mode, cannot be
Auto magnification selection mode 03 used in combination with each other.
Same size (100% [1:1]) copying 02 03 02 05: Only available with open-faced originals
Zoom mode 02 03 02 (books, etc.) if they are set on the platen.
06: The border erase modes and the auto
Preset zoom mode 02 03 02
selection/filing mode cannot be used in
XY zoom mode 02 02 03 02 02 02 combination with each other.
Eco print mode 07: The border erase modes and the custom
Margin mode 04 04 original size setting cannot be used in
combination with each other.
Centering/Image shift mode 05 05 05 08: The sheet erase mode and the book erase
Border erase (sheet erase mode) 07 06 06 mode cannot be used in combination with
Border erase (book erase mode) 08 24 07 06 06 each other.
09: The transparency + backing sheet mode and
1-sided copying (1-sided R 1-sided) the 2-sided copy modes cannot be used in
2-sided copying (1-sided R 2-sided) 12 12 09 10 11 combination with each other.
2-sided copying (2-sided R 2-sided) 12 12 09 11 10: Cannot be used in combination with auto
05 12 12 selection/filing mode.
2-sided copying (book R 2-sided) 09 14 13 13 10 10 11 15 15 15
11: The 2-sided copy modes and the invert mode
Page separation/Split copy (2-sided R 1-sided) 12 12 cannot be used in combination with each
Page separation/Split copy (book R 1-sided) 05 12 1216 14 13 13 10 10 15 15 15 other.
Booklet/Stitching mode 02 02 02 04 08 12 12 12 12 12 17 18 21 21 19 20 23 11 25 26 27 12: The booklet/stitching mode and book to
booklet mode will be given second priority
Book to Booklet mode 02 02 02 02 02 02 04 05 12 12 12 12 12 17 18 14 21 21 19 20 23 11 25 26 27 when the
Cover mode 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 2-sided copy modes or the page separation/
Transparency + backing sheet mode 09 09 09 16 18 18 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 split copy modes are selected.
13: Open-faced originals cannot be used in
Paper selection
combination with original size selection.
Original set direction 24 14 14 14 14: Not available because open-faced originals
Original size selection (standard size) 13 13 21 21 17 18 19 20 21 21 must be set with the top edge towards the rear
Original size selection (custom size) 07 07 13 13 21 21 17 18 19 20 21 21 of the copier.
15: Not available in combination with open-faced
Original size selection (auto selection) 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 06 10 10 10 19 19 17 18 19 19 19 19 19 19 originals.
Original size selection (filing) 02 02 02 02 02 02 06 06 10 10 20 20 17 18 20 20 20 20 20 20 16: The book R page separation/split copy mode
Sort mode and the transparency + backing sheet mode
cannot be used in combination with each
Finished mode 18 22
other.
Staple mode 18 22 17: Not available in combination with the cover
Punch mode 23 23 18 mode.
Copy eject location 18: Not available in combination with the
transparency + backing sheet mode.
Invert mode 11 11 11 11 11 17 18 19: Not available in combination with original size
Mirror image mode selection (auto selection).
Print page numbers mode 19 20 20: Not available in combination with original size
selection (filing).
Form overlay mode 15 15 25 25 19 20 25 25 25 21: Not available in combination with the original
Combine/Merge Copy modes 02 02 02 15 15 26 26 17 21 21 19 20 25 26 size selection.
Memo mode 02 02 02 15 15 27 27 17 21 21 19 20 25 26 22: The finished mode and the staple mode
cannot be used in combination with each
Batch scanning mode
other.
Proof mode 23: The punch mode and the staple mode cannot
Repeat copy mode (settings) 25 be used in combination with each other.
Repeat copy mode (print out) 24: The original set direction cannot be selected
because the book erase mode was selected
Document management functions (form registration) and originals must be set with the top edge
Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents]) towards the rear of the copier.
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents]) 25: Not available in combination with the form
overlay mode.
Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])
26: Not available in combination with the
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents]) combine/merge copy mode.
Output management functions (interrupt print) 27: The memo mode and the booklet/stitching
Job build copying (step 1) mode, or book to booklet mode, cannot be
used in combination with each other.
Job build copying (from step 2)
Interrupt copying ¡ Insert blank sheet
Scanner functions (Scan to PC) ™ Start on front of copy
£ Enter number of copies (copy sets) to be
Scanner functions (Send E-mail)
made
Scanner functions (TWAIN)
2-4-20
General wiring diagram 2BC/D
A B C D E F G H I J
WE
1 2
BK SH OPTION
100V
COM WHITE TB2 10-1 WE WE
FH-M
1
Phase control
3
1 LIVE BLACK TB1 FUSE1 10-2 WE WE OPCB 1
circuit FH-S
1
2
120V FUSE1
TOUCH
FIXING UNIT
COM WHITE 100 to 120V 15A 125V PANEL BACK
230V 8A 250V 9-2 WE BK BK LCD
LIVE BLACK LIGHT
DF
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FTS
LCD DISP OFF

220-240V PRY
CCFT COLD
LCD FLAME
LCD CONT
5V(TH) WE BK
CCFT HOT
LCD LOAD
COM WHITE 2 1
A1
VSS(S.G)
VSS(S.G)
A5
9-1 NEUTRAL OUT WE 25-1
VDD(5V)
2
1
LCD CP
LCD D3
LCD D2
LCD D1
LCD D0
13 or 14 13 or 14
YW YW FTH
N.C
N.C
LIVE BLACK 1
Y2
X2
Y1
X1
NOISE FTH SIG WE BK
A1 A2 A3 A4
A5 A4 A3 A2
25-2
1
2
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
5-12
5-11
5-10
5-9
5-8
5-7
5-6
5-5
5-4
5-3
5-2
5-1
6-4
6-3
6-2
6-1
S.G BE FILTER
6-10 TB3 LIVE OUT BK WE 23 or 24 23 or 24
WE BK SET SIG WE BK
5V OE 25-3
5-10 2 S.GND WE BK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DH WE 25-4
5V OE
2-5 8-5 LIVE IN(MSW ON) BK
33 or 34 OPCB-L OPCB-R
33 or 34
SLEEP SIG YW
5-7
s BE BE
j
2-6 MSW 3
CN1 CN2 CN3
CONVEYING UNIT
MAIN S.G BE G(5V) WE GY YW
A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
6-8
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
3-A1
4 5 6 7 8 9
6 5 4 3 2 1
8-1
1 2 3
3 2 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
PCB 5V OE LIVE OUT BK 43 or 44 43 or 44 ESW SIG WE GY YW
1 1 1
5-11 BK t RD RD 3-A2 ESW
P.GND YW
Z CROSS SIG GN 4 5V WE GY YW
24V YW
2-7
24V
24V
N.C
S.G
3-A3
P.G
P.G
5V
5V
24V RD G(5V) WE GY WE
2 1-5 2
6 5 4 3 2 1
3-A4
1 2 3
3 2 1
A1 or A2 A1 or A2
P.G BE 1 GN GN FSSW SIG WE GY WE 2 1
2-2 FSSW
b
SHIELD BOX
3-A5 1 2
5V OE 2 5 5V WE GY WE g
PARER
5-12 3-A6
a
MAIN S.G BE 8-3 BK

6-9 SPARK SUPPRESSOR FSSOL A WE GY YW
PCB 3.4V OE
1 2 3
3-A7
1 2 3
9 8 7
12-4 WE
SBPSOL (RET) WE
LCD DISP OFF WE
SBPSOL (ACT) GN
LCD VSS(S.G) WE
LCD VSS(S.G) WE
5-1
OFM ENABLE GN
LCD VDD(5V) WE
OCM ENABLE LB
OSLED (RED) PK
FSSOL P WE GY GN
LCD FRAME WE
OFSOL(ACT) PK
OFSOL(RET) LB
OSLED (GN) LB
S.G(3.4V) BE FSSOL
DIG KEY_1 WE
DIG KEY_2 WE
DIG KEY_3 WE
DIG KEY_4 YW
DIG KEY_5 YW
DIG KEY_6 YW
DIG KEY_7 YW
DIG KEY_8 YW
DIG KEY_9 YW
DIG LED_1 WE
DIG LED_2 WE
DIG LED_3 WE
DIG LED_4 WE
DIG LED_5 WE
DIG LED_6 WE
DIG LED_7 YW
DIG LED_8 YW
DF SHORT YW
3-A8
LCD LOAD WE
LAMP OFF YW
OCM CWB GN
K A
OFM CWB GY
OFM RET YW
OCM Vref YW
SBFSSOL GY
VEE OFF WE
OCM CLK PK
OFM CLK BN
6-1
DFSSW1 GN
BUZZER WE
DFSSW2 GY
3-7 COM(R24V) WE GY RD
EFSSOL YW
SCAN_1 WE
SCAN_2 WE
SCAN_3 WE
SCAN_4 WE
SCAN_5 YW
SCAN_6 YW
SCAN_7 YW
SCAN_8 YW
OCM M2 GY
SZ SW A PK
OCM M3 BN
F202
LCD CP WE
OSBSW GN
OCM M1 LB
SET SW BN
LCD D3 WE
LCD D2 WE
LCD D1 WE
LCD D0 WE
DFTSW BN
S.GND YW
SZ DET LB
reserve out
12V PE
S.GND YW
3-A9
OFSW PK
reserve in
OFCL BN
7-1 24V 3-8
Y2 WE
X2 WE
Y1 WE
X1 WE
5V YW
S.G(12V) BE 5-2
7-2
N.C
N.C
HDD F301 5-3
h
S.G BE
7-4 5V 5-4 12-1 BK G(5V) WE GY
B3 B2 B1
B10 B11 B12
11-13
11-12
11-11
11-10
11-9
11-8
11-7
11-6
11-5
11-4
11-3
11-2
11-1
10-A17
10-A16
10-A15
10-A14
10-A13
10-A12
10-A11
10-A10
10-A9
10-A8
10-A7
10-A6
10-A5
10-A4
10-A3
10-A2
10-A1
10-B17
10-B16
10-B15
10-B14
10-B13
10-B12
10-B11
10-B10
10-B9
10-B8
10-B7
10-B6
10-B5
10-B4
10-B3
10-B2
10-B1
12-22
12-21
12-19
12-20
12-17
12-18
12-15
12-16
12-13
12-14
12-11
12-12
12-9
12-10
12-7
12-8
12-6
12-5
12-4
12-3
12-2
12-1
12-30
12-29
12-28
12-27
12-26
12-25
12-24
12-23
12-31
12-32
1 2 3
Heater
3 2 1
5V OE 3-B1
1 2 3
3 2 1
RSW WE GY
MSW OFF REM

7-3 3-1 control
5V OE 3-B2 RSW
5-5 3-2 circuit 5V WE GY
9 8
TAM 3-B3
a
S.G BE 3-3 F202 8A
24V
PCB 6-6 3-4 F201 8A PCFM WE GY
B8 B9
B5 B4
3-5
1 2
2 1
F201 3-B4
24V 3-6 F301 4A
k R24V WE GY PCFM
MPCB
P.G
3-B5
SSW 1 SSW 2
CN1
4-6
1-2
24V RD
s TCCM REV WE GY OS2 + GY BN
B6 B7
B7 B6
PSPCB 15-1
1 2
2 1
24V RD 2-1
t 3-B6
10 11 12
e
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1-3 TCCM FWD WE GY TCCM 15-2 OS2 - GY YW 2-2
3-B7
4-10
1-10
6-11
OS1 + GY GN
Side deck 15-3 2-3
3-7
3-8
4-7
4-8
6-2
5-2
5-3
2-3
1-6
2-4
1-7
6-4
5-6
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
3-9
4-5
4-9
3-6
3-5
5-4
6-3
1-4
1-8
5-8
6-5
1-9
6-7
2-8
2-9
5-9
15-4 OS1 - GY PK 2-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN6
3 3
WE
WE
WE
1 2 OS3 + GY LB
BK
BK
BK
CF
FFM WE GY 15-5 2-5
RD
BK
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
B12 B11 B10 B9 B8
1 2 OS3 - GY GY
1 2
2 1
3-B8 15-6 2-6
24V RD
24V RD
24V RD
24V RD
24V RD
24V RD
24V RD
24V RD
1 2 1 2 1 2 FFM
P.G BE
P.G BE
S.G BE
P.G BE
P.G BE
S.G BE
P.G BE
R24V WE GY
OUT
P.G BE
P.G BE
P.G BE
P.G BE
OS4 + GY BN
5V OE
5V OE
5V OE
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15-7 2-7
IN
3 1
3-B9 OS4 - GY YW
24V
24V
15-8
P.G
P.G
S.G
24V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2-8
5V
15-9 N.C GY 2-9
DH 1
DH 2
DH 3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15-10 +12V GY PE 2-10
12 11 10
SCANNER CN1 G(analog) GY BE 2-11 CCDPCB
24V SOURCE RD
24V SOURCE RD
OPERATION SIDE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15-11
DF DRIVE FINISHER
FH-M REM BN
G(analog) GY BE 2-12
FH-S REM GY
UNIT DECK 15-12
PRY REM GN
S.G
5V
P.G
24V
24V
FEED REQEST
FEED SW SIG
FEED
READY
G(5V)
RxD
G(5V)
TxD
SET SIG
RESET
PCB (4ch)
G(R24V) BE
G(R24V) BE
φ CLP - GY BN
G(24V) BE
R24V RD
R24V RD
14-1
b c d f 1-1
SSW1 RD
SSW2 RD
10 11
G(5V) BE
G(5V) BE
G(5V) BE
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PWSW-U DIG 0 PK BK φ CLP + GY YW
24V RD
24V RD
14-2 1-2
φ RS +
5V OE
5V OE
PWSW-U
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
7-1 GY GN
FG
P.G
14-3 1-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PWSW-U DIG 1 PK BK φ RS - GY PK
7-2 14-4 1-4
PWSW-U DIG 2 PK BK 14-5 φ CLK - GY LB 1-5
7-3 φ CLK + GY GY
S.GND PK BK SET SIG PK f 14-6
11-6
11-5
2-1
2-2
11-3
11-4
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
13-6
13-8
13-3
13-7
13-2
13-5
11-1
11-2
1-6
7-4 24-2 φ SHIFT +
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
GY BN
8
1
1
1
RESET YW 14-7 1-7
DUPLEX UNIT BE SET SIG WE 24-3 14-8 φ SHIFT - GY YW
7
2
2
2
f A1 A6 6-1 1-8
S.G BE G(5V) BE 24-4
i 14-9 5V GY OE 1-9
DUPJSW
6
3
3
3
3 g S.GND WE TxD BN R24V RD
14-10 5V GY OE
PFCL1 LILSW1
1-10
21 20 19 18
24-10
11 10
4 3 2 1
7-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1 12 3 12 3
5V OE 24-5 5V GY OE
5
4
4
4
LILSW 1 WE
KEY CARD
a
COUNTER
1 14-11 1-11
PAPER FEED
a
G(5V) BE COUNT REM BK
(OPTION)
(OPTION)
7-6 5V WE 24-11
2 SIG BN DUPJSW WE 24-6
4
5
5
5
A2 A5 6-2 7-7 RxD GN SET SIG BN
DUPFSSW
S.GND WE 24-12
PSW1
KEY
5V OE 7-8 24-7 5V OE
3
6
6
6
1 b PSW1 WE G(5V) BE SET G BE 17-1
UNIT A
SIG YW DUPFSSW WE 7-9 5V WE 24-8 24-13 5V OE SLEEP SIG YW
2
7
7
7
1-1 16-1
10 11 12
2 A3 A4 6-3 7-10 E 5V OE 5V OE 17-2
3 S.G BE h PFCL1 WE 24-9 1-2 16-2 S.G(5V) BE
1
8
8
8
17-3
DUPPCSW1
7-11
1 2
R24V WE 22-B10 KEY CARD REM S.GND BE 16-3
PTC ALM GY 1-3
Finisher
4 SIG GN DUPPCSW1 WE
7-12 N.C 24V S.GND BE S.G(5V) BE 4
10 11 12 13 14
12-1
j
A4 A3 6-4 22-A10 17-4
1-1 16-4
KMAS
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
22-B9 S.GND
S.GND BE
(only for japan)

S.G BE PTC REM GY 5V OE Copy enable
16-5 5V OE
1 i 12-2 24-1
22-A9 1-5 17-5
9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1-2 22-B8 b0 RD BN
2 5V OE 1-6 16-6 5V OE
KEY CARD
c TC REM GY 24V 22-A8 5V
17-6
DUPPCSW2
S.GND BE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
DLILSW2 DPCSW2
S.GND WE YW b1
PLSW-U
1-3 12-3 22-B7 1-7 16-7
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
S.G BE Z CROSS SIG GN

A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
OPTION
26-1 24V 5V
AC TC PTC
j S.GND WE GY TD YW
1 2 3
3 2 1
22-A7 17-7
1 DPCSWI WE YW TC CONT GY 7-13 PLSW-U WE b2 1-8 16-8
(MK-1)
3 4
2 1
1 2
5V OE 26-2 YW 1-4 12-4 GY 24V
22-B6
5V ACK GN DH REM WE
2 d 5V WE 7-14 22-A6 1-9 16-9 17-8
26-3
DPCSW1
22-B5 b3 DREQ PK
S.GND WE WE SC REM GY 16-10
3 SIG PK DUPPCSW2 WE 1-10 24V RD
P.G
d
5V
A5 A2 6-5 26-4 12-5 22-A5 18-1
654321
1-5 N.C
1 2 3
3 2 1
b4
DUPESW
DPCSW2 WE WE 16-11
PLSW-L
22-B4 1-11
5V OE 26-5 SC CONT GY S.GND WE YW P.G 5V CON WE P.G BE
e
HVTPCB
22-A4 18-2
5V WE WE 16-12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 1-6 12-6 7-15 PLSW-L WE b5 1-12
1 2
4 3
1 2
SIG LB DUPESW WE 26-6 S.GND WE LB YW P.G
22-B3
5V 5V OE
3 A6 A1 6-6 26-7 SC/TC ALM GY 7-16 22-A3
b6 18-3
1 2 3
DLISW WE LB 1-7 12-7 22-B2

1 S.G BE k OE N.C 5V S.G BE
DECK CONVEYING UNIT
26-8 LB DB CONT GY
22-A2
b7 18-4
5V OE 5V WE 22-B1
3.4V BN
5 5-5 26-9 NC 1-8 12-8 P.G 22-A1 5V
18-5
JOINT
BE S.G BE 26-10 DB REM GY 7-17 PWSW-L DIG 0 LB BK
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
PWSW-L
CONNECTOR 6 5-6 NC 1-9 12-9 18-6 S.G(3.4V) BE
a c f h j 26-11 PWSW-L DIG 1 LB BK GN RD 24V
G CONT GY 7-18 21-1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
PFCL4
PFCL4 WE BK 12-10 PWSW-L DIG 2 LB BK FG BE G(24V)

1-10
B11 B12
26-12 21-2
B2 B1
1 2
2 1
7-19
1
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 26-13 R24V WE RD MC ALM GY S.GND LB BK BE G(5V)
COIN VENDER
21-4
2
12-11
MC
1-11 7-20 YW COIN EN

GRID
21-3
DFCL
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 DFCL WE BK MC REM GY
B9 B10
26-14
only for japan

B4 B3
1 2
2 1
4 3
R24V WE RD RD 1-12 12-12 FG
a
FG
26-15 R24V WE
OPTION
(5V) (S.G)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
1211 10 9 8 7 6 5
RD GND(24V) GY 1-1 10 15-B9
b d e g i k RD S.GND WE 1 PE FEED COUNT 12V PE
PFCL2 LILSW2
12-13
43 2 1
R24V RD S.GND WE BN 1-13
DPSW2
7-21 R24V WE 21-6
12 1110 9 8 7 6 5
2 1 1 23 1 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN2
1-2 9
B6 B7 B8
B7 B6 B5
5
5-1 LILSW2 WE 2 15-B8

1 23
1 26-16 GY EJECT COUNT S.G BE
PAPER FEED
DPSW WE BN R24V GY 7-22 21-7
RD R24V RD YW 12-14 P.G WE
6
2 5-2 26-17 5V WE BN 1-14 5V WE 1-3 8 3 15-B7 LB COPYING SIG

7-23 P.G WE 21-8 S.G BE h
7
RD R24V RD 26-18 S.GND WE 1-4 7 15-B6 GN TxD RxD

7-24 4
PSW2
3 5-3 21-9
DUPESSOL
SET SIG WE PK PSW2 WE S.G WE 5V OE
UNIT B
RD R24V RD 7-25 1-5 6 5 15-B5 BE G(5V)
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
B12 B11 B10 B9 B8

8
R24V 5-4 26-19 21-10

3 2 1
5 4 S.GND WE PK 7-26 5V WE 5V WE YW RxD TxD 5

1-6 5
9
GY DUPESSOL P WE 26-20 NC PFCL2 WE 6 15-B4 21-11
PCM
B1 B6 6-7 7-27 PCM REM WE BE G(5V)
HDD
1 2
26-21
11 10
BN DUPESSOL A WE NC 7-28 R24V WE 1-7 4 7 15-B3 21-12

DEV • BIAS
B2 B5 6-8 26-22 LOCK ALM WE 21-5 N.C

IN RD 1-8 3 8 15-B2
DUPPRSOL
21 22
21 22
CLOCK WE
e
R24V OUT RD 1-9 2 9 15-B1

14-13 G(24V) BE
3 2 1
MSW SW OFF REM WE NC 5V OE

1-10 1 2-1
2 1
1 2
98
16 15 14 13
YW DUPPRSOL P WE
6-9 7-31
B3 B4 14-14 R24V RD
PFCL3 DLILSW1
S.GND WE BE GN TFM GN 24V WE k 2-2 S.G BE

TFM
TAMPCB
GN DUPPRSOL A WE 8-1 4-1
1 2
19 20
19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7-32
2 1 12 3 12 3
B4 B3 6-10 LILSW WE WE BN TFM BN

PAPER FEED
8-2 4-2 N.C 1-1 10 R24V YW 15-A9

5V WE OE 7-31 1 YW
Image formation unit
DUPFWDCL
8-3 R24V YW 3-1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN5
UNIT C
N.C
DPSW1
S.GND WE BE GN TAM GN 7-32 1-2 9 2 15-A8 YW

MCCM TAM
R24V 8-4 4-3 P.G YW 3-2

1 3
17 18
17 18
PSW3 WE PK 1-3 8 3 15-A7 READY YW

2 1
8-5 BN TAM BN G(24V) B WE 3-3
PM
7-4
4 3 2 1
4-4
DUPREVCL
654321
123456
REM P.G YW
123456
PK DUPFWDCL WE 5V WE OE 6-1 2-1 START YW
B5 B2 6-11 8-6 24V 24V WE 1-4 7 4 15-A6 3-4 7-3
PFCL3 WE BK PK MCCM FWD PK 6-2 2-2 S.G YW G(5V) YW
8-7 1-5 6 5 15-A5 3-5 7-2
1 2
B WE
SM
2 1
1 2
4-5
15 16
15 16
R24V R24V WE RD BN MCCM REV BN G(24V) 2-3 5V YW 3-6 CLOK YW

8-8 1-6 5 7-1
2 1
6-3 A WE 6 15-A4
REM LB DUPPEVCL WE 4-6
c 24V 2-4
24V WE
1-7 4
IFM REM YW
7 15-A3
IFM
B6 B1 6-12 6-4 2-5
S.GND WE GY G(5.1V) A WE LOCK ALM YW
DSW-R DSW-L
1-8 3 8 15-A2
6 5 4 3 2 1
8-9 DSW-L WE
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3
3 2 1
123
GY 6-5 2-6 WE
5.1V CLOCK YW
8-10 1-9 2 9 15-A1 8-6
1 2 3 4 5 6
2-1
6 5 4 3 2 1
5V WE GY BK BE G(5V) BE 6-6 NC R5V WE
1 2 3 4
8-11 4-7 2-2

11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
NC
9-B1 BK LB OUT LB G(24V) 1-10 1 G(5V) WE
8-5
TNS
4-8 2-4 2-3 8-4
BD
S.GND WE GY BK RD R24V RD 3-6 1-1 RESET(SIDE DECK)
G(5V) GY /BD + WE
10
NC 8-12 DSW-R WE G(24V) 2-4 8-3 13-1
4-9
1 2 3
3 2 1
10-16 1-1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9-B2 GY BK GN TNS GN SHPSW GY 3-5 1-2 /BD - WE SET SIG(SIDE DECK)
INPCB
123456789
8-13 24V 13-2
EL
4-10 10-15 1-2 3-4 1-3 2-5 8-2
5V WE GY CL EL ON REM GY 24V G(5V) WE TxD(SIDE DECK)
8-14 10-14 1-3 3-3 1-4 R24V RD 2-6 8-1 13-3
BK CL BK SM ENABLE GY EL ON 1-1 16-1
10-13 1-4
BYPSOL
S.GND(SIDE DECK)
1 2
2 1
4-11
10
10
BYPSOL YW RD 24V RD SM RET GY 3-2 1-5 P.G BE 13-4
LSU
PFM
9-B3 EL ON 1-2 16-3 R5V OE
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10-12 1-5 2-1 h

DLM-L
R24V WE 4-12 1-1

3
10 11 12 13
9
9
2
SM CWB GY 3-1 1-6 PFM REM BN RxD(SIDE DECK)

6 R24V YW 8-15 10-11 1-6 1-3 16-5 1-2 G(5V) WE 9-12 13-5
i 6
SDPCB
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SM CLK GY
1
9-B4 DLM-L WE 10-10 1-7 LOCK DRAIVE GY 1-3 /ADJUST 1 WE S.GND(SIDE DECK)
BYPPFCL
8-16 1-4 16-7 9-11 13-6
ODSW SHPSW
N.C N.C 5V OE
1
BYPPFCL YW G(5V) WE
1 2 3
4-1
1 2 3
10-9 1-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9-B5 SHPSW GN 1-4 9-10 READY(SIDE DECK)

PCL1 N.C N.C 13-7
2
1
10-8 1-9 4-2 /ADJUST 2 WE

LB 1-5 9-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R24V YW PCL1 LB SM M3 GY GND BE FEED(SIDE DECK)
DLM-R
R24V WE G(5V) WE
1 2
2 1
13-8
2
1
9-B6 4-13 10-7 1-10 4-3

16 15 14 13 12 11 10
7 8
7 8
8-17 RD 1-6 9-8
LD
24V RD SM M2 GY /EN WE FEED SW SIG(SIDE DECK)
S.GND YW DLM-R WE 4-14 10-6 1-11 5V WE 1-7 9-7 13-9
BYPPSW
9-B7 8-18 SM M1 GY 5-3 R24V RD G(5V) WE
3 2 1
1 2 3
10-5 1-12 1-1 16-2 FEED REQEST(SIDE DECK)

1
SM Vref GY ODSW WE 1-8 9-6 13-10

BYPPSW YW PCL2 WE 10-4 1-13 5-2 P.G BE /VD1 + WE
DDM
9-B8 BN PCL2 BN ODSW GY GND WE 1-2 16-4 1-9
/VD1 - WE
9-5
10-3 1-14 5-1 DDM REM BN
1 2
2 1
4-15
10 11 12 13
1-10 9-4
5 6
5 6
5V YW RD 24V RD OSDS2 GY 1-3 16-6 /VD2 + WE

9-B9 4-16 10-2
OSDS1 GY
1-15 LOCK DRAIVE GY 1-11 9-3
WE S.G GY 1-4 16-8 /VD2 - WE
OSDS1
10-1 1-16 7-1 1-12 9-2
3 2 1
BE G(5V) BE 5V GY G(5V) WE
PRIPCB
1-13 9-1
TLDS
1 2 3
4-17 7-2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
GY G(5V) YW YW TLS YW OSDS1 GY

BE 9-A9 4-18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7-3
CN3
BYPPWSW
OE R5V OE
1
PK GY BYPPWSW DIG 2 YW i NC GY 4-19
HDDFM
9-A8
2
4-20 S.G GY 5V OE 14-2 HDDFM BK
h
OSDS2
1 3 5 7 9
9-13
2 4 6 8 10
1
PK
1 2
2 1
GY BYPPWSW DIG 1 YW 7-4
3 2 1
16-9
3 2 1
3
9-A7 5V GY WTDS YW 14-1 24V RD

PK
i
GY 7-5 WTDS 16-10
BYPPWSW DIG 0 YW OSDS2 GY
4
9-A6 7-6 GND BE

BYPTSW
YW GY BYPTSW YW 16-11
9-A5 NC
16-12
1
BE GY G(5V) YW 14-6
2
9-A4 14-5
GY G(5V) YW
BYPPLSW
GY BE 9-A3
FWEBSOL
3 2 1
3
1
GY 2B GY BYPPLSW YW
14-4 FWEBSOL GN BK
9-A2
EPCB
2
2
NSPCB
2
2
3
3
7 GY OE 7
GY 5V YW 14-3 24V RD RD
1
3
1
1
1
1
9-A1
CN4
14-12 IFFM BK
IFFM
1 2
2 1
FCL1-H YW 18-A1
R24V YW 18-A3
FCL1-L YW 18-A4
R24V YW 18-A5
RCL YW 18-A6
R24V YW 18-A7
FCL2-H YW 18-A8
R24V YW 18-A9
FCL2-L YW 18-B1
R24V YW 18-B2
FCL3 PK 18-B3
R24V PK 18-B4
FCL4 YW 18-B5
R24V YW 18-B6
FCL5 YW 18-B7
R24V YW 18-B8
18-A2
18-B9
TC WE 19-A1
R24V WE 19-A2
CFM WE 19-A3
24V WE 19-A4
EFM1 WE 19-A5
24V WE 19-A6
EFM2 WE 19-A7
24V WE 19-A8
5V WE 19-B1
19-B2
19-B3
19-B4
19-B5
19-B6
19-B7
19-B8
14-11 R24V RD
17-10
PFSW3 YW 20-10
5V YW 20-11
GND YW 20-12
PFSW4 YW 20-13
5V YW 20-14
GND YW 20-15
PFSW5 YW 20-16
5V YW 20-17
GND YW 20-18
PFSW6 YW 20-19
5V YW 20-20
20-21
20-22
20-23
20-24
20-25
20-26
20-27
20-28
20-29
20-30
20-31
20-32
20-33
20-34
20-35
20-36
20-37
20-38
20-39
20-40
14-10
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
17-9
20-1
20-2
GND YW 20-3
PFSW1 YW 20-4
5V YW 20-5
GND YW 20-6
PFSW2 YW 20-7
5V YW 20-8
GND YW 20-9
14-7
14-8
14-9
UPLESW2 PK
COM(G) PK
UPLESW1 PK
R24V PK
LM-U PK
UPLESW2 LB
COM(G) LB
UPLESW1 LB
R24V LB
LM-L LB
S.G(TH) WE
TH WE
FDESW WE
5V WE
N.C
PG BE
SG BE
DSPS BN
R24V RD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NC
NC
NC
NC
S.GND BN
DPLSW1-L BN
5V BN
S.GND BN
DPLSW2-L BN
5V BN
S.GND BN
DPLSW3-L BN
5V BN
S.GND GY
DPLSW1-R GY
5V GY
S.GND GY
DPLSW2-R GY
5V GY
S.GND GY
DPLSW3-R GY
5V GY
S.GND WE
WTBSW WE
HUMS SIG WE
GND(5V) WE
Wire color Symbol

6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 BLACK BK
BROWN BN
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 YELLOW YW
3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 43 21
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
3 2 1 2 1 GREEN GN
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BLUE BE
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 DSPS WHITE WE
WE
WE
WE
YW
YW
YW
GY
GY
GY
WE
WE
WE
YW
YW
YW
GY
GY
GY
YW
YW
YW
1234 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 PINK PK
RED RD
TC 3 2 1 3 21 3 21 3 21 3 21 3 21 3 21 ORANGE OE
HUMS LIGHT BLUE LB
FCL1-H FCL1-L RCL FCL2-H FCL2-L FCL3 FCL4 FCL5 PFSW1 PFSW2 PFSW3 PFSW4 PFSW5 PFSW6 PURPLE PE
LM-U LM-L CFM EFM1 EFM2 GRAY GY
DPLSW1-L DPLSW3-L DPLSW1-R DPLSW3-R
8 FDESW DPLSW2-L DPLSW2-R WTBSW 8
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-21
KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.
Headquarters: Western Region:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008 14101 Alton Parkway,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008 Irvine, California 92618-7006
TEL : (973) 808-8444 TEL : (949) 457-9000
FAX : (973) 882-6000 FAX : (949) 457-9119
New York Show Room: Southeastern Region:
149 West 51st street, 1500 Oakbrook Drive,
New York, NY 10019 Norcross, Georgia 30093
TEL : (212) 554-2679 TEL : (770) 729-9786
FAX : (212) 554-2625 FAX : (770) 729-9873
Northeastern Region: Southwestern Region:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008 2825 West Story Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008 Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (973) 808-8444 TEL : (972) 550-8987
FAX : (973) 882-4401 FAX : (972) 570-4704
Midwestern Region: Dallas Parts Distribution Center
201 Hansen Court Suite 119 & National Training Center:
Wood Dale, Illinois 60179 2825 West Story Road,
TEL : (630) 238-9982 Irving, Texas 75038-5299
FAX : (630) 238-9487 TEL : (972) 659-0055
FAX : (972) 570-5816
KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.

6120 Kestrel Road, Mississauga,
Ontario L5T 1S8, Canada
TEL : (905) 670-4425
FAX : (905) 670-8116
KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.

Av. 16 de Septiembre #407
Col. Santa Inés,
02130 Azcapotzalco
México, D.F. México
TEL : (55) 383-2741
FAX : (55) 383-7804
©2002 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation
is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION
Printed in U.S.A.

Ri4530 5530 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ri4530 5530 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ri 4530/5530

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

1-2 Handling Precautions

1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-5 Troubleshooting 1-1-1

1-5-3 Image formation problems .................................................................................................................. 1-5-31

(6) No refeed. ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5-55

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-9 Feedshift and eject sections ................................................................................................................ 2-1-33

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-3 Operation of the PCBs

Fixing system ................................. Heat roller

Fixing system ................................. Heat roller

1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

1 Operation panel # Original table ﬁ Main switch

(2) Operation panel

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section

1 Paper feed section 7 Charge erasing section

1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Drive system 1 (optical section)

1 Scanner motor pulley

(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train)

1 Idle gear 30 # Paper feed drive pulley 29/52

(3) Drive system 3 (Deck drive motor drive train)

1 Pulley 26 ! Deck drive motor gear

(4) Drive system 4 (image formation motor drive train)

1 Bypass paper feed idle gear 0 Drum drive belt

Figure 1-1-8 Developing section

1 Toner supply gear 5 Spiral gear A

(5) Drive system 5 (Paper conveying motor drive train)

1 Pulley 32 # Gear 18/26

(6) Drive system 6 (duplex section)

1 Duplex joint gear 0 Front transfer drive gear

(7) Drive system 7 (DF)

As viewed from machine rear

Figure 1-1-11 DF (inside rear of machine)

1 Original feed motor pulley 0 DF registration pulley 28/18

As viewed from machine front

Figure 1-1-12 DF (inside front of machine)

1 Lower original conveying pulley 25/18 7 Joint gear 14

1-2-2 Developer and toner

1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 35°C/50 - 95°F

a: 1141 mm/4415/16" d: 1470 mm/577/8"

Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure

Removing the securing tape and spacer. Initializing the developer

Removing the pins Applying toner to the cleaning blade

Removing the developing unit.

Installing the drum. Adding toner.